Manual PSS 4

PRELIMINARY
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH 4 (PSS-4) | Release 1.0.0
USER GUIDE
PRELIMINARY
3KC13010AAAA
ISSUE 1
SEPTEMBER 2010
Legal notice
PRELIMINARY
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2010 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "About this document."
PRELIMINARY
Contents
PRELIMINARY
About this document
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xxxi
xxxi
Reason for revision ................................................................................................................................................................. xxxi

xxxi
Intended audience .................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

xxxi
How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................ xxxi
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxiii

xxxiii
Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxiii

xxxiii
Related information .............................................................................................................................................................. xxxiii

xxxiii
User interface to system ...................................................................................................................................................... xxxiv

xxxiv
Using procedures .................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

xxxv
Information product support ............................................................................................................................................... xxxv

xxxv
Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvi

xxxvi
How to order ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvi

xxxvi
Training ..................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvi

xxxvi
Packaging collection and recovery requirements ...................................................................................................... xxxvi
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ..................................................................................................................... xxxvi
How to comment .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvii

xxxvii
1 Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1-2
PRELIMINARY
General notes on safety ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-4
Laser safety ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6

1-6
Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 iii
3KC13010AAAA Issue 1
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Save these safety instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 1-13
1-13
2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3

2-3
Hardware design and layout .................................................................................................................................................. 2-5

2-5
Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-11

2-11
1830 PSS-4 OTs ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-18

2-18
1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers ........................................................................................................................................... 2-38

2-38
DCM shelves ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-41

2-41
Automatic power reduction (APR) .................................................................................................................................. 2-42

2-42
Ethernet EPL and EVPL services ..................................................................................................................................... 2-52

2-52
Network Topologies .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-55

2-55
Configurations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-64

2-64
Protection .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-82

2-82
Alien Wavelength Access .................................................................................................................................................... 2-87

2-87
Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-88

2-88
Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-90

2-90
Status Retrieval ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-95

2-95
System access .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-96

2-96
Synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-97

2-97
Reliability program ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-99

2-99
Ordering ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-117

2-117
Technical specifications ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-133

2-133
PRELIMINARY
3 Stand-alone node set-up
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Before you begin ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-1: Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ............................................................................ 3-4
3-4
Procedure 3-2: Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ........................................................ 3-5
3-5
Procedure 3-3: XFP module extraction .......................................................................................................................... 3-15

3-15
Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction ........................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-17
Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal ...................................................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs ....................................................................................................... 3-20

3-20
Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................... 3-21

3-21
Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................... 3-24

3-24
Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software .......................... 3-26
3-26
Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ............................................................................................... 3-32

3-32
Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address ............................................................................................................... 3-33

3-33
Procedure 3-12: Configure the OAMP Ethernet port ................................................................................................ 3-34

3-34
Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time .......................................................................................... 3-35
3-35
Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................. 3-36

3-36
Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties ........................................................................................ 3-37

3-37
Procedure 3-16: Verify system provisioning ................................................................................................................ 3-38

3-38
Procedure 3-17: Example configuration of ftp server ............................................................................................... 3-39

3-39
4 User Operations Procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI ......................... 4-2
4-2
Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning ........................................................................ 4-4

4-4
Procedure 4-3: Software installation .................................................................................................................................. 4-5

4-5
Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) Provision .................................... 4-6
4-6
Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning ..................................................................................................................................... 4-10

4-10
PRELIMINARY
Procedure 4-6: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provision ........................................................................... 4-12
4-12
Procedure 4-7: IP route provisioning .............................................................................................................................. 4-18

4-18
Procedure 4-8: GCC network setup ................................................................................................................................ 4-19

4-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 v
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-9: TCA profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 4-20
4-20
Procedure 4-10: Provisioning for ETR operation ....................................................................................................... 4-23

4-23
Procedure 4-11: Cleaning optical connectors ............................................................................................................... 4-24

4-24
Procedure 4-12: Inspecting optical connectors ............................................................................................................ 4-27

4-27
Procedure 4-13: Cleaning other optical components ................................................................................................ 4-28

4-28
Procedure 4-14: ID module replacement ....................................................................................................................... 4-29

4-29
Procedure 4-15: Fan and air filter cleaning and replacement ................................................................................. 4-30
4-30
5 Security administration
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
User accounts and privileges ................................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2
Configuring user accounts ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6

5-6
Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts ............................................................................................ 5-10

5-10
Login sessions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-13

5-13
System security features ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-15

5-15
Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure ................................................................................................................ 5-20

5-20
Authentication ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-21

5-21
Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures ................................................................................................................. 5-25

5-25
Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures .................................................................................................................................... 5-27

5-27
6 Alarm List
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
ALLCHANMISS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6-7
ALLCHANMISSOUT ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-8

6-8
AMPDISABLED ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-9

6-9
PRELIMINARY
APRNODE .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-10

6-10
APROSC .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-11

6-11
APRTOPO ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

6-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAIL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6-13
APRUNAVAILOSC ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-14

6-14
APSB .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-15

6-15
APSCM ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16

6-16
APSMM ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-17

6-17
AUTHFAIL .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-18

6-18
AUTORESET .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-19

6-19
B1SD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-20

6-20
BASELINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-21

6-21
BDI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-22

6-22
BDIODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-23

6-23
CARDINIT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-24

6-24
CONFIGFAIL .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-25

6-25
CONTCOM .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-26

6-26
CONTEQPT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-27

6-27
CONTR ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-28

6-28
CONTR-OUT .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-29

6-29
CRDINIT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-30

6-30
DATAERR ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-31

6-31
DATAFLT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-32

6-32
DBBKUP-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-33

6-33
DBFL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-34

6-34
DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-35

6-35
DBINVALID ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-36

6-36
PRELIMINARY
DBMEMTRF .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-37

6-37
DBRSTR-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-38

6-38
DEG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-39

6-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 vii
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DISCOVERMOD .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-40
6-40
DORMANTUSER ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-41

6-41
EBER .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-42

6-42
EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-43

6-43
EQPTBOOT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-44

6-44
EQPTDGR ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-45

6-45
EQPTDGROCH ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-46

6-46
EQPTDGROCH-OUT .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-47

6-47
EQPTPORT .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-48

6-48
EXCESSLOAD ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-49

6-49
FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-50

6-50
FANSPEEDHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-51

6-51
FANSPEEDLOW ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-52

6-52
FANSPEEDMAN ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-53

6-53
FECDEG .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-54

6-54
FELANLFI ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-55

6-55
FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-56

6-56
FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-57

6-57
FELANRFI ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-58

6-58
FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-59

6-59
FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-60

6-60
FEPRLF ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-61

6-61
FPGAFAIL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-62

6-62
FPGAINIT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-63

6-63
PRELIMINARY
FPGATIMEOUT .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-64

6-64
FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-65

6-65
FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-66

6-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE ............................................................................................................................................... 6-67
6-67
FWUPGRADEPENDING .................................................................................................................................................. 6-68

6-68
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT .......................................................................................................................................... 6-69

6-69
HIBER ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-70

6-70
HIGAIN ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-71

6-71
INSERTMOD .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-72

6-72
INTTEMP [over] .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-73

6-73
INTTEMP [under] .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-74

6-74
INTRUSION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-75

6-75
LANLFI ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-76

6-76
LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-77

6-77
LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-78

6-78
LANRFI ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-79

6-79
LCK ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-80

6-80
LFD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-81

6-81
LFIEGR ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-82

6-82
LINKDOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-83

6-83
LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-84

6-84
LOF ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-85

6-85
LOFEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-86

6-86
LOF-O ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-87

6-87
LOGAIN .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-88

6-88
LOM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-89

6-89
LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-90

6-90
PRELIMINARY
LOSDCM .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-91

6-91
LOSLDSIG ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-92

6-92
LOS-O ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-93

6-93
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 ix
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-OUT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-94
6-94
LOS-P ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-95

6-95
LPBKLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-96

6-96
LPBKTERM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-97

6-97
LSSEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-98

6-98
MAN ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-99

6-99
MANRESET .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-101

6-101
MANWKSWBK .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-102

6-102
MANWKSWPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-103

6-103
MISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-104

6-104
MISMATCHMOD ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-105

6-105
MOD ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-106

6-106
MODOUTOOR .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-107

6-107
MTCESURV .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-108

6-108
MTCESURVDGR ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-109

6-109
NET ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-110

6-110
NOTALLOWED .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-111

6-111
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH ........................................................................................................................................... 6-112

6-112
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-113

6-113
OCHCOLLISION ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-114

6-114
OCHCOLLISION-OUT .................................................................................................................................................... 6-115

6-115
OCHKEYDUP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-116

6-116
OCHKEYOVERLAP ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-117

6-117
OCHFDI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-118

6-118
PRELIMINARY
OCHPDI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-119

6-119
OCHTRAILDUP ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-120

6-120
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN ................................................................................................................................................. 6-121

6-121
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-122
6-122
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT .................................................................................................................................................... 6-123

6-123
OCI ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-124

6-124
OPR ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-125

6-125
OPRPWRHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-126

6-126
OPRPWRLOW ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-127

6-127
OPRLOSSHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-128

6-128
OPRLOSSLOW ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-129

6-129
OPR-OUT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-130

6-130
OPRTX .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-131

6-131
OPRUNACHIEVE .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-132

6-132
OSCSSF .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-133

6-133
PLM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-134

6-134
PRCDRERR-TOPO ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-135

6-135
PWR .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-136

6-136
PWRADJFAIL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-137

6-137
PWRADJREQ ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-138

6-138
PWRMARGIN ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-139

6-139
PWRMAXGAIN .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-140

6-140
PWRSUSP .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-141

6-141
PWRTILTSUSP .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-142

6-142
REMOVEMOD ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-143

6-143
REPLUNITMISS ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-144

6-144
REPLUNITMISSMOD ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-146

6-146
PRELIMINARY
RFIEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-147

6-147
SDBER .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-148

6-148
SDEG-O .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-149

6-149
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xi
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-150
6-150
SSFODU ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-151

6-151
SWFTDWN ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-152

6-152
SWUPGCOMMIT ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-153

6-153
SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 6-154

6-154
SYSBOOT .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-155

6-155
TIM ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-156

6-156
TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-157

6-157
TRMTMOD ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-158

6-158
UNKNOWNMOD ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-159

6-159
UNKNOWN .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-160

6-160
UPM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-161

6-161
URU-OTS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-162

6-162
URU-OTU .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-163

6-163
URU-S ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-164

6-164
USALS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-165

6-165
USLOS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-166

6-166
USOCHCOLLISION ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-167

6-167
VOLTAGE[high] .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-168

6-168
VOLTAGE[low] ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-169

6-169
VTS{1-10}LOCKOUTOFPR ......................................................................................................................................... 6-170

6-170
VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWPR .......................................................................................................................................... 6-171

6-171
VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWBK .......................................................................................................................................... 6-172

6-172
VTS{1-10}MANWKSWPR ............................................................................................................................................ 6-173

6-173
PRELIMINARY
VTS{1-10}MANWKSWBK ........................................................................................................................................... 6-174

6-174
VTS{1-10}WKSWPR ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-175

6-175
VTSFDI ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-176

6-176
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSOCI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-177
6-177
WKSWBK .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-178

6-178
WKSWPR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-179

6-179
7 Alarm Clearing Procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal) ..................................................................................................................... 7-7

7-7
ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal) ......................................................................................................... 7-8

7-8
AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled) ......................................................................................................................... 7-11

7-11
APRNODE (APR Active - Node) .................................................................................................................................... 7-13

7-13
APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition) ........................................................................................... 7-14

7-14
APRTOPO (APR Active - invalid topology) ............................................................................................................... 7-15

7-15
APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting) ............................................................................. 7-16

7-16
APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure) .......................................................................................... 7-17

7-17
APSB (APS protection switching byte failure) ........................................................................................................... 7-18

7-18
APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch) .................................................................................................................................. 7-20

7-20
APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-23

7-23
AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure) ............................................................................................................................. 7-25

7-25
AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset) ..................................................................................................................... 7-26

7-26
B1SD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27

7-27
BASELINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-28

7-28
BDI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-29

7-29
BDIODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-30

7-30
CARDINIT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-31

7-31
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed) ....................................................................................................... 7-32

7-32
PRELIMINARY
CONTCOM .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-33

7-33
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) ............................................................................................................................. 7-35

7-35
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure) ................................................................................................ 7-37

7-37
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xiii
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure) ................................................................. 7-39
7-39
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event) ............................................................................................................................ 7-41

7-41
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress) .............................................................................................................. 7-42

7-42
DATAFLT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-43

7-43
DBFL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-45

7-45
DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-46

7-46
DBINVALID ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-47

7-47
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure) ..................................................................................................... 7-49

7-49
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In-Progress) .............................................................................................................. 7-50

7-50
DEG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-51

7-51
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered) .................................................................................................. 7-53

7-53
DORMANTUSER (User inactive) .................................................................................................................................. 7-54

7-54
EBER (Excessive BER) ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-55

7-55
EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-56

7-56
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure) ...................................................................................................................... 7-59

7-59
EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device) ............................................................................................................................... 7-61

7-61
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) ......................................... 7-63

7-63
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) .............................. 7-65

7-65
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device) ................................................................................................................................ 7-67

7-67
EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load) .................................................................................................................. 7-69

7-69
FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-70

7-70
FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high) .................................................................................................................. 7-72

7-72
FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low) ...................................................................................................................... 7-73

7-73
FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum) ..................................................................................... 7-74

7-74
PRELIMINARY
FECDEG (Errored bits before FEC degrade) .............................................................................................................. 7-75

7-75
FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault) ................................................................................................................................... 7-76

7-76
FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-77

7-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-78
7-78
FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault) ............................................................................................................................... 7-79

7-79
FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-80

7-80
FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-81

7-81
FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure) .................................................................................................................. 7-82

7-82
FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure) ........................................................................................ 7-83

7-83
FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing) ........................................................................................................................................ 7-84

7-84
FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout) .................................................................................................................................. 7-85

7-85
FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-86

7-86
FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-87

7-87
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to become obsolete with the software
release upgrade) .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-88
7-88
FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending) ........................................................................................ 7-89

7-89
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not the default version for this
software release) ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-91
7-91
HIBER (High BER) ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-93

7-93
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High) ......................................................................... 7-94
7-94
INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted) ................................................................................................................ 7-95

7-95
INTEMP [over] ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-96

7-96
INTEMP [under] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-98

7-98
INTRUSION (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts) .................................................................................................... 7-99

7-99
LANLFI (Local Fault) ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-100

7-100
LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-102

7-102
LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-103

7-103
LANRFI ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-104

7-104
PRELIMINARY
LCK .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-106

7-106
LFD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-107

7-107
LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault) .......................................................................................................................... 7-108

7-108
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xv
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKDOWN ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-109
7-109
LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-112

7-112
LOF ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-114

7-114
LOFEGR ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-119

7-119
LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF) .................................................................................................................................. 7-120

7-120
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low) ........................................................ 7-123
7-123
LOM ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-125

7-125
LOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-127

7-127
LOSDCM ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-134

7-134
LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS) .................................................................................................................................. 7-136

7-136
LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS) .................................................................................................................................. 7-138

7-138
LOS-OUT ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-141

7-141
LOS-P ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-144

7-144
LPBKLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-146

7-146
LPBKTERM .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-147

7-147
LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization) ............................................................................................... 7-148

7-148
MAN ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-149

7-149
MANRESET (Card Manual Reset) ............................................................................................................................... 7-152

7-152
MANWKSWBK .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-153

7-153
MANWKSWPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-154

7-154
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch) ....................................................................................... 7-155

7-155
MISMATCHMOD ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-159

7-159
MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion) ................................................................... 7-161

7-161
MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range) ...................................................................................... 7-163

7-163
PRELIMINARY
MTCESURV (Add power control failure) .................................................................................................................. 7-164

7-164
MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade) ....................................................... 7-166

7-166
NET ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-167

7-167
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed) ........................................................................................................................... 7-169
7-169
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH .......................................................................................................................................... 7-170

7-170
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-171

7-171
OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision) ........................................................................................................................ 7-172

7-172
OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction) .......................................................................... 7-174

7-174
OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key) ........................................................................................................................ 7-176

7-176
OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap) ................................................................................................................ 7-178

7-178
OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication) ....................................................................................... 7-179

7-179
OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator) .......................................................................................................... 7-181

7-181
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name) ....................................................................................................... 7-183

7-183
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect) ....................................................................... 7-185

7-185
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected) .................................................................................................................. 7-187

7-187
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected) ...................................................................................................... 7-189

7-189
OCI ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-191

7-191
OPR (Channel Power Unstable) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-192

7-192
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High) ........................................................... 7-194
7-194
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too Low) ............................................................. 7-196
7-196
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low) ........................................................................... 7-198

7-198
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range) ............................................................................ 7-200

7-200
OPRTX (Channel optical power out of range) .......................................................................................................... 7-201

7-201
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable) .............................................................................................. 7-203

7-203
OSCSSF .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-206

7-206
PLM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-207

7-207
PRCDRERR-TOPO ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-208

7-208
PRELIMINARY
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid) .............................................................................. 7-210

7-210
PWR .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-212

7-212
PWRADJFAIL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-214

7-214
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xvii
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJREQ ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-217
7-217
PWRMARGIN ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-219

7-219
PWRMAXGAIN .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-221

7-221
PWRSUSP (Power management suspended) ............................................................................................................ 7-223

7-223
PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended) ............................................................................ 7-224

7-224
REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed) ....................................................................................................... 7-225

7-225
REPLUNTMISS .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-226

7-226
REPLUNITMISS ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-228

7-228
RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault) ..................................................................................................................... 7-230

7-230
SDBER (Signal Degrade) ................................................................................................................................................. 7-231

7-231
SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade) .............................................................................................................................. 7-232

7-232
SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-235

7-235
SSFODU ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-237

7-237
SWFTDWN ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-239

7-239
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)) ..................................................... 7-240

7-240
SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-241

7-241
SYSBOOT (Cold Start/Warm Start) ............................................................................................................................. 7-246

7-246
TIM ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-247

7-247
TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-250

7-250
TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure) ................................................................................................ 7-252

7-252
UNKNOWN .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-254

7-254
UPM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-259

7-259
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) .................................................................................................................. 7-260

7-260
USALS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-262

7-262
PRELIMINARY
USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent) ............................................................................................................................ 7-264

7-264
USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction) ............................................................. 7-266

7-266
VOLTAGE[high] .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-268

7-268
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[low] ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-269
7-269
VTSFDI ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-271

7-271
VTSOCI .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-272

7-272
WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working) ............................................................................................................... 7-273

7-273
WKSWPR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-276

7-276
8 Supporting Procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
Replacing system components ............................................................................................................................................. 8-2

8-2
Database Backup and Restore ........................................................................................................................................... 8-23

8-23
Determining the far end of a service ............................................................................................................................... 8-25

8-25
Checking for services on a port ......................................................................................................................................... 8-26

8-26
Performing loopbacks ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-27

8-27
Path power trace ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-28

8-28
High temperature troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................... 8-30

8-30
Reseating a card ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-32

8-32
Glossary
Index
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xix
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
List of tables
PRELIMINARY
1 Chapter contents ..................................................................................................................................................... xxxii
xxxii
2-1 CWDM filters and frequencies .......................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-2 DWDM filters and frequencies .......................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-3 11QPA4 XFPs ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
2-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs ............................................................................................................................................... 2-25
2-5 Client signal time slot requirements ................................................................................................................. 2-31
2-6 4DPA4 SFPs (DualTran) ...................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2-7 4DPA4 SFPs (FlexMux) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2-8 Failure Rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (controlled environment) ................ 2-100
2-9 Failure Rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (uncontrolled environment) ........... 2-106
2-10 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-4 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees .................................................... 2-118
2-11 PSS-4 SFPs ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-119

2-119
2-12 1830 PSS-4 common equipment ..................................................................................................................... 2-126
2-13 1830 PSS-4 installation kits .............................................................................................................................. 2-127
2-14 1830 PSS-4 power options ................................................................................................................................ 2-127
2-15 1830 PSS-4 customer-replaceable items ...................................................................................................... 2-128
2-16 1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous equipment .......................................................................................................... 2-128
2-17 Power filter input specifications ...................................................................................................................... 2-133
2-18 SFP-XFP specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 2-134
2-19 SFC1 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................ 2-148

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxi
September 2010
PRELIMINARY List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-1 Office power connection and cable color ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3-2 Test and expected results ........................................................................................................................................ 3-8

3-8
3-3 Power connection test and Results .................................................................................................................... 3-10
3-4 Shelf ID and Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 3-12

3-12
4-1 PC and software requirements .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors ................................................................................................... 4-24
5-1 User privilege levels ................................................................................................................................................. 5-3

5-3
7-1 Software upgrade status and actions .............................................................................................................. 7-242
8-1 FTP Server Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 8-12

8-12
8-2 Database Backup and Restore Parameters ..................................................................................................... 8-23

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
List of figures
PRELIMINARY
2-1 PSS-4 shelf ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-7
2-2 PSS-4 slot layout and numbering ........................................................................................................................ 2-9
2-3 Typical 1830 PSS-4 FOADM application ...................................................................................................... 2-12
2-4 Typical 1830 PSS-4 ILA example ..................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-5 Typical terminal node application ..................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-6 11QPA4 module ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-18

2-18
2-7 11QPA4 architecture .............................................................................................................................................. 2-19

2-19
2-8 11DPE12 faceplate ................................................................................................................................................. 2-23

2-23
2-9 11DPE12 block diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2-10 4DPA4 faceplate ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-27

2-27
2-11 4DPA4 block diagram ........................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2-12 Add/Drop operational mode ................................................................................................................................ 2-29
2-13 CROSSREGEN operational mode .................................................................................................................... 2-30
2-14 4DPA4 client signal mapping examples ......................................................................................................... 2-32
2-15 ILA block diagram ................................................................................................................................................. 2-39

2-39
2-16 Full-height LD module .......................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2-17 Single fiber cut ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-43

2-43
2-18 Single fiber restoration .......................................................................................................................................... 2-45

2-45
2-19 Double fiber cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-46

2-46
2-20 Double fiber restoration ........................................................................................................................................ 2-46

PRELIMINARY
2-21 Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier .................................................................................................................. 2-48
2-22 ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit .............................................................................. 2-50
2-23 EPL and EVPL services ........................................................................................................................................ 2-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxiii
September 2010
PRELIMINARY List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 HiGig vs. Q-in-Q frame formats ....................................................................................................................... 2-53
2-25 Interworking with 10GbE Router/Switch ...................................................................................................... 2-54
2-26 DWDM FOADM Linear Network ................................................................................................................... 2-56
2-27 CWDM FOADM Linear Network .................................................................................................................... 2-56
2-28 FOADM Ring Interconnect ................................................................................................................................. 2-57
2-29 DWDM Connectivity between 1830 PSS-4 and 1830 PSS-32 .............................................................. 2-58
2-30 PSS-4 DWDM FOADM Point-to-Point Connection (with LD) ............................................................ 2-58
2-31 PSS-4 CWDM or DWDM FOADM Point-to-Point Connection (w/o LD) ....................................... 2-59
2-32 FOADM/TOADM Linear Network ................................................................................................................. 2-59
2-33 FOADM/TOADM Ring Network ..................................................................................................................... 2-60
2-34 FOADM/TOADM Dual Ring Interworking with mixed PSS types .................................................... 2-61
2-35 CWDM bus topology ............................................................................................................................................. 2-62
2-36 DWDM bus topology ............................................................................................................................................ 2-62
2-37 PSS-4 ILA in PSS-32 Network .......................................................................................................................... 2-63
2-38 Multi-shelf NE example ....................................................................................................................................... 2-65

2-65
2-39 12-channel SFD-based end terminal with optional LD ............................................................................. 2-67
2-40 4-channel SFC-based end terminal ................................................................................................................... 2-68
2-41 PSS-4 FOADM ring terminal ............................................................................................................................. 2-69
2-42 8-channel degree 2 DWDM FOADM ............................................................................................................ 2-70
2-43 8/4 channel degree 2 DWDM FOADM ........................................................................................................ 2-71
2-44 DWDM FOADM without line LD .................................................................................................................. 2-71
2-45 CWDM FOADM ................................................................................................................................................... 2-72

2-72
2-46 Degree 3 DWDM FOADM ................................................................................................................................. 2-74
2-47 Degree 4 DWDM FOADM ................................................................................................................................. 2-75

PRELIMINARY
2-48 Mixed CWDM/DWDM FOADM ..................................................................................................................... 2-76
2-49 SFC-2A bidirectional fiber connections ......................................................................................................... 2-78
2-50 SFC-4A bidirectional fiber connections ......................................................................................................... 2-79
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
List of figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-51 SFC-8 bidirectional fiber connections ............................................................................................................. 2-80
2-52 PSS-4 bidirectional 2-degree OADM .............................................................................................................. 2-81
2-53 Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration .................................................................................................. 2-81
2-54 E-SNCP on 4DPA4 OT ......................................................................................................................................... 2-82
2-55 11QPA4 E-SNCP examples ................................................................................................................................. 2-84
2-56 PSS-4 alien wavelength access .......................................................................................................................... 2-87
2-57 Loopback access points ........................................................................................................................................ 2-89
2-58 Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead
Time (controlled environment) ..................................................................................................................... 2-111
Time (uncontrolled environment) ................................................................................................................ 2-112
3-1 Showing compliance and safety warnings ....................................................................................................... 3-3
3-2 Bay frame bracket installation .............................................................................................................................. 3-4
3-3 Rear ground attachment point ............................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-4 Power Cable ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-8

3-8
3-5 Power cables installed (front cover open) ........................................................................................................ 3-9
3-6 Power cables installed (front cover closed) ................................................................................................... 3-10
3-7 Half size pack adapter ............................................................................................................................................ 3-11

3-11
PRELIMINARY
3-8 Shelf ID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-12

3-12
3-9 Fibers (PSS-1 photo - PSS-4 illustration pending) ..................................................................................... 3-13
3-10 XFP bail (PSS-1 photo - PSS-4 illustration pending) ................................................................................ 3-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxv
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-11 XFP bail pull ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-16
3-16
3-12 Push in wedge (PSS-1 photo - PSS-4 illustration pending) ..................................................................... 3-17
3-13 Pull out SFP .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-18

3-18
3-14 LC fiber tool .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-19

3-19
3-15 PC command window ........................................................................................................................................... 3-21
3-16 Login Screen ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-22

3-22
3-17 WebUI uninitialized database warning ............................................................................................................ 3-22
3-18 WebUI NE name prompt ...................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-19 WebUI NE restart progress window ................................................................................................................. 3-23
3-20 Windows Firewall settings ................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3-21 FileZilla connect to server window .................................................................................................................. 3-40
3-22 FileZilla server window ........................................................................................................................................ 3-41

3-41
3-23 FileZilla groups menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-42

3-42
3-24 FileZilla groups window ....................................................................................................................................... 3-42
3-25 FileZilla add group window ................................................................................................................................ 3-43
3-26 FileZilla groups shared folders window ......................................................................................................... 3-44
3-27 FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 3-45
3-28 FileZilla users menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-46

3-46
3-29 FileZilla users window .......................................................................................................................................... 3-47

3-47
3-30 FileZilla add user window ................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3-31 FileZilla users shared folders window ............................................................................................................. 3-49
3-32 FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 3-50
8-1 Push in wedge ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-5

8-5
8-2 Pull out SFP ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6

8-6
PRELIMINARY
8-3 XFP bail ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7

8-7
8-4 XFP bail pull ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-8

8-8
8-5 Service-Affecting Warning Window ................................................................................................................ 8-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
List of figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-6 Unscrew Filter Retainer ........................................................................................................................................ 8-18
8-18
8-7 New Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-19

8-19
8-8 New Filter Installed ................................................................................................................................................ 8-19

8-19
8-9 Fan Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-21

8-21
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxvii
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
List of procedures
PRELIMINARY
3-1 Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ............................................................................................ 3-4
3-2 Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ....................................................................... 3-5
3-3 XFP module extraction ......................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3-4 SFP module extraction .......................................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-17
3-5 LC fiber removal ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
3-6 Verify installation and seat packs ...................................................................................................................... 3-20
3-7 Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................................... 3-21
3-8 Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-9 Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software .......................................... 3-26
3-10 Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ................................................................................................................. 3-32
3-11 Set the loopback IP address ................................................................................................................................. 3-33
3-12 Configure the OAMP Ethernet port ................................................................................................................. 3-34
3-13 Set the network element date and time ............................................................................................................ 3-35
3-14 Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................................... 3-36
3-15 Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................... 3-37
3-16 Verify system provisioning .................................................................................................................................. 3-38
3-17 Example configuration of ftp server ................................................................................................................ 3-39
4 User Operations Procedures
4-1 Connect to Network Element through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI ........................................ 4-2
PRELIMINARY
4-2 Personal computer requirements and provisioning ....................................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Software installation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-5

4-5
4-4 Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) Provision ................................................... 4-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxix
September 2010
PRELIMINARY List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-5 Port Provisioning ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4-10
4-6 Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provision .......................................................................................... 4-12
4-7 IP route provisioning .............................................................................................................................................. 4-18
4-8 GCC network setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4-19

4-19
4-9 TCA profiles .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-20

4-20
4-10 Provisioning for ETR operation ......................................................................................................................... 4-23
4-11 Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................................ 4-24
4-12 Inspecting optical connectors ............................................................................................................................. 4-27
4-13 Cleaning other optical components .................................................................................................................. 4-28
4-14 ID module replacement ......................................................................................................................................... 4-29

4-29
4-15 Fan and air filter cleaning and replacement .................................................................................................. 4-30
5-1 Procedures to configure user accounts ........................................................................................................... 5-10
5-2 View security log procedure ................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5-3 RADIUS server procedures ................................................................................................................................. 5-25
5-4 SNMP procedures ................................................................................................................................................... 5-27

5-27
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This User Guide provides information for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4. This 2RU
device is designed to provide a flexible, low cost and low power dissipation OTN based
solution for metro/access applications.
Included in this guide is information on hardware, features, applications, and ordering as
well as detailed procedural information and commands for installation, maintenance,
trouble clearing, and turn-up of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
Reason for revision

This is the initial release of this document. Revisions in subsequent releases will be listed
here.
Intended audience
This document is intended for the following users of theAlcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
documentation library:
• Network planners
• Administrators
• Operators
• Maintenance personnel
1830 PSS Edge Device products are meant to be installed, operated, and maintained by
personnel who have the knowledge, training, and qualifications required to safely perform
the tasks assigned to them. The information, processes, and procedures contained in the
1830 PSS Edge Device product documentation are intended for use by trained and
qualified personnel.
PRELIMINARY
How to use this information product

This User Guide includes installation, procedures, and supporting information , such as
Safety instructions, Product overview, Installation and Provisioning, User Operations
Procedures , Glossary, and Index.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxxi
September 2010
PRELIMINARY About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assumptions
This document assumes that users have an understanding of the following:
• Basic principles of telecommunication transmission
• Common telecommunication and system terminology (a glossary is provided in this
manual to assist you)
• Test sets and tools used in the telecommunication industry
• Local operations and functional procedures of your company
• Personal computer (PC) operation, and common PC terminologies.
Chapter contents
Table 1 Chapter contents
Chapter Contents
Chapter 1, Safety This chapter provides important safety
instructions for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
Chapter 2, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 This chapter provides details about the
features in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
including applications, physical
descriptions, maintenance and loopbacks,
cross-connection information, technical
specifications, and ordering information.
Chapter 3, Stand-alone node set-up This chapter provides details about the
installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4,
physical mounting, cabling, powering, and
provisioning.
Chapter 4, User Operations Procedures This chapter provides procedures to
provision features in Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4
Chapter 5, Security Administration This chapter provides information on
security administration procedures for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 system.
Chapter 6, Alarm List This chapter provides alarms and alarm
description
Chapter 7, Alarm Clearing Procedures This chapter contains the trouble-clearing
procedures required to clear the conditions
for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 8, Supporting Procedures This chapter lists the troubleshooting

procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 that are used in more than one
trouble-clearing procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Chapter contents (continued)
Glossary Defines terms used throughout the

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 documentation.
Index Provides detailed access to the contents of
this document.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Conventions used
The following typographical conventions are used throughout this document:
• Bold is used to identify CIT menu selections and button selections.
• Italic is used to identify NE messages
• Computer voice is used to identify system message text displayed by the CIT
Related information
The Alcatel-Lucent Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 User Guide is part of a set of documents
that support Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS products. The following items are available:
Document Number Document Title

8DG60418 AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product
Information and Planning Guide
8DG60418 BAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 User
Provisioning Guide
8DG60418 CAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG60418 FAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface
PRELIMINARY
Guide
8DG60418 EAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.0.0 TL1 Commands and
Messages Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxxiii
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document Number Document Title

8DG60418 DAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0
Installation and System Turn-Up Guide
8DG60418 HAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.0.0 Safety Guide
8DG60418 GAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.0.0 Engineering and Planning
Tool User Guide
3AL61305 AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 8.0
Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide
8DG60148 KAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
1 (PSS-1) Release 1.0 MSAH Edge Device
User Guide
8DG60418 LAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User
Guide
8DG60418 MAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS-1) Release 1.7.0 MD4H Edge Device
User Guide
8DG60386 JAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS-1) Release 1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User
Guide
8DG60013 MAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 RAMAN
Amplifier and EDFA Release 2.0.0 User Guide
8DG60420 AAAA 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Product
Family Release 3.0.0 CD-ROM1
Notes:
1. This CD does not include the EPT User Guide. This is published on separate media.
User interface to system

Users interact with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 using a Personal Computer (PC), which
permits users to perform system operations such as administration, provisioning, fault
PRELIMINARY
management, and more.

Using the PC interface
Procedures presented in this document expect users to be familiar with the PC and
navigating through the screens of information relating to a particular operation. The
screens are designed to be straightforward and to contain all information relating to a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
particular operation. The procedures presented in this document rely on the information
provided in the screen displays. Therefore, it is imperative that users read all the
information provided in a screen before continuing an operational function.
Using procedures
To find instructions for performing a specific job, find the procedure in the chapter
Contents table.
Procedures contain step-by-step instructions to accomplish a distinct user function.
Supporting procedures are referenced from multiple procedures to support a job function
you are performing. Go to a supporting procedure only when it is referred to by another
procedure. Supporting procedures are not to be accessed directly except by very
experienced personnel.
Important! Perform all steps in a procedure sequentially, unless that step sends you to
another step or procedure.
Unless otherwise instructed, if one procedure sends you to another procedure, you
must return to the first procedure after you complete the second. After you have
completed the first procedure, you have finished.
If/Then statements in a procedure
If / Then ... columns in a procedure contain only one condition that is true in a table cell
under the If ... column. You perform the action in the related table cell under the Then ...
column. You then continue to the next sequential step or as directed by the action under
the Then ... column.
Verifying actions
Sometimes you will be asked to verify that actions have occurred. This may take the form
of a formal statement of the expected response. At other times, the instructions will
merely state that the user should verify an action or response to an action. If the expected
response is not observed and a specific trouble-clearing reference is not made, you should
reference the chapter entitled Trouble Clearing Procedures to start trouble clearing.
Information product support

Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a nontechnical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)
713 5000 (for all countries).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxxv
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical support
Login to OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) at http://support.alcatel-lucent.com and
select your country from the pull-down menu under "Product Technical Support - Phone
and E-mail Contact Information".
How to order
Contact your local sales representative, or login to OLCS at http://support.alcatel-
lucent.com and select your product from the pulldown menu under "Technical Content
for".
Training
This document expects a user to be familiar with the basic functions of the system before
performing procedures that could damage the system, affect system operations, or impede
communication traffic within the system. Understanding the descriptive material provided
in this manual should allow you to perform the procedures necessary to operate and
maintain Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent’ Training web-site (https://training.lucent.com) for descriptions of
training courses available.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field
Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the
market within the European Union (EU), shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life in compliance with applicable EU and local legislation. They shall not be
disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained
in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may
be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the EU, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the
product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to
provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent
equipment.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support
(takeback@alcatel-lucent.com).
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 xxxvii
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
1 Safety
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides important safety instructions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-2

General notes on safety 1-4
Laser safety 1-6
Electrostatic discharge 1-11
Save these safety instructions 1-13
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 1-1
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure of safety statements

Overview
Safety statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks on
Alcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazards may
have serious consequences.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
Lifting hazard E F
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment. G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Safety Structure of safety statements
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Safety General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General notes on safety

Overview
All responsible technical personnel must read this chapter before servicing the system.
Always keep the most recent issue of this document close to the equipment.
In addition to the general safety instructions in this chapter, users must also observe the
specific safety instructions in the individual chapters.
The equipment complies with the current national and international safety requirements.
It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of
development experience and continuous stringent quality checks.
Potential sources of danger

The equipment is safe in normal operation. However, some potential sources of danger
cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these may arise during the following
operations:
• Opening of housings or equipment covers
• Manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnected from
the power supply
• Disconnection of optical or electrical connections
• Through possible contact with live pairs, laser light, hot surfaces, sharp edges, or
components sensitive to electrostatic discharge
Special safety instructions

Laser safety and handling components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) are
vitally important to the equipment. For special safety instructions concerning laser safety
and electrostatic discharge, refer to the section, “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-11).
General safety requirements

In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it is imperative
to observe the following rules.
• Transport, storage, and operation of the unit/system must be under the permissible
conditions only.
See accompanying documentation and information on the unit/system.
• Installation, configuration, and disassembly must be performed only by expert
PRELIMINARY
personnel referring to the respective documentation.

Due to the complexity of the unit/system, the personnel performing installation,
configuration, and disassembly require special training.
• Expert and authorized users are required to operate the unit/system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Safety General notes on safety
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operate the unit/system only after having read and understood the chapter on safety
and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems,
additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training for operating and service
personnel must be carried out and documented.
• Do not operate the unit/system unless it is in perfect working order.
Immediately report any faults or errors that might affect safety.
• Operate the unit/system with the proper connections and under the environmental
conditions as described in the documentation.
• Only qualified Alcatel-Lucent personnel or expert personnel authorized by
Alcatel-Lucent are permitted to perform conversions or changes to the system or parts
of the system (including the software).
All changes performed by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability.
Do not use components or spare parts that are not recommended by the manufacturer
and those not listed in the procurement documents.
• Only specially qualified personnel are permitted to remove or disable safety facilities,
clear faults and errors, and maintain the equipment.
Strictly observe the respective parts of the documentation, and consult the
documentation during the selection of measuring and test equipment.
• Document and archive all work related to calibrations, special tests after repairs, and
regular safety checks.
• Use non-system software at your own risk. The use/installation of non-system
software can adversely affect the normal functioning of the unit/system.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser safety
Compliance
1830 PSS complies with the following laser safety regulations and standards:
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-2: 2004 rules classify 1830
PSS as a Class 1M laser product
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-2: 2004 rules classify 1830
PSS as a Class 1 laser product
• Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 rules classify 1830 PSS as a Class IIIb
laser product
• Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 rules classify 1830 PSS as a Class I laser
product
General laser information

Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar operating
systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at wavelengths
between approximately 800 nanometers (nm) and 1600 nm. The emitted light is above the
red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the human eye. Although
radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some people can
see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude below
any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye.
Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light.
Monochromatic light is a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or
invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-sized beam of light, and
because the beam size is small, the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.
Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable state
regulations as well as international standards for their safe operation.
A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well
collimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance.
However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence, typically 10 to
20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the distance reduces
the irradiance by a factor of four) and rapidly decreases over distance.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Safety Laser safety
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lasers and eye damage
The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400 to 1400-nm range
may cause eye damage if absorbed by the retina. When a beam of light enters the eye, the
eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The
irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105 (or 100,000 times
more than at the cornea) and, if sufficiently intense, may cause a retinal burn.
The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in an optical fiber telecommunications is
thermal in origin; for example, damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount
of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the
retina occurs only when one looks at the light sufficiently long that the product of the
retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies
above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns, but these optical energies do not affect the
retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly
higher than that for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region.
Classification of lasers
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the United States are regulated by the Food
and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH)
under 21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser
product as belonging to one of four major classes: I, II, lla, IlIa, lllb, or IV.
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international standards body
that writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar and
divided into Classes 1, 1M, 2, 2M, 3B, 3R, and 4. Lasers are classified according to the
accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1, because,
under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are
terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming
a protective housing. Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically installed in front
of the laser circuit pack shelves. The circuit packs themselves, however, may be
FDA/CDRH Class I, IIIb, or IV or IEC Class 1, 1M, 3B, 3R, or 4. State-of-the-art Raman
and EDFA optical amplifiers have now extended into the Class IV/4 designations.
Laser safety precautions for optical fiber telecommunications systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totally
enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA/CDRH
PRELIMINARY
and IEC classifications.

The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber
telecommunication system can disconnect or break and may expose people to lightwave
emission. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose the technician
to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing. Unlike more
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission pattern of a
semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent beam, the
irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the distance, the
less energy will enter the eye and the less potential risk for eye injury. If you inadvertently
view an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater
than 5 to 6 inches, normally, it will not cause eye injury provided that the power in the
fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a few tens of milliwatts
at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur if you use an optical instrument
such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe to stare at the energized fiber end.
Laser Radiation
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Use controls, adjustments, and procedures specified in this document to avoid hazardous
laser radiation exposure.
Laser safety precautions for enclosed systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are
completely enclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for enclosed
systems:
• Because of the potential for eye damage, do not stare into optical connectors or
broken fibers.
• Do not under any circumstances perform laser/fiber optic operations before
satisfactorily completing laser safety training.
• Since viewing lightwave emission directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical
instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage,
observe/follow laser safety labels. Appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in
close proximity to the optical port on the protective housing/access panel of the
terminal equipment
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Safety Laser safety
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser safety precautions for unenclosed systems
During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is
considered unenclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for unenclosed
systems:
• Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and
restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical
connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser
circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposure distance. Optical port
shutters, automatic power reduction (APR), and automatic power shutdown (APSD)
are engineering controls that are also used to limit the emissions. However, do not
stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying
lenses when removing or replacing laser circuit packs. (Normal eye wear or indirect
viewing instruments, such as a Find-R-Scopes, are not considered magnifying lenses
or optical instruments.)
• Only authorized, trained personnel shall use the optical test equipment during
installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers. (Some
examples of optical test equipment are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers
[OTDRs] and Hand-Held Loss Test Sets.)
• Do not, under any circumstance, scan a fiber with an optical test set without verifying
that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off.
• Only authorized personnel are permitted in the immediate area of the optical fiber
telecommunication systems during installation and service.
For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber optic communication systems in the
workplace, consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of Optical
Fiber Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diodes and LED Sources in the United
States or outside the United States, IEC-60825, Part 2.
Laser warning labels

The following figure shows the different types of laser warning labels:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend
1. Laser symbol
2. Laser classification labels (This label may show only the laser class or both the laser
class and the maximum output power.)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Safety Electrostatic discharge
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrostatic discharge
Overview
ESD (for example, caused by touching with the hand) can destroy semiconductor
components. The correct operation of the complete system is then no longer assured.
Compliance
The Alcatel-Lucent Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 complies with ANSI T1.308-1996, the
Central Office Equipment - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Requirements, 1996.
ESD warning
NOTICE
ESD hazard
ESD can destroy electronic components.
Always keep circuit packs in antistatic covers. Use the original packaging if possible. Use
a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on the system to
prevent ESD damage to sensitive components.
All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to ESD. The ESD can also affect
the components indirectly.
ESD considerations
This section describes the precautions required to prevent ESD damage.
Circuit pack handling precautions
Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static
electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The static charges are produced
by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects. Dry air allows
greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials are measured in areas with low
relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause damage can occur anywhere.
Observe the following precautions when handling circuit packs/units to prevent ESD
damage.
• Assume all circuit packs contain solid-state electronic components that can be
damaged by ESD.
• When handling circuit packs (for example storing, installing, and removing) or when
PRELIMINARY
working on the backplane, always wear a grounded wrist strap or wear a heel strap
and stand on a grounded, static-dissipating floor mat.
• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid ESD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Safety Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost
edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins.
• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packing. Circuit packs
and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably protected
against static charge buildup.
• Observe all warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not remove
circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.
• If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position, using properly
grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats.
• Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging. Shielding is not
required unless specified.
• Keep all static-generating materials such as food wrappers, plastics, and Styrofoam®
containers away from all circuit packs. When removing circuit packs from a shelf,
immediately place the circuit packs in static-safe packages.
• Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.
Important! Ensure that any connectors on the shelf interconnection panel that are not
cabled are fitted with a plastic dust cap to provide ESD protection.
Static control wrist straps
To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf is
equipped with an ESD grounding jack to enable personnel to ground themselves using
wrist straps, while handling circuit packs or working on the shelf. Check the wrist straps
periodically with a wrist strap tester to ensure that they are working properly.
Important! The grounding jack is located on the front of the shelf, on the lower-right
corner. Another grounding jack is also located on the rear panel.
Barred-hand symbol
Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to ESD are identified by
warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol. The following figure shows the
barred-hand symbol.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Safety Save these safety instructions
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Save these safety instructions

READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS.
When installing this product, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Follow all instructions provided with this unit.
2. Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and performed by trained
personnel only.
3. This equipment is intended to be provided with appropriate 15 A (Max) branch circuit
protection on both the A and B -48/-60 V dc input feeds.
4. Opening or removing covers or sheet metal parts may present exposure to high
current or electrical energy levels or to other risks.
5. Use only Alcatel-Lucent manufactured circuit packs designed for use with this
equipment.
6. For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-1 Installation Instructions.
7. This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part
of the building installation. (Such as a main power disconnect switch or external
circuit breaker).
8. Use only Alcatel-Lucent Power Cable Assembly provided with this equipment when
connecting to -48/-60 A/B V dc power sources.
9. Connect this product only to the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
10. This equipment is to be powered only by Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or
Telecommunication Network Voltage 2 (TNV2) type sources.
11. Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.
Refer to the Installation Instructions.
12. Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunication lines.
13. Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm.
14. Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.
15. Never touch uninsulated telecommunication wires or terminals unless the
telecommunication line has been disconnected at the interface.
16. Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect it from
overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
17. Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings in this product as they may
PRELIMINARY
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or
electrical shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
18. DANGER: Invisible laser radiation when open and fiber optic cable disconnected.
Avoid Direct Exposure to Beam.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Safety Save these safety instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19. CAUTION: This unit has up to two (2) -48/-60 V input power feeders. Disconnecting
less than the maximum will not de-energize the system.
To reduce the risk of injury, disconnect two (2) power feeders when removing power
to the system.
20. NOTICE: Unterminated optical connections may emit laser radiation. Do Not View
With Optical Instruments.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Certification
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 meets the following certifications:
• UL Certification UL 1950 / UL 60950
• Canadian Safety Assoc. CSA-22.2-No.25-M90
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and its supported
features for Release 1.0.
Contents
Introduction 2-3
Hardware design and layout 2-5
Features 2-11
1830 PSS-4 OTs 2-18
1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers 2-38
DCM shelves 2-41
Automatic power reduction (APR) 2-42
Ethernet EPL and EVPL services 2-52
Network Topologies 2-55
Configurations 2-64
Protection 2-82
Alien Wavelength Access 2-87
Loopbacks 2-88
Performance Monitoring 2-90
Status Retrieval 2-95
PRELIMINARY
System access 2-96

Synchronization 2-97
Reliability program 2-99
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ordering 2-117
Technical specifications 2-133
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Introduction
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product portfolio
Metropolitan networks are the telecommunications networks connecting residential and
business premises to larger, long-distance core networks. These complex networks serve
to back haul traffic or route traffic locally between different sites. Metro networks
separate into Metro Core networks which are typically rings or meshed networks
providing the service aggregation and interconnection points to the long-haul networks
and Metro Access networks which collect services closer to residential and business
customers.
The 1830 PSS-4 Edge Device platform is designed for installation near the edge of these
metropolitan networks. It is designed to provide a flexible, power saving, and low cost
OTN-based solution for metro/access applications. It can also be configured to provide a
terminal, FOADM, and in-line amplifier solution for 1830 PSS-32 networks. It supports
both non-switched and electrical switched configuration, and ensures full interworking
and compatibility with other 1830 PSS, 1850 TSS, and 1870 TTS units.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It is compatible with the other members of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product
portfolio:
• The 1830 PSS slot-based platforms
– The 1830 PSS-32 — a modular multi-service multi-reach platform that has 32
slots available to hold cards supporting ILAs and various F/T/Roadm
configurations. This product is described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and
Planning Guide, and supported by the documentation set listed the About section
of this document.
– The 1830 PSS-16 — a modular multi-service multi-reach platform that has 16
slots available to hold cards supporting ILAs and various F/Toadm configurations.
This product is described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and Planning Guide,
and supported by the documentation set listed the About section of this document.
– The 1830 PSS-4 — a modular platform that has 4 slots available to hold cards
supporting ILAs and various FOADM and terminal configurations. This product
is described in this document
• The 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device platforms:
– The 1830 PSS-1 GBEH — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device providing
up to 10 GbE services, or 32 sub-rate EVCs over an 11G optical channel. This
product is described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device User
Guide.
– The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device supporting
two specially adapted PSS1MD4 OTs, similar to 4DPA4 OTs that can be installed
in the PSS-32, with 4 multiservice client ports, and 2 2.7Gb line ports on each OT.
This product is documented in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS-1) Release 1.7.0 MD4H Edge Device User Guide.
– The 1830 PSS-1 MSAH — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device supporting
two specially adapted OTs, a PSS1MD4 and a PSS1P21. The PSS1MD4 is similar
to the 4DPA4 OT that can be installed in the PSS-32, with 4 multiservice client
ports, and 2 2.7Gb line ports. The PSS1P21 provides 21 E1 client ports and 2
STM-1 optical line ports. This product is described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.0 MSAH Edge Device User Guide.
– PSS-1 AHP — a 1 RU Device supporting a specially adapted high power, high
gain amplifier, similar to the AHPHG that can be installed in the PSS-32. Two of
these devices are installed together and managed as a single NE to create a low
cost ILA node for optical spans connecting 1830 PSS devices. This product is
described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release
PRELIMINARY
1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Hardware design and layout
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware design and layout

Purpose
This section provides an overview of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 physical architecture.
Compliance Standards
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 complies with the follow regulatory standards for
Environmental, Safety, EMC, ESD, and Hazardous Substances
North America Region:
• Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 “Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical
Safety - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment”
• Telecordia GR-63-CORE, Issue 3 “NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection.
• CSA Certified (US and Canadian) UL 60950-1, Second Edition / CSA C22.2 No.
60950-1-07, Second Edition, “Information Technology Equipment – Safety – Part 1 :
Generic Requirements”
• 21 CFR 1040.10, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Performance Standards for
Light Emitting Products”
• 21 CFR 1040.11, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Specific Purpose Laser
Products”
• FCC Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47 – Telecommunications, Part 15 – “Radio
Frequency Devices”, Class A
• ICES-003, Issue 4 ”Industry Canada Spectrum Management and Telecommunications
Policy, “Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus”, Class A
European Market:
• Directive 2004/108/EC, “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)”
• Directive 2006/95/EC, “Low Voltage Electrical Equipment”
• Directive 93/465/EEC, “CE Marking Directive”
• IEC 60950-1:2005 (2nd Edition) / EN 60950-1:2006 “Information Technology
Equipment – Safety – Part 1 : Generic Requirements”
• EN 60825-1: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements, and Users Guide”
• EN 60825-2: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber
Communication Systems”
• EN 300 386 “Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
PRELIMINARY
Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

requirements”
• EN 55022: "Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics -
Limits and methods of measurement". Class A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ETSI ES 201 468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Additional Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific
applications
• EN 300 019 2-1 Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment; Part 2-1: Specification Of
Environmental Tests; Storage
• EN 300 019 2-2: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-2: Specification Of
Environmental Tests; Transportation
• EN 300 019 2-3: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-3: Specification Of
Environmental Tests - Stationary Use At Weather Protected Locations
• ETS 300 753: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Acoustic Noise Emitted By
Telecommunications Equipment
Mechanical design
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is 2 RU high and can be mounted in 19-inch (EIA), 19-
and 21-inch (ETSI), and 23-inch (WECO) racks. It supports redundant -48VDC power
filters. It also supports optional, CWDM or DWDM pluggable filters, a pluggable
controller with management I/O connections, a pluggable fan unit, and 2 full-height or 4
half-height OT slots.
Layout and Front View of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is designed for Metro Access applications, and designed
to utilize a sub-set of the optical transponder cards used in 1830 PSS-32 in a 2RU shelf.
The shelf is shown without transponders of filters in Figure 2-1, “PSS-4 shelf” (p. 2-7).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 PSS-4 shelf
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports the following modules:

• 2 pluggable Power Filters (PF)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports redundant Power Filters. If a single power
filter becomes inoperable, the full capacity of the shelf can be completely supported
by the other Power Filter until a replacement is installed. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 automatically recognizes equipage of these modules.
• 1 pluggable Equipment Controller
The Equipment Controller provides all node and shelf control and management
PRELIMINARY
functions. The functions performed by the EC depend in which shelf it resides.

• 1 pluggable Fan Unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Fan unit with 6 variable speed fans and a controller, which communicates with
the EC to control the FAN speed. A single fan failure has no effect on the transmission
capability of the PSS-4. The fan module supports a multicolored LED for status
indication.
• Up to 2 pluggable full-height or 4 pluggable half-height OT/OAs
The OTs are a sub-set of 1830 PSS OTs and are described in this guide.
– 11DPE12 (non-hardened)
– 11QPA4 (non-hardened)
– 11QPA4A (hardened)
– A2325A
– AHPHG
– 4DPA4
• 1 full-slot or 2 half-slot pluggable slots for CWDM/DWDM filters
– E4-SFC1x (8 variants)
– E4-SFC8
– E4-SFD4x (8 variants)
– E4-SFD8x (4 variants)
• A rotary switch (not pluggable) to set the shelf ID number.
All Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 are set to the default value (0001). Up to 8 multiple
units can be identified with this switch and networked to form a single NE from a
management point of view. Only one shelf in each NE can have the role of Main
Shelf. the Shelf ID number of main shelf is 0x01.
Component slot locations
The physical locations slot location for each of the components is numbered and used in
CLI commands and alarms to indicate problems with a component. The slot numbering
and the type of module that they can contain are illustrated in Figure 2-2, “PSS-4 slot
layout and numbering” (p. 2-9)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 PSS-4 slot layout and numbering
Component Function Required Maximum Slots

E4PFDCAK Power Filter 1 2 2,3
E4FAN Fan Subsystem 1 1 6
E4EC Equipment Controller 1 1 1
11DPE12 11G Dual Port Pluggable 12xGbE 0 2 7, 8
Mux Transponder (12 clients)
11QPA4 11G Quad Port Pluggable 0 2 7, 8
AnyRate Transponder (4 clients)
4DPA4 4G Dual Port Pluggable AnyRate 0 4 7-10
(4 clients)
A2325A 23dBm Optical Amplifier 0 2 7,8
AHPHG High Power High Gain Optical 0 2 7,8
Amplifier
E4-SF1x 1 channel hardened static CWDM 0 2 4, 5
filter
PRELIMINARY
E4-SFC2x 2 channel hardened static CWDM 0 2 4, 5

filter
E4-SFC4x 4 channel hardened static CWDM 0 2 4, 5
filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Component Function Required Maximum Slots

E4-SFC8 8 channel hardened static CWDM 0 1 4
filter
E4-SFD4x 4 channel hardened static DWDM 0 2 4, 5
filter
E4-SFD8x 8 channel hardened static DWDM 0 1 4
filter
Carrier class operating environment

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is designed to operate in extended temperature range
environments. This supports its installation in outdoor cabinets and similar deployments.
A pluggable fan module provides cooling for the 1830 PSS-4.
In order for the fan module to provide adequate shelf cooling, the following conditions
must be met:
• The ambient temperature of the facility should be between -40°C and +65°C.
• Humidity:
CO Environment
– 85% long term
– 95% short term
ETSI
– 95% long term
Hardened Environment
– 100% long term
• The facility must provide adequate ventilation for the shelf and remain free of
obstructions that may affect fan efficiency. Cooling air for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 is drawn in on the right side and exhausted on the left, therefore the sides of the
unit should be free of obstructions.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Features
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Features
Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 can be deployed as a standalone system or in conjunction
with other 1830 PSS-4 units or the 1830 PSS-32.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
3.0.0 Product Information and Planning Guide for complete information about the 1830
PSS-32.

Alcatel-Lucent Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides an optimized multiservice platform
that includes the following features.
• 2 Rack Unit, mounts in ETSI, ANSI, and 19” (both NAR and EIA) Frames.
• Temperature hardened
• 2 full-height service slots or 4 half-height slots with mixing
• Switching and protection between adjacent slots
• -48V DC power filter with WT (HARDENED)
• Field replaceable circuit packs
• Supports reuse of OTs with pluggable line ports and LDs from PSS-32
– 11DPE12
– 11QPA4
– 4DPA4
– A2325A
– AHPHG
• Support optional Wavelength Tracker and unkeyed optical channel
• Static filters DWDM 4/8 channels
• Static filters CWDM 1/2/4/8 channels
• Alien wavelength management
• Support stacked configuration
• ESNCP protection
• Certification for ETSI/CE, NEBS Level 3, CSA, UL, IEEE1613, EMC
• Configuration via: WebGUI, CLI, SNMP
PRELIMINARY
• EPT support
• Management via: 1354RM-PhM/1340INC/1350OMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applications
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides flexible solution on single 2RU platform, that
can be configured to support nodes for the following applications.
• CWDM FOADM (degree 4) - up to 20 CWDM lines
• DWDM FOADM (degree 4) - up to 8 DWDM lines
• ILA (88 channel support)
• Terminal Node
Figure 2-3 Typical 1830 PSS-4 FOADM application

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-4 Typical 1830 PSS-4 ILA example
Figure 2-5 Typical terminal node application
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is suitable for installation in the following facilities:
• Network telecommunication facilities
• Locations where National Electric Code (NEC) is applicable
• Outdoor cabinets and other locations where extended temperatures are a factor.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 as standalone system

As a standalone system, one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelves can be
configured to function as the Gateway NE (GNE) for management access of the network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 with 1830 PSS-32/16

When used in conjunction with 1830 PSS-32/16, management access to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is realized by extending the GCC on the optical transponder
(OT) residing on the 1830 PSS-32/16.
Optical interfaces
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports B&W SFPs/XFPs for single-channel
applications and DWDM/CWDM SFPs/XFPs for multiple channel applications.
PSS-4 filter channel plan

Table below lists the center wavelength frequencies for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
with 8-channel CWDM.
Table 2-1 CWDM filters and frequencies
Filter designation Wavelength

E4_SFC8 E4_SFC4A E4_SFC2A E4_SFC1A 1471
E4_SFC1B 1491
E4_SFC2B E4_SFC1C 1511
E4_SFC1D 1531
E4_SFC4B E4_SFC2C E4_SFC1E 1551
E4_SFC1F 1571
E4_SFC2D E4_SFC1G 1591
E4_SFC1H 1611
PRELIMINARY
Table 2-2 DWDM filters and frequencies
PSS-4 filters Freq. (THz) Wavelength

— — 191.70 1563.863
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 DWDM filters and frequencies (continued)

— — 191.80 1563.047
— — 191.90 1562.233
E4_SFD8A E4_SFD4A 192.00 1561.419
192.10 1560.606
192.20 1559.794
192.30 1558.983
↕ — 192.40 1558.173
E4_SFD8A E4_SFD4B 192.50 1557.363
192.60 1556.555
192.70 1555.747
192.80 1554.940
— — 192.90 1554.134
E4_SFD8B E4_SFD4C 193.00 1553.329
193.10 1552.524
193.20 1551.721
193.30 1550.918
↕ — 193.40 1550.116
E4_SFD8B E4_SFD4D 193.50 1549.315
193.60 1548.515
193.70 1547.715
193.80 1546.917
— — 193.90 1546.119
— — 194.00 1545.322
— — 194.10 1544.526
E4_SFD8C E4_SFD4E 194.20 1543.730
194.30 1542.936
194.40 1542.142
PRELIMINARY
194.50 1541.349
↕ — 194.60 1540.557
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 DWDM filters and frequencies (continued)

E4_SFD8C E4_SFD4F 194.70 1539.766
194.80 1538.976
194.90 1538.186
195.00 1537.397
— — 195.10 1536.609
E4_SFD8D E4_SFD4G 195.20 1535.822
195.30 1535.036
195.40 1534.250
195.50 1533.465
↕ — 195.60 1532.681
E4_SFD8D E4_SFD4H 195.70 1531.898
195.80 1531.116
195.90 1530.334
196.00 1529.553
Extended Temperature Range (ETR) capability

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 includes the following features to support operation in an
ETR environment, where temperatures can range from -40° C to +65° C:
• A hardened chassis
• Hardened cards (except 11DPE12 and 11QPA4 - 11QPA4A is hardened)
• A variable-speed fan unit
• Hardened SFP/XFP pluggables
Note: All hardware installed in an ETR environment must be ETR capable. Operation
of non-ETR capable cards or SFPs in an ETR environment, and in a PSS-4 with ETR
mode enabled, can result in hardware damage. Non-hardened cards and pluggables
will be automatically alarmed by software if detected in a chassis which is
provisioned for ETR operation.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-hardened PSS-4 units
A PSS-4 unit that contains one or more non-hardened card must be provisioned for ETR
mode disabled. In order for the fan unit in a non-hardened PSS-4 units to provide
adequate shelf cooling, the following conditions must be met:
• To ensure long term reliability of a non-hardened hardware, the ambient temperature
of the facility should be between -5°C and 40°C.
• The facility must provide adequate ventilation for the shelf and remain free of
obstructions that may affect fan efficiency.
Note: Operation of non-ETR capable cards or SFPs in an ETR environment can result
in hardware damage.
Identifying extended temperature range cards
All modules and cards designated for use in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 are capable of
ETR operation, except the 11DPE12 and 11QPA4 OTs (11QPA4A is ETR-capable).
Non-hardened cards and pluggables will be automatically alarmed by software if detected
in a chassis which is provisioned for ETR operation.
The temperature range of cards can be determined from the remote inventory data of
removable cards and the EC by performing a "show card inventory" command. If "ETR"
characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field, the card is ETR qualified.
Otherwise it is not ETR qualified. Software will display an ETR indicator in inventory
data, regardless of whether the node is provisioned for ETR operation.
Note: The 4DPA4 does not have ETR bytes programmed, but is a hardened card. So,
software is coded so that it will not raise an ETR alarm for this card.
Identifying extended temperature range plug-ins
SFPs and XFPs that support ETR operation are identified during ordering. After
installation, retrieve remote inventory data for the OT ports by performing a "show
interface inventory" command. If "ETR" characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer
inventory field, the SFP is ETR qualified. Otherwise it is not ETR qualified.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1830 PSS-4 OTs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-4 OTs

Purpose
The following information identifies the OTs supported for use in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4:
• 11QPA4 - 11G quad port tunable AnyRate 4-client OT
• 11DPE12 - Dual pluggable 12xGbE OT
• 4DPA4 - 4G dual-port pluggable AnyRate 4-client OT
11G quad port tunable AnyRate 4-client transponder (11QPA4)

The 11QPA4 supports various protocols at ~10Gb/s rate on client ports. It contains four
independent transponders. Each transponder has one pluggable client port and one
pluggable line port, with a fixed association between them. There is no multiplexing
function. The board supports E-SNCP (intra-board). Slow eVOA for output power
equalization, and fast eVOA for WT encoding are supported. Terminal loopback and
facility loopback are supported independently for each port (except VOA). B&W or
CWDM XFP interfaces are used in client and line ports.
Figure 2-6 11QPA4 module
The following client signals are supported.

• OTU2 [ITU-T G.709]
• STM-64, OC-192 [ITU-T SDH, Telcordia/ANSI SONET]
• 10Gb Ethernet WAN PHY [IEEE}
• 10Gb Ethernet LAN PHY [IEEE]
Several mappings are supported.
– G.7041 compliant GFP-F mapping
– Overclocking at (11.049 or 11.096 Gb/s)
• 10G Fibre Channel
See Table 2-3, “11QPA4 XFPs” (p. 2-20) for details of the supported XFPs and interfaces
PRELIMINARY
of 11QPA4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1830 PSS-4 OTs
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-7, “11QPA4 architecture” (p. 2-19) for a high-level transmission block
diagram.
Figure 2-7 11QPA4 architecture
B
DC/DC Input K
ADC power
supplies P
circuit
SFP VOA
Temp SEEPROM
Sensor SFP VOA
SFP VOA
SFP VOA
Client XFP Line XFP
Client XFP
8x8 Line XFP
Client XFP Matrix Line XFP
Client XFP Line XFP
11QPA4 operational modes

The 11QPA4 supports the following operational modes:
• ADD_DROP mode.
In this mode, the circuit pack is processing signal in both transmission directions
(ingress from client port towards the line side, and egress from line side to client
port). The board supports C1 to L1 ADD_DROP. The board supports C2 to L2
ADD_DROP. The board supports C3 to L3 ADD_DROP. The board supports C4 to
L4 ADD_DROP.
• CrossRegen mode
PRELIMINARY
In this mode, the Line port input signal is looped towards another line port output
through 8x8 matrix. The client XFP is not necessarily provisioned or equipped, and no
alarm or performance monitoring is associated with those client port. The circuit pack
supports CrossRegen between any two line ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11QPA4 XFPs
The following table shows the XFPs that are supported for use in the 11QPA4.
Table 2-3 11QPA4 XFPs
Interface Acronym APN Description Wavelength

Client: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
STM-64-OC192 1310nm STM-64/OC-
(SR-1/VSR2000- 192/OTU-2/10GbE
2R1) (I64.1/SR-
1/10GBASE-LX)
1G LAN PHY
(10GBASE-LR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-LW)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(P1I1-2D1)
Client: IR2 MR XFP 1AB375380003 B&W 1550
OTM-0.2 STM-64-OC-
(P1S1-2D2b) 192/OTU-2/10GbE
(S64.2b/IR-
STM-64/OC-192
2/10GBASE-EX)
(IR-2/S-64.2b)
10G LAN PHY
(10GBASE-ER)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-EW)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(P1S1-2D2b)
10G LAN PHY GBE XFP 850nm 1AB375380001 B&W 10GbE 850
(10GBASE-SR) (10GBASE-SR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-SW)
10GFC
(1200-MX-SN-I)
PRELIMINARY
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(10GBASE-SR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-3 11QPA4 XFPs (continued)

Client: 10GbE ZR XFP 1AB375380004 ALU XFP 1550
STM-64/OC-192 P1L1-
(P1L1-2D2) 2D2/10GBASE-Z
10G LAN PHY

(10GBASE-ZR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-ZW)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(P12L1-2D2)
Client: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240001 CWDM anyrate 1471 - 1611
STM-64/OC-192 40km (1471nm -thru- (40km)
-thru- 1611nm)
10GFC 1AB379240008
10G LAN PHY
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
Client: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB378370001 CWDM anyrate 1471 - 1611
STM-64/OC-192 70km (1471nm -thru- (70km)
-thru- 1611nm)
10GFC 1AB378370008
10G LAN PHY
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
Line: DWDM XFP 80km 1AB375650001 DWDM (1600 191.7 - 196.0 THz
OTM-0.2 CH60 (196.0) - -thru- ps/nm (80km))
DWDM XFP 80km
1AB375650044
CH17 (191.7)
Line: X11MDTNC 1AB375650046 10GHz-Tunable 192.10-196.05 THz
OTM-0.2 10G-XFP
VOA eVOA_P 1AB156220001 Slow eVOA SFP NA

fVOA eVOA_P 1AB396080001 Fast eVOA SFP NA
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dual pluggable 12xGbE OT (11DPE12)
The 11DPE12 is a single slot wide, full height 12xGbE MUX OT card, providing an
Ethernet multiplexing platform that aggregates up to twelve full-rate GbE client services
onto two 10G paths, supported by pluggable B&W/CWDM/DWDM line-side optics. By
providing unrestricted throughput and MAC PDU transparency for up to ten GBE clients,
this pack offers Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service transport with Q-in-Q
tagging mechanism, as defined in MEF and ITU-T documents. Support is provide for up
to 4096 sub-GbE signal flow per Line Port. To identify pluggable modules supported on
client and line ports, see Table 2-4, “11DPE12 SFP/XFPs” (p. 2-25).
The 11DPE12 card supports the following features:
• Supports Full rate GbE, Sub-rate, and Q-in-Q modes for Ethernet virtual private line
(EVPL) cross-connect provisioning
– SVLAN ID Mapping provision
– CE-VLAN ID Mapping provision
– CIR/EIR bandwidth profile provision for sub-rate GbE signal flow
– Switching based on proprietary Higig tag for 32 sub-GbE signal flow at Line port,
or Q-in-Q (MEF 6.1) for 4096 sub-GbE signal flow at line port.
• Full 88 channel C-band DWDM support
• Terminal loopback and facility loopback
• Support for ESNCP (full rate GbE service and Q-in-Q); No Implementation of
Y-cable and OPS protection
• VA1 and VA2 port supports power adjustment with slow SFP VOAs
• eVOA management and WT encoding functions
• DWDM/CWDM/B&W fixed and tunable XFP Modules at Line port, and SFP
modules at Client port
• G.709 monitoring, alarming and consequent actions
• RSFEC, and EFEC2 is user-provisionable, Bit Rate (11.049G/11.097G) is user
provisionable
• G.709 interface monitoring at line side port and RMON statistics at both line and
client side port
• GCC0 processing for DCN extension to the 1830 PSS-1
• GBE and FE supported on client ports
• OTU2 (11.049Gbps and 11.096Gbps) and 10GBE supported on line ports
Each channel supports the Add/Drop operational mode.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-8 11DPE12 faceplate
Functional description
Refer to Figure 2-9, “11DPE12 block diagram” (p. 2-23) for an illustration.
Figure 2-9 11DPE12 block diagram
The SFP module performs the following functions.

• Provides Optical-Electrical signal conversion in the ingress direction and forwards
serial bit stream to the SERDES into the Layer 2 switch module
• Provides Electrical-Optical signal conversion and sends optical signal towards the
client
• Provides monitoring of analog parameters (OPR and OPT) and detecting loss of
optical power dLOS
• Provides HW/SW control for laser ON/OFF consequent action
The L2 Switch module performs the following functions.
•
PRELIMINARY
Aggregates client GbE MAC PDUs to dual 10-GbE line interfaces and to two other
10GbE interfaces to companion OT (Note that only error free MAC PDUs are
aggregated.)
• Provides 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet ports for both copper and fiber connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Provides ingress client PDU tagging and removal of tag at the egress without
bandwidth enlargement using headers
• Configures aggregation 64B/66B encoded stream by providing an effective data rate
of 10-Gbps with the ability to add provider tags without restricting client bandwidth
for up to 10-GbE ports [12-byte header is inserted before each Ethernet packet. This
header is used to segregate and forward PDUs within the L2 switch module. The
header uses 4 bytes of the IFG and the packet preamble (8 bytes), for a total of 12
bytes to avoid bandwidth reduction on aggregation link.]
• Provides RMON
The G.709 Framer module performs the following add/drop functions.
Add direction (from client to line port):
• Maps incoming 64B/66B encoded bit stream using asynchronous method into an
ODU2 information structure.
• Generates ODU2 and OTU2 OH
• Performs fault processing following relevant requirements compliant with G.798
• Generates FEC field of an OTU2 formatted signal based on either Reed Solomon or
EFEC algorithm (user provisioning determines which of the two will be used)
Drop direction (from line to client port):
• Terminates FEC field of an incoming OTU2 signal
• Corrects errors using Reed Solomon or EFEC error correction algorithm
• Provides PM statistics for FEC Correctable and Uncorrectable errors
• Terminates OTU2 and ODU2 OH fields
• Asynchronously de-maps HiGig signal from ODU2
• Performs fault processing following relevant requirements compliant with G.798
The FPGA module performs the following functions:
• Processes the ODU2 PCC/APS bytes in order to present them to software
• Provides GCC insert/extract from the TOH
The 10G LAN/WAN PHY module performs the following functions:
• Converts the XAUI interface from the L2 switch to 10-GbE LAN over SF14
The Tx/Rx module performs the following add/drop functions:
Add direction (from client to port):
• Takes the signals from the parallel data path
PRELIMINARY
• Transmits signals onto the line-side fiber
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop direction (from line to client port):
• Receives the signal
• Recovers the signal clock
• Takes the clock signals onto parallel data path to next module
11DPE12 SFP/XFPs
The following table shows the SFP and XFP plugins that are supported for use on the
11DPE12.
Table 2-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs

Client: 2G5 MR SFP 1AB376370005 B&W 1310
GbE (S-16.1/IR-1) STM-16/OC-48
multirate ≤2.7Gbps
(SS-16.1A)
(IR-1)
Client: 1000BASE-T 1AB359780002 Electrical GbE NA
GbE (1000B-T)
Client: 1G SFP 1AB376720001 B&W GbE 850
GbE (1000B-SX) 1000BASE-SX (1000BASE-
SX/550m)
Client: 100 BASE-FX 1AB382180006 Optical FE SFP 1310
FE (100BFXS) (with built-in PHY)

GbE (1000B-LX) 1000BASE-LX (1000BASE-
LX/10km)
GbE (1000B-ZX) 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-
ZX/80km
Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR 1471 - 1611
GbE SFP 40km (1471nm -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
- 1611nm) (40km) 20)
1AB377160008
Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377200001 CWDM multirate 1471 - 1611
GbE SFP 80km -thru- ≤2.7Gpbs (80km) (in increments of
1AB377200008 20)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs (continued)

Line: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
OTM-0.2 1310nm STM-64/OC-
192/OTU-2/10GbE
P1I1-2D1
(I64.1/SR-
(XI-64.1) 1/10GBASE-LX)
Line: IR2 MR XFP 1AB375380003 B&W 1550
OTM-0.2 STM-64-OC-
192/OTU-2/10GbE
P1S1-2D2b
(S64.2b/IR-
(XS-64.2b) 2/10GBASE-EX)
Line: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240001 CWDM (40km) 1471 - 1611
OTM-0.2 40km (1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1611nm)
10G-SR-1471 1AB379240008
-thru-
10G-SR-1611
Line: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB378370001 CWDM (70km) 1471 - 1611
OTM-0.2 70km (1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1611nm)
10G-LR-1471 1AB378370008
-thru-
10G-LR-1611
Line: DWDM XFP 80km 1AB375650001 DWDM (1600 191.7 - 196.0 THz
OTM-0.2 CH60 (196.0) - -thru- ps/nm (80km))
DWDM XFP 80km
10G-LR 1AB375650044
CH17 (191.7)
Line: 10GbE ZR XFP 1AB375380004 ALU XFP 1550
OTM-0.2 P1L1-
2D2/10GBASE-Z
P12L1-2D2
Line: X11MDTNC 1AB375650046 XFP DWDM 191.7 - 196.05 THz
OTM-0.2 Tunable CT
(50GHz 10G XFP)
VOA eVOA_P 1AB156220001 Slow eVOA SFP NA
PRELIMINARY
VOA eVOA_P 1AB396080001 Fast eVOA SFP NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4G dual-port pluggable AnyRate 4-client OT (4DPA4)
The 4DPA4, sometimes referred to as the MSC (Multi-Service Card), is a half-height,
single-wide card that accepts up to four client signals via SFP optics, and performs
non-blocking multiplexing into one or both line ports.
There are four pluggable client interfaces: two at the top, and two at the bottom. The
middle of the faceplate has sockets for the dual line interfaces: two eVOA SFPs and two
line port SFPs. Line transmit fibers are externally connected through the eVOA ports for
Wavetracker functionality. There is a pack status LED in the upper right corner of the
faceplate. Each port has a dedicated port status LED, and each port also has a second
LED. The second LED is used on client ports is used to indicate dynamic Ethernet
activity, and is not used on line ports and eVOA ports.
Figure 2-10 4DPA4 faceplate
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional description
The 4DPA4 is a half-height, single-wide card that accepts up to four client signals via
SFP optics, and performs non-blocking multiplexing into one or both line ports. It has
dual pluggable OTU1 line ports that support B&W, CWDM, or DWDM line signals, and
supports a variety of sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder
mappings. To identify specific pluggable modules and their application, see Table 2-7,
“4DPA4 SFPs (FlexMux)” (p. 2-34), and Table 2-6, “4DPA4 SFPs (DualTran)” (p. 2-33).
Figure 2-11 4DPA4 block diagram
Line ports
The 4DPA4 ODU1 line ports must be manually provisioned, They are not automatically
provisioned when the card is installed as is the case for other OTs on the PSS-32. Each
PRELIMINARY
ODU1 is divided into 16 proprietary time slots. Signals from the client ports can be
assigned to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements by the internal switch in
the 4DPA4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Pluggable line port OTs only support 44 even channels. The SFPs supported on
4DPA4 line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from the pluggable OTs
may only traverse 100 GHz systems, unless muxed with a tunable OT (11STMM10).
The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on the 4DPA4 can be provisioned as
ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN, as described in “Line port utilization” (p. 2-29).
Line port utilization
The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on the 4DPA4 can be provisioned as
ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN (see Figure 2-12, “Add/Drop operational mode”
(p. 2-29) and Figure 2-13, “CROSSREGEN operational mode” (p. 2-30)).
Figure 2-12 Add/Drop operational mode
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-13 CROSSREGEN operational mode
Client ports
The following client signals are supported:
• OC3/STM1
• OC12/STM4
• OC48/STM16
• 1GbE
• FE
• SyncE
• FC100 (1.0625G)
• FC200 (2.125G)
• FC400
• FICON(4.25G)
• HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI HDTV)
• SDSDI (270Mb/s, SMPTE 292M)
• DVBASI (270Mb/s, SMPTE 292M)
The client ports are not configured automatically and must be manually configured. They
remain in the unassigned state until the user assigns a specific client signal type. Each line
port ODU1 is divided into 16 logical time slots. Signals from the client ports can be
PRELIMINARY
assigned by the operator, to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements. The
types of client signals supported in this release, their operating bit rate, and the number of
time slots required for each signal are shown in Table 2-5, “Client signal time slot
requirements” (p. 2-31).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client port mapping
Each line port ODU1 is divided into 16 logical time slots. Signals from the client ports
can be assigned by the operator, to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements.
The types of client signals supported in this release, their operating bit rate, and the
number of time slots required for each signal are shown in Table 2-5, “Client signal time
slot requirements” (p. 2-31).
Note: All signal types support optical interfaces only, unless stated otherwise.
Table 2-5 Client signal time slot requirements
Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time

slots
OC-3/STM-1 155.52Mb/s 1
OC-12/STM-4 622.08 Mb/s 4
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gb/s Full ODU1/OTU-1
(no assignment needed)
1GbE 1.25 Gb/s 8
FE (100M Fast Ethernet) 125Mb/s 1
(4B/5B, electrical interface
only)
FC100 (1.0625G) 1.0625 Gb/s 7
(8B/10B, includes FICON.)
FC200 (2.125G) 2.125 Gb/s 14
(8B/10B, includes
FICON_Express and ISC-3
Peer Mode)
FC400 4.25 Gb's Mapped directly to
overclocked ODU1/OTU1
without timeslots.
Applies to cardmode=
DualTran only
(8B/10B, includes FICON.)
HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI 1.485 Gb/s 10
HDTV) (Electrical and optical
PRELIMINARY
interfaces)
SDSDI 270Mb/s 2
(SMPTE259M, Electrical and
optical interfaces)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-5 Client signal time slot requirements (continued)
Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time

slots
DVBASI 270Mb/s 2
(8B/10B, Electrical and
optical interfaces)
Any of the four client ports can be mapped either of the two lines, bandwidth
permitting. As a result, flexible client-to-line configurations such as the following are
possible.
• 1:1 + 1:1 — dual transponders
• 1:1 + 2:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line
• 1:1 + 3:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line
• 2:1 + 2:1 — dual mux
• 4:1 — all clients muxed onto one line
Examples of some of these configurations are shown in Figure 6. All connections are
bi-directional
Figure 2-14 4DPA4 client signal mapping examples

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eVOA ports
The eVOA ports are used for Wavetracker encoding in some configurations. In other
configurations, the eVOA ports are not used. For example, the eVOA ports are not used
when the line is connected to an 11STMM10 or SFC client port. The eVOA ports are
provisioned and managed separately from the line ports. When used, the eVOA ports
must be manually created in the system. There is no automatic creation of these ports.
4DPA4 SFPs
The following tables show the SFPs that are supported for use on the 4DPA4, both for
DualTran and FlexMux operation.
Table 2-6 4DPA4 SFPs (DualTran)

Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640003 B&W 4G FC - 850
FC-400 (4FCSN-1) FC / 4G FC SN-1 Hardened (SN-1)
Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640002 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1310

FC-400 (4FCLC-L) FC / 4G FC LC-L 1300NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G Fibre
Channel DDM
1310nm)
Line: 2G5 CWDM 1AB155070001 OE-TRX-SFP 1471 - 1611 (in
OTM-0.1 (4FC-OC 1471nm through -thru- STM16/OC48 increments of 20)
1471-1611) 1611nm CWDM
1AB155070008
TTL--5/+75 C
1.471µm
DFB PIN-SI
-thru-
OE-TRX-SFP
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.611µm
DFB PIN-SI
Line: S4FCW62LC- 1AB383360003 ALU SFP 4FC 191.7-196.05 THz
OTM-0.1 (4FC-OD S4FCW17LC -thru- DWDM CH in increments of .05
620-170
PRELIMINARY
{9170-9600 even 1AB383360046

channels})
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-7 4DPA4 SFPs (FlexMux)

Client: 155M SFP 1AB376350001 B&W STM-1/OC-3 1310
STM1/OC-3 S-1.1/IR-1 (S-1.1/IR-1)
(S-1.1)
STM1/OC-3 L-1.1/LR-1 (L-1.1/LR-1)
(SL-1.1)
STM1/OC-3 L-1.2/LR-2 (L-1.2/LR-2)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360001 B&W 1310

STM-4/OC-12 S-4.1/IR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(S-4.1/IR-1/15km)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360002 B&W 1310
STM-4/OC-12 L-4.1/LR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(L-4.1/LR-1/ 40km)
(SL-4.1)
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080005 B&W 1000BX / 1300
GbE STM-4 STM-4 (20km
(GE-BX20U)/STM-4 upstream)
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080006 B&W 1000BX / 1500

(GE-BX20D)/STM-4 downstream)
Client: SFP FE (100Base 1AB393080007 B&W 100BX/FE 1310/1490

STM1 / FE-FC BX40) (40km upstream)
(40km)
Client: SFP FE (100Base 1AB393080008 B&W 100BX/FE 1310/1550
STM1 / FE-FC BX40) (40km downstream)
(40km)
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080009 B&W 1000BX / 1310/1490
(1000BX)/STM-4 upstream)
PRELIMINARY
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080010 B&W 1000BX / 1310/1550

(1000BX)/STM-4 downstream)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-7 4DPA4 SFPs (FlexMux) (continued)

Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370001 B&W 1310
STM16/OC-48 I-16.1/SR-1 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(I-16.1/SR-1)
2G5
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370004 B&W 1550
STM16/OC-48 L-16.2/LR-2 STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
OTM-0.1
(L-16.2/LR-2)
Client: 2G5 MR SFP 1AB376370005 B&W 1310
STM-1/OC-3 S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
(S1.1/IR-1) multirate ≤2.7Gbps
(S-16.1/IR-1)
STM-4/OC-12
(S-4.1/IR-1)
STM-16/OC-48
(S-16.1/IR-1)
GbE
(1000BASE-LX),
FC100
(100-SM-LC-L),
FC200
(200-SM-LC-L),
HDSDI (S-16.1),
SDSDI (S-16.1),
DVBASI (S-16.1),
OTM-0.1
(SS-16.1A)
Line:
OTM-0.1
(SS-16.1A)
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370003 B&W 1310
STM16/OC48 L-16.1/LR-1 STM-16/OC-
(SL-16.1) 48/OTU-1
(L-16.1/LR-1)
Line:
PRELIMINARY
OTM-0.1 (SL-16.1)
Client: 100BASE-LX10 1AB382180001 Fast Ethernet SFP 1310
FE (100BLX10) (100BASE-LX10)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Client: 1000BASE-T 1AB359780002 Electrical GbE NA
GbE (1000B-T)
GbE (1000B-SX) 1000BASE-SX (1000BASE-
SX/550m)
GbE (1000B-LX) 1000BASE-LX (1000BASE-
LX/10km)
GbE (1000B-ZX) 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-
ZX/80km
Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640003 B&W 4G FC - 850
FC-100 FC / 4G FC LC-L Hardened (SN-1)
(100-M5-SN-1)
FC-200
(200-M5-SN-1)
FC-400
(400-M5-SN-1)
Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640002 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1310
FC-100 FC / 4G FC LC-L 1300NM (B&W
(100SM-LC-L) 1G/2G/4G Fibre
Channel DDM
FC200
1310nm)
(200-SM-LC-L)
FC400
(400-SM-LC-L)
Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR 1471 - 1611
STM-1/OC-3 SFP 40km -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
(40km - to support 20)
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377160008
OTU1)
STM-16/OC-48
HDSDI, SDSDI,
DVBASI, GbE
PRELIMINARY
Line:
OTM-0.1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377200001 CWDM multirate 1471 - 1611
STM-1/OC-3 SFP 80km -thru- ≤2.7Gpbs (80km) (in increments of
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377200008 20)
STM-16/OC-48
HDSDI, SDSDI,
DVBASI, GbE
Line:
OTM-0.1
Line: DWDM SFP 1AB377220003 DWDM - 2400 191.7 - 196.05 THz
OTM-0.1 120km -thru- ps/nm (120km) (in increments of
(SL-16.2D-{9170- 1AB377220046 .05)
9605})
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers

Purpose
Amplifier modules can be used in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 to create in-line amplifier
(ILA) nodes. The following information describes this application and identifies the
amplifier modules that can be used with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
ILA node
In some physically larger networks, the distance between two add/drop nodes may exceed
the system’s single span optical reach. In such a case, an ILA can be installed at a
mid-point, thereby creating two shorter spans and boosting the signal strength before it
gets too close to the noise floor.
An ILA node is an individually managed network element, but without channel add/drop
capabilities. It uses a subset of the same hardware to provide bidirectional line
amplification and dispersion compensation only.
In very long distance applications, multiple ILAs can be installed at multiple points along
the line.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports configuration as an ILA node using the
following amplifiers:
• A2325A (23db power, variable gain, optical amplifier)
The A2325A can be used for span losses between 13 dB to 24 dB with an extend span
loss range from 24 dB to 31 dB.
• AHPHG (High Power High Gain Amplifier)
The AHPHG provides 13 to 33dB of gain, with a flat gain range of 13 to 26dB.
The in-line amplifier (ILA) amplifies the aggregate optical channel and terminates the
OSC for two optical lines. An ILA configuration consists of two line drivers (LDs),
DCMs, power, and control packs for a PSS-4 shelf.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following diagram illustrates an example of an ILA configuration. Note that the SIG
OUT ports of both LDs are connected to the span.
Figure 2-15 ILA block diagram
LD modules as optical amplifiers

Optical amplification function is performed via multistage EDFA amplifiers, most with
mid-stage DCM access. These amplifiers are implemented as integrated variable gain
optical amplifier modules (VGOAM) that include fast feedback for transient control.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 includes the following VGOAMs:
• High Power High Gain (AHPHG)
• Variable gain 23dB Amplifier (A2325A )
Each ingress LD module provides an optical supervisory channel (OSC) access point.
OSC provides high-speed data communication channel between adjacent OTS lines as
well as maintenance, monitoring, and customer clear channel communication function.
OSC is implemented as OC3 compliant digital structure with ~149 Mb/s payload capacity
for data communication and clear-channel transport. Physical layer of OSC channel is
implemented as 1510-nm OC3 SFP.
Each LD also contains two MON ports that can be connected to customer monitoring
equipment for monitoring the optical signal after the amplifier and output to the span.
Optional dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) are fibered to the mid-stage access
PRELIMINARY
ports of amplifiers that support mid-stage access. The number and type of DCM modules
needed in particular points in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network is determined by the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 Engineering and Planning Tool, based on target
dispersion map required to support 10G services between any two points in the DWDM
network. When DCM is not used, a 10-dB pad is placed instead.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-16, “Full-height LD module” (p. 2-40) for an illustration.
Figure 2-16 Full-height LD module

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 DCM shelves
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelves
DCM shelf description
A DCM enclosure can hold a maximum of 16 DCM modules. The system models each
DCM module as a separate DCM shelf with a DCM card. The inventory port of a DCM
module can be connected to an inventory port on a LD card. The inventory port should be
connected to the LD for the same Line to which the DCM is connected.
DCM inventory connectivity

The maximum distance between the inventory port at the LD faceplate and the location of
the furthest inventory port is 40m. In cases where the passive module shelf is located
beyond this distance limit, the module will be provisioned as “unmanaged,” and will be
treated as always present even though there is no communication.
The supported DCM inventory connectivity for ILA nodes is shown in the following
figure.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Automatic power reduction (APR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic power reduction (APR)

Overview
APR is a mechanism that responds to a span cut, a fiber disconnection between nodes, or
any combination of events that provide a similar indication. APR will also occur in
response to certain circuit pack failures or to fiber cuts within a node when needed to
meet safety requirements. APR automatically reduces power to prevent levels at an open
fiber that could result in injury to personnel, or damage to equipment.
As currently implemented, APR will shut down the egress amplifier whenever there is a
span cut or fiber disconnection, irrespective of the egress amplifier's output power prior to
the cut. The software does not check whether the egress amplifier is capable of exceeding
17 dBm, or whether it is currently operating at a level that above 17 dBm. In this release
APR is always on.
Note: When an egress amplifier is shut down due to APR, an egress adjustment or add
loop adjustment is not possible, and will fail.
APR on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 operates under the following conditions:
• APR is performed on the egress amplifier that launches into a span that has been cut
or disconnected.
• APR is performed on the amplifier at an ILA site that launches into a span that has
been cut or disconnected.
• A span without an egress amplifier is cut or disconnected from an add/drop or
terminal node, there is no impact on the output power of the node.
• The time between determining that APR is required for one or more amplifiers and the
completion of APR for that set of amplifiers is less than 3 seconds.
• Power will be restored to an egress amplifier that has been shut down due to an APR
condition, no earlier than 100 seconds after detection of the event that triggered APR.
OSC requirements
1830 PSS APR relies on the OSC. The OSC carries a remote defect indicator in its
SONET overhead to indicate if the originating nodes see a fiber cut. Detection of the RDI,
in the case of a single fiber cut, will indicate the need to shut down. When the RDI clears,
it indicates that the egress amplifier can be turned on again.
Disabling OSC
1830 nodes can disable the OSC when it limits the reach for long spans. Under these
PRELIMINARY
circumstances, APR and recovery from APR cannot function properly. If OSC is disabled
at the amplifier at the end of a span, then APR mechanisms are disabled at that node.
However, the Raman amplifier itself must be able to detect the OSC to turn on and remain
on.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Automatic power reduction (APR)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSC/APR limitation provisioned as 1000base-FX
The OSC can be provisioned to operate as a 1000base-FX signal. When the OSC is
provisioned in this way, the RDI signaling used to detect a span cut is not available. APR
cannot function properly in response to span cuts when the OSC is provisioned in this
way.
Shutdown examples
The following examples illustrate how Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 APR functions to shut
down and restore power in response to single and dual fiber cuts.
Single fiber cut shutdown
A span cut on the transmission path from Node 1/ILA 1 to Node 2/ILA 2, as shown in
Figure 2-17, “Single fiber cut” (p. 2-43), will result in LOS for both the DWDM channels
and the OSC at the detection points indicated in the illustration. In some failure cases,
noise might be present on the OSC channel, but not signal, so other OSC failures are also
used to trigger APR (LOF, LOL). The presence of both DWDM and OSC defects will
trigger a shutdown.
This shutdown will occur as a result of the following conditions:
• DWDM LOS is detected at the input to the line driver (LD) card in Node 2/ILA 2
• An OSC failure, measured by LOS, LOL, or LOF is detected at the input to the LD
card in Node 2/ILA 2
• The DWDM and OSC defects continue for 10 ms
Figure 2-17 Single fiber cut
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As a result of these conditions the following procedure steps will take place to implement
APR:
1. The output power will be turned completely off in the Node 2/ILA 2 amplifier that
amplifies DWDM channels that are transmitted back to Node 1/ILA 1, as indicated in
Figure 2-17, “Single fiber cut” (p. 2-43).
2. The OSC transmitter in Node 2/ILA 2 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI)
back to Node 1/ILA 1.
3. The OSC receiver in Node1/ILA 1 detects the RDI
4. The output power is turned completely off in the amplifier in Node1/ILA 1 that
amplifies the DWDM channels that are transmitted to Node 2/ILA 2.
5. Software will raise the APR-Active - Line condition against the output ports of the
amplifiers that are shut off.
RAMAN behavior
Node (A) Node (B)

Ingress LD Egress LD
Egress LD Ingress LD
RAMAN
(B)
CWR8 OSC OSC
OSC CWR8
OSC
RAMAN
(A)
When a single direction is cut on a span containing Raman amplifiers, the Raman
amplifier on the node ingress from span where there is fiber cut (Raman [B]), will see
OSC loss. Its pumps will be turned off. However, Raman (A) on the side where there is
no fiber cut, does not see OSC loss and does not turn the pumps off. Raman packs are
completely dependent on OSC loss for APR.
Restart after repair of a single fiber cut
When the cut fiber from Node 1 to Node 2 is repaired, the following procedure will take
place. (Power is restored between ILAs following the same procedure.)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-18 Single fiber restoration
1. The OSC receiver at the incoming LD in Node 2 detects the OSC from Node 1.
2. In response, the LD in Node 2 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward
Node 1 is turned back on.
3. Also in response to detection of the OSC, the RDI is removed from the OSC that is
transmitted from Node 2 to Node 1.
4. After the OSC without an RDI is detected at Node 1.
5. The amplifier in Node 1 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward Node
2 is turned back on.
6. The APR-Active - Line condition is cleared.
Double fiber cut shutdown
The algorithm that is followed when both fibers are cut or disconnected between two
nodes/ILA's is the same as for a single fiber cut. The response is described below. A span
cut on both fibers between Node 1/ILA 1 to Node 2/ILA 2, as shown in Figure 2-19,
“Double fiber cut” (p. 2-46), will follow the same general procedure as for a single fiber
cut.
This shutdown will occur as a result of the following conditions:
• DWDM LOS is detected at the input to the LD cards in Node 1/ILA 1 and Node
2/ILA 2
• OSC failures, measured by LOS, LOL, or LOF are detected at the input to the LD
cards in Node 1/ILA 1 and Node 2/ILA 2
• The DWDM and OSC defects continue for 10 ms
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-19 Double fiber cut
As a result of these conditions the following procedure steps will take place to implement
APR:
1. The output power will be turned completely off in the Node 1/ILA 1 amplifier that
amplifies DWDM channels transmitted to Node 2/ILA 2, and in the Node 2/ILA 2
amplifier that amplifies DWDM channels transmitted to Node 1/ILA 1.
2. The OSC transmitter in Node 1/ILA 1 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI) to
Node 2/ILA 2 and the OSC transmitter in Node 2/ILA 2 will transmit an RDI to Node
1/ILA 1.
3. Software will raise the APR-Active - Line condition against the output ports of the
amplifiers that are shut off.
Restart after repair of a double fiber cut
When the fibers that carry traffic between Node 1 and Node 2 are repaired in the order
indicated in the following illustration, the following procedure will take place: (Power is
restored between ILAs following the same procedure.)
Figure 2-20 Double fiber restoration

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1. After the first fiber is repaired, the OSC receiver at the incoming LD in Node 1
detects the OSC from node 2. This receiver detects the RDI from Node 2. The two
nodes are now experiencing only a single fiber cut, similar to what was described
previously in, “Restart after repair of a single fiber cut” (p. 2-44).
2. When the second fiber is repaired, the OSC receiver at the incoming LD in Node 2
detects the OSC from Node 1.
3. In response, the LD in Node 2 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward
Node 1 is turned back on.
4. Also in response to detection of the OSC, the RDI is removed from the OSC that is
transmitted from Node 2 to Node 1.
5. After the OSC without an RDI is detected at Node 1.
6. The amplifier in Node 1 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward Node
2 is turned back on.
7. The APR-Active - Line condition is cleared.
Other failures that result in APR
APR can lead to shutdowns in certain cases when the span has not been cut. In these
cases, APR may occur as a by-product of a failure. If a failure other than a span cut or
disconnection leads to an APR shutdown, transmission will restart automatically using the
standard restart procedure.
The following are examples of failures that may cause an APR shutdown:
• A Raman amplifier is being used at a node or ILA, and the fiber is disconnected
between the Raman amplifier and the ingress amplifier.
• A booster amplifier is being used at the node or ILA, and the fiber is disconnected
between the booster amplifier and the ingress amplifier.
• An OSC transmitter failure at one node or ILA leads to the shutdown of a Raman card
at an adjacent node or ILA. If the channel count is small, the shutdown of the Raman
card can result in DWDM LOS, in addition to OSC failure, at the ingress OA.
APR behavior on removal of ingress line driver LD

Removal of an ingress LD from a node does not result in an APR condition on that node.
The following illustration and description provides details of this behavior. PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Node (A) Node (B)

Ingress LD Egress LD
Egress LD Ingress LD
CWR8 OSC OSC

OSC CWR8
OSC
When an ingress LD is removed from Node (A), APR is declared on Node (B) as
expected. No APR condition is declared on Node (A) because, with the ingress LD
removed, no OSC is working on this node. So there is no way for this node to interpret
the RDI from Node (B).
APR behavior with LD reset or loss of power
Figure 2-21 Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier
APR will occur when a line-terminating amplifier at a node that has an egress OA, or an
amplifier at an ILA, loses power or is subjected to a reboot. The line terminating amplifier
may be an ingress amplifier. If the loss of power or reboot occurs in Node2, as shown in
Figure 2-21, “Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier” (p. 2-48), then the amplifier that
launches into the span from Node 2 to Node 1 will shut down, and the APR-Active Line
condition will be raised at Node 2.
During the outage or reboot, the ingress LD at Node 1 will detect both OSC LOS and
DWDM payload LOS. As a result:
PRELIMINARY
• In Node 1, the amplifier that transmits toward Node 2 will shut its power off
completely.
• The OSC that is transmitted from Node 1 to Node 2 will contain an RDI.
• Software will raise the APR-Active Line condition against the output port of the
amplifier in Node 1 that shuts down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the ingress amplifier at a node or ILA loses power, it is unable to detect defect that
can cause APR on the span. APR is required during this time because the power launched
from the far end could be in excess of class 1M. So, when an LD that terminates a line
has a cold or hard reboot, the OSC transmitter in the LD will remain off until the pack is
fully booted, and the LD that launches into the return span will remain shut down. When
rebooting has been completed, the OSC will transmit normally, with RDI transmitted only
if LOS conditions exist at the input to the LD. Also, when rebooting has been completed,
recovery from APR can occur.
In Figure 2-21, “Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier” (p. 2-48), while the ingress LD in
Node 2 is rebooting, its OSC transmitter remains off and the egress amplifier in Node 2
remains shut down.
Fiber cuts and disconnects within a node or ILA

The following information describes APR behavior for disconnections within a node or
ILA in cases in which power levels can exceed class 1M levels within the node. This
information applies to A2325A amplifiers.
Eye-safe mode support
The A2325A provides support for a low-power mode of operation. This is known as
eye-safe mode. When the amplifier output power is placed in eye-safe mode, the output
power will not exceed 10 dBm. If the output power of the amplifier is less than 10 dBm
prior to being placed in eye-safe mode, then the output power does not change. In
addition, if the amplifier output power is fully shut down for any other reason, such as an
existing APR condition from a span cut or a loss of input channels to the amplifier, then
the power will remain shut down.
ILA or FOADM egress LD
If the power level can exceed class 1M levels at point A in Figure 2-22, “ILA fiber cut
between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit” (p. 2-50), the output power must be reduced if
the connection is broken between the high power output of one port and the port that
follows.
Note: With an ILA the high power output must be reduced to a safe power level, but
not be shut off. Some output power is provided by the OA so that a reconnection can
be detected, and the OA can be restarted.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-22 ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit
If an A2325A LD is used in an ILA or as egress LD for a FOADM node, fibered as shown

in Figure 2-22, “ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit” (p. 2-50), power
will be reduced within 3 seconds of a cut on the Sig Out port of the high power LD. The
existence of the cut is determined by an LOS threshold at the Line Out port of the LD that
follows the cut. The power will be reduced using the eye-safe output mode of the
amplifier. The amplifier will exit eye-safe mode and restore full power after an LOS
clearing threshold has been exceeded.
Topology download
Software validates the topology of the node or ILA. If the amplifier in the LD is capable
of exceeding the class 1M safety limit, then the pumps on that amplifier shall remain shut
off until a valid topolgy has been provisioned. Until the valid topology has been received,
the APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition shall be raised. The amplifiers that are
subject to this requirement are shown below, along with the port against which the
condition is raised.
Software will download the topology of the node or ILA to a LD when it undergoes a
hard reboot, and validates the topology of the node or ILA. If the amplifier in the LD is
capable of exceeding the class 1M safety limit, the pumps on that amplifier will remain
shut off until a valid topology is provisioned. An APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition
will be raised on the SIG OUT port until a valid topology has been received or
provisioned.
If an A2325A undergoes a hard reboot, and the node topology that has been downloaded
does not describe a fiber cut or disconnect within a Node or ILA, then the output power of
the amplifier in the LD will remain completely off, and an APR-Active-Invalid Topology
PRELIMINARY
condition will be raised.

The APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition will also arise when partial topologies are
downloaded, for example when only the internal connections within the ILA have been
provisioned. In Figure 2-22, “ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-50), where the LD on the left has a high-power amplifier, that amplifier must remain
turned off with the APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition raised, until the external
connection is provisioned at the LINE OUT port of the right-hand LD.
If the LD undergoes a hard reboot, and the node topology that has been downloaded
describes a fiber cut or disconnect within a Node or ILA, then the LD will turn on at its
eye-safe level. The APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition will be cleared, the
APR-Active-Node condition will be raised, and the recovery from APR will be governed
by the requirements for the topology, as described elsewhere in this section. After a new
topology is created and downloaded, the APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition will be
cleared, and APR recovery can proceed in accordance with the requirements for the new
topology.
If a connection that is monitored for intranode APR is deleted, APR will result. The
amplifier output power will be turned completely off, and the APR-Active-Invalid
Topology condition will be raised.
Circuit pack failure or removal

APR will occur under the following conditions
• An A2325A used as an LD at an ILA, or a line-terminating ingress LD at a node that
has an egress optical amplifier, fails or is removed
A failed LD will transmit RDI upstream if possible. In other respects, the APR activity
is similar to that for a single fiber cut. The APR-Active-Line condition will be raised.
• An A2325A used as an LD at an ILA, or a line terminating ingress LD at a node with
an egress OA, has an FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition)
The APR-Active-Node condition will be raised.
• An A2325A used as an egress LD at a node fails, is removed, or has an active
FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition).
• APR will also occur if the FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition) is active
for the Wavetracker decoder DSP.
If the OSC SFP on a line-terminating LD fails or is removed, APR will not occur.
However, the APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition will be raised against the OSC
SFP port on the line terminating LD.
If an OSC SFP has been removed or has failed, APR will not function fully. As illustrated
in Figure 2-17, “Single fiber cut” (p. 2-43), if the OSC SFP fails in node/ILA 1, after the
PRELIMINARY
single fiber cut shown in the figure, node/ILA 1 will not be able to receive RDI from
node/ILA 2. Therefore, the egress amplifier in node/ILA 1 will not shut down. If the OSC
SFP failure occurs in node/ILA 2, or if there is a double fiber cut, then a shutdown may
still occur properly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Ethernet EPL and EVPL services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet EPL and EVPL services

Overview
EPL service is the most popular service provided by the transport network due to its
simplicity. With EPL, each Ethernet port can only contain a single Ethernet Virtual
Connection (EVC). This type of service interconnects two Ethernet interfaces and
generally provides fully transparent transport of customer frames.
EVPL service allows multiple EVCs within each Ethernet port. With EVPL, multiple
Ethernet services can be multiplexed to a single port. VLAN IDs are generally used to
distinguish between different services within the same port.
In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, the 11DPE12 supports both the standard EPL and EVPL
services, as illustrated in Figure 2-23, “EPL and EVPL services” (p. 2-52).
Figure 2-23 EPL and EVPL services
EVPL tagging (HiGig and Q-in-Q)

A proprietary HiGig tagging method, initially supported on 1830 PSS, has been
supplemented with the addition of support for Q-in-Q tagging, compliant with MEF 6.1.
The frame formats supported by these two methods of tagging are shown in the following
illustration.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Ethernet EPL and EVPL services
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-24 HiGig vs. Q-in-Q frame formats
The Higig header uses 1-byte for Start of Frame and 11 bytes for proprietary S-VLAN
Management. It also differs from the Q-in-Q frame in the following ways:
• Different usage of Preamble bytes
• Different usage of CRC bytes
Q-in-Q uses CRC to protect frame bytes excluding Preamble. Higig uses CRC to
protect all frame bytes.
• Uses the Port-ID value embedded in HiGig Header instead of the S-VLAN Tag
• Has a short IPG (8 Bytes vs. standard 12 Bytes)
• Higig supports Port ID value of 0~31 vs. S-VLAN Tag value of 0~4095
HiGig and Q-in-Q advantages
HiGig tagging has a higher data transport efficiency than Q-in-Q at the same line bit rate.
It supports Full Rate GbE Service at 10 xGbE signal flow per Line Port, and Sub Rate
GbE Service at 32 xGbE signal flow per Line Port.
Q-in-Q can have advantages over HiGig in the following applications:
•
PRELIMINARY
When NNI interconnection applications require the standard Q-in-Q interface

• It is well supported by ITU/IEEE Ethernet OAM , and protection standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Ethernet EPL and EVPL services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q-in-Q application scenario
The 11DPE12 OT can aggregate the GbE traffic within PSS-32 network, and send it to
10GbE Routers/Switches with 10GbE interfaces, processing the GbE packets based on
Q-in-Q switching. This scenario is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 2-25 Interworking with 10GbE Router/Switch
In this application all the 11DPE12 cards along the service path must use Q-in-Q tagging
mode. HiGig tagging is not allowed in any part of the service path. The 11DPE12 cards
switch the packets based on the Q-in-Q tag. The tag is added by 11DPE12 companions or
directly by the 10GbE switch. The preferred Line interface is OTU2 format for PSS-32
internal interconnections, and 10GbE format for interworking with 10GbE router.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Network Topologies
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Topologies
Overview
This section describes the network topologies supported by the 1830 PSS. Note that, for
an end-to-end service on the 1830 PSS nodes, the OTs on the end points must have the
same types of ports. Both the A-end and Z-end must have tunable transceiver modules,
fixed channel SFP/XFPs, or tunable XFPs.
DWDM optical connectivity between 1830 PSS NEs
The following connectivity between 1830 NE shelf types is supported for DWDM optical
lines.
• PSS-32 shelf connected to PSS-32 shelf
• PSS-32 shelf connected to PSS-1 AHP shelf
• PSS-16 shelf connected to PSS-1 AHP shelf
• PSS-1 AHP shelf connected to PSS-1 AHP shelf
• PSS-4 Shelf connected to PSS-4 shelf
• PSS-4 Shelf (DWDM Line with LD) connected to PSS-1 AHP shelf
DWDM optical connectivity without LD
The following connectivity between 1830 NE shelf types is supported for DWDM optical
lines without an LD.
CWDM optical connectivity between 1830 PSS NEs
The following connectivity between 1830 NE shelf types is supported for CWDM optical
lines.
• PSS-32 shelf connected to PSS-1 GBE(H) shelf
• PSS-32 shelf connected to PSS-1 MD4H shelf
• PSS-16 shelf connected to PSS-1 GBE(H) shelf
PRELIMINARY
• PSS-16 shelf connected to PSS-1 MD4H shelf

• PSS-1 GBE(H) shelf connected to PSS-1 GBE(H) shelf
• PSS-1 GBE(H) shelf connected to PSS-1 MD4H shelf
• PSS-1 MD4H shelf connected to PSS-1 MD4H shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Network Topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FOADM topologies
The system supports CWDM and DWDM linear FOADM networks.
FOADM linear network examples
Figure 2-26 DWDM FOADM Linear Network
Figure 2-27 CWDM FOADM Linear Network

PRELIMINARY
FOADM
The system supports DWDM FOADM ring network architectures. The ring configuration
is valid with or without a FOADM HUB. The system also supports DWDM FOADM
Mesh network architectures. These include the following: Ring interconnections, Chorded
Ring, and Optically Connected Spur. Below is an example of a ring interconnection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-28 FOADM Ring Interconnect
PSS-4 FOADMs
The 1830 PSS-4 network supports DWDM Line connection to an 1830 PSS-32 NE with
OSC channel support. Following Figure shows an example of this Topology.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-29 DWDM Connectivity between 1830 PSS-4 and 1830 PSS-32
The following figure shows an example of a FOADM point-to-point connection.
Figure 2-30 PSS-4 DWDM FOADM Point-to-Point Connection (with LD)

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 also supports single DWDM or CWDM channel
connections between PSS-4 NEs without an SFD or SFC.
Figure 2-31 PSS-4 CWDM or DWDM FOADM Point-to-Point Connection (w/o LD)
Mixed TOADM/FOADM Network Configurations

1830 PSS supports mixed TOADM and FOADM NEs in the same DWDM ring network.
It's possible to have an optical line with a TOADM termination on one end and a DWDM
FOADM termination on the other end.
The following are examples of valid TOADM/FOADM networks. Note that, although the
PSS-4 can be configured as a Terminal, ILA, or FOADM node, it is not intended for use
as a TOADM node in any of the following examples.
Figure 2-32 FOADM/TOADM Linear Network
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-33 FOADM/TOADM Ring Network
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-34 FOADM/TOADM Dual Ring Interworking with mixed PSS types
Bus configurations
PRELIMINARY
The 1830 PSS-4 supports a CWDM or DWDM linear bus configuration, as shown in the
following figures. The Bus network is a special example of linear topology, which
consists of a terminal node and several CWDM or DWDM bus nodes. An SFC8/SFD8
line terminal is supported with a mix of SFC4/SFD4, SFC2 and SFC1 bus nodes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-35 CWDM bus topology
Figure 2-36 DWDM bus topology
ILA topologies
The system supports a PSS-4 ILA NE interworking with PSS-32 networks to function as
an ILA for the PSS-32.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-37 PSS-4 ILA in PSS-32 Network
The system supports PSS-4 DWDM network interconnection with PSS1AHP NE so that
PSS1AHP works as the ILA of the PSS-4.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configurations
Multi-shelf NE configuration
This section describes how multiple 1830 PSS-4 shelves can be configured as a single
NE. The figure below shows an example of how a FOADM NE with three PSS-4
universal shelves, and 2 DCM shelves with 2 DCM modules could be connected to form a
single NE. The positions of the connections on the cards are only to illustrate the
connections, and do not accurately reflect the actual positions of ports on the cards.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Configurations
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-38 Multi-shelf NE example
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each PSS-4 universal shelf must have a unique ID. The ID is set via a 16-position rotary
switch. The main shelf is designated by setting its switch to 1. Up to 8 PSS-4 universal
shelves (maximum) can be configured to form a single NE.
The shelves must be interconnected using the expansion Ethernet ports on the EC, and the
expansion Ethernet ports (ES1, ES2) must be connected in a ring as shown in Figure
2-38, “Multi-shelf NE example” (p. 2-65). If the loop is not closed, the system will alarm
because there will be a link down. The port may be put out of service to suppress the
alarm.
If there are duplicate shelf IDs, the duplicate ID is detected during the boot process and
that shelf will not be allowed to complete initialization.
Node configuration
The type of node (ILA, FOADM, Terminal, etc.) is determined by the node's
configuration is determined by topological interconnections. For example, a node
functions as an in-line amplifier if its topological links are setup to include one or more
amplifiers with no CWR or SFD/SFC cards. A node/shelf functions as a TOADM if there
are CWR cards in its topological configuration.
A PSS-4 DWDM FOADM node supports optical interconnections of up to 4 degrees, and
supports a maximum of add/drop 32 DWDM channels with 100 GHz channel spacing.
(Excluded channels are due to the limitation of PSS-4 SFDs.) A PSS-4 ILA node supports
a maximum of 88 DWDM channels with 50 GHz channel spacing.
FOADM End Terminal (Degree 1)

The 1830 PSS-4 FOADM supports SFD or SFC based end terminals.
SFD-based end terminal
The end terminal may contain a single SFD or cascaded SFDs, as shown in Figure 2-39,
“12-channel SFD-based end terminal with optional LD” (p. 2-67). This configuration is
supported with or without an LD. If the line is configured with an LD, Auto power
management is supported.
For FOADM end terminals with 100 GHz channel spacing, the following SFD
combinations are supported:
• • SFD4
• • SFD4+SFD4
• • SFD4+SFD4+SFD4
PRELIMINARY
• • SFD8
• • SFD8+SFD8
• • SFD8+SFD8+SFD8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• • SFD8+SFD8+SFD8+SFD8
• • SFD4+SFD8
Figure 2-39 12-channel SFD-based end terminal with optional LD
SFC-based end terminal

The node can be configured with a B&W XFP on the OT, for terminating one
wavelength, or one of the following SFCs: SFC1, SFC2, SFC4, SFC8
The node can be configured with a B&W XFP on the OT, for terminating one
wavelength, or one of the following SFCs. Cascaded SFCs are not supported.
• • 1 SFC1
• • 1 SFC2
• • 1 SFC4
• • 1 SFC8
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-40 4-channel SFC-based end terminal
FOADM Ring Terminal (Degree 2)

A Ring Terminal, also called a HUB, is a configuration of two lines in a ring in which all
the wavelengths are terminated by OTs. No channels cross transparently between the two
lines. It can be viewed as an East end terminal and West end terminal in a single NE.
The PSS-4 supports a FOADM ring terminal. Any symmetrical or asymmetrical
combination of OMD-based line terminal configurations is supported. Auto power
management is supported for this configuration. See Figure 2-41, “PSS-4 FOADM ring
terminal” (p. 2-69) for an example of a Ring Terminal.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-41 PSS-4 FOADM ring terminal
FOADM OADM (Degree 2)

The 1830 PSS-4 FOADM supports SFD or SFC based degree OADM.
PSS-4 DWDM FOADM
A PSS-4 Degree 2 FOADM with 100 GHz spacing supports any symmetrical or
asymmetrical combination of OMD-based end terminal configurations. The table below
lists all possible east-west SFD combinations for degree 2 nodes. Note that SVT will be
expected to test all symmetrical (“Sym”) configurations and the other asymmetrical
configurations shown in the table.
East/West SFD4 SFD8 SFD8+SFD4 SFD4+SFD4SFD8+SFD8SFD4+SFD4+SFD4

SFD8+SFD8+SFD8
SFD4 Sym
SFD8 Sym
SFD8+SFD4 Sym
SFD4+SFD4 Sym
PRELIMINARY
SFD8+SFD8 Sym
SFD4+SFD4+SFD4 Sym
SFD8+SFD8+SFD8 Sym
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSS-4 CWDM FOADM
A degree 2 CWDM FOADM is supported on the 1830 PSS-4. The 1830 PSS-4 CWDM
FOADM supports add/drop configurations with 4DPA4, 11QPA4, and 11DPE12.
• • SFC1-SFC1
• • SFC2-SFC2
• • SFC4-SFC4
• • SFC8-SFC8
CWDM/DWDM FOADM Examples
The supported signal paths for a FOADM OADM are:
• Add/Drop
• Loop — single channel connectivity for the purpose of passing from East to West
transparently, without regeneration. Loop connections can only be made between
ports of the same wavelength. For a DWDM loop connection, an attenuator is used to
pad the signal.
• Pass-through — multi-channel connectivity for the purpose of cascading filters or
passing from East to West via the Expansion port on the OMD. This is not supported
for the SFD44 or SFD44B (pass-through is done on a per-channel basis via a loop
connection).
• Regeneration
The following Figures provide illustrations of various DWDM and CWDM degree 2
FOADM configurations.
Figure 2-42 8-channel degree 2 DWDM FOADM

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-43 8/4 channel degree 2 DWDM FOADM
Figure 2-44 DWDM FOADM without line LD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-45 CWDM FOADM
The PSS-4 supports an asymmetrical degree 2 configuration with a B&W pluggable

module on the OT line port of one side, and one of the following SFCs or SFDs on the
other side: SFC1, SFC2, SFC4, SFD4, SFD8
The PSS-4 also supports a degree 2 node without static filters. For this configuration, a
single wavelength is passed between 1830 PSS-4s, or between an 1830 PSS-4 and an
1830 PSS-32/16 or PSS-1 NE
Bus node
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports both DWDM bus configuration and CWDM bus
Configuration.
PRELIMINARY
The PSS-4 supports an asymmetrical degree 2 configuration for DWDM or CWDM bus
architecture, which has an SFC or SFD OMD port facing one line side, and its EXP port
facing another line side. One of the following can be used to support such a configuration:
SFC1, SFC2, SFC4, SFD4, SFD8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FOADM OADM Mesh (Degree 3 and 4)

Any combination of 3 or 4 valid DWDM end terminal configurations is supported for a
FOADM OADM mesh node. Only lines with 100 GHz channel spacing are supported.
The following figures show examples of degree 3 and degree 4 OADM mesh.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-46 Degree 3 DWDM FOADM

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-47 Degree 4 DWDM FOADM
A mixed DWDM/CWDM FOADM node is also supported as shown in the following

figure. Signals passed between the degrees are regenerated in the appropriate technology.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-48 Mixed CWDM/DWDM FOADM
Regeneration
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports single channel regeneration for
DWDM-DWDM and CWDM-DWDM connections. CWDM-CWDM regeneration is not
supported.
DWDM-DWDM single channel OEO regeneration is supported with a single dual-port
pluggable OT. The 11QPA4 and 4DPA4 OTs support this function.
CWDM-DWDM single channel OEO regeneration is supported with a single OT as
follows:
• With the 4DPA4 OT — One line/eVOA port is connected to the DWDM signal and
the other line/eVOA port is connected to the CWDM signal.
• With the 11QPA4 OT — The line/eVOA port is connected to the DWDM signal and
the associated client port is connected to the CWDM signal.
PRELIMINARY
A regenerated service will be modeled as follows in the different systems:

• EPT supports it as a single service.
• PhM supports it as a single service composed of 2 OCH trails.
• The NE supports it as 2 separate services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Both the NE and PhM allow asymmetric cards as the endpoints of an OCH trail.
Single fiber bidirectional configurations

Generally, the bidirectional optical transmission requires two fibers (transmit and
receive). However, there are applications that call for bidirectional transmission over a
single fiber. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 can to support this application. Bidirectional
transmission on a single fiber requires that an SFC filter (SFC 2/4/8) be used as a
combiner/splitter between the two single-fiber transmit and receive ports of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 line interfaces, and the single fiber bidirectional transport
medium. The single fiber transmission medium uses different CWDM wavelengths in
each direction to achieve bidirectional.
This is accomplished by connecting the transmit and receive fibers from line port on the
OT to two of the different wavelengths supported by the filter. Both the transmit and
receive fibers are connected to the IN ports of the different wavelengths on the filter. The
filter passes the wavelength from the IN ports (the MUX side) of the filter to the OMD
OUT port, where they are combined in both the receive and transmit directions on a
single fiber. The single fiber, connected to the OMD OUT port of the filter, carries signals
in both directions on their assigned wavelengths.
Bidirectional 1-degree OADM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports the single-fiber bidirectional transmission with a
terminal node (1-degree OADM) configuration, where a single CWDM filter is used.
The supported SFC types are:
• SFC-2A, SFC-2B, SFC-2C, SFC-2D
• SFC-4A, SFC-4B
• SFC8
The table below lists the requirements on the configuration of CWDM filters:
SFC Filter type Maximum Capacity SFC Ports SFC port

(bidirectional connecting to OT connecting to the
transmission) ports transmission fiber
SFC-1 1 / per SFC filter Channel in/ EXP in OMD out
Channel out/EXP out OMD in
SFC-2 1 /per SFC filter Channel in ports OMD out
Channel out ports OMD in
PRELIMINARY
SFC-4 2 /per SFC filter Channel in or out OMD out

ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFC Filter type Maximum Capacity SFC Ports SFC port

(bidirectional connecting to OT connecting to the
transmission) ports transmission fiber
SFC-8 4 /per SFC filter Channel in ports OMD out
The arrangement of fiber connections for these bidirectional configurations are shown in
the following illustrations.
Figure 2-49 SFC-2A bidirectional fiber connections

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-50 SFC-4A bidirectional fiber connections
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-51 SFC-8 bidirectional fiber connections
Bidirectional 2-Degree OADM (Symmetrical)

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports a single-fiber bidirectional transmission
2-degree OADM configuration, where two identical CWDM filters are used. ESFC2 and
ESFC4 filters are supported in this configuration. Band pass-through and channel loop
connections are allowed in this node.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-52 PSS-4 bidirectional 2-degree OADM
Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports single-fiber CWDM bidirectional transmission
with CWDM-DWDM regeneration, where regeneration OTs are equipped. SFC2, SFC4
and SFC8 filters. An example CWDM single-fiber configuration for a DWDM/CWDM
mediating OT is shown below.
Figure 2-53 Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protection
Overview
This section describes the protection mechanism supported on Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4.
The following OTs support E-SNCP protection in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4:
• 11DPE12
• 11QPA4
• 4DPA4 (FlexMux mode only)
E-SNCP on 4DPA4
E-SNCP bridging for the 4DPA4 is illustrated in Figure 2-54, “E-SNCP on 4DPA4 OT”
(p. 2-82). Each client port (plus the two line ports) form an independent protection group.
The bridging is performed at the ODU1 level. As a result, all client ports assigned to the
working line are bridged simultaneously to the protection line.
Figure 2-54 E-SNCP on 4DPA4 OT

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Protection
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the outgoing direction, traffic from the client ports is aggregated into one ODU1 line
signal, then the ODU1 signal is bridged into two parts, one for Working Path and another
for Protection Path. Both parts are inserted with OTU1 overhead and FEC code being sent
to the lines. The optical wavelengths are then modulated with WT encoder/eVOA before
sending to the SFD or FOADM.
In the incoming direction, the OT receives two OTU1 line signals (working and
protection). After FEC error correction and OTU1/ODU1 overhead termination
respectively, client traffic is extracted independently from the two line signals according
to the OPTS mapping structure determined for the outgoing direction. Then, depending
on the external switch commands for individual protection groups, or signal quality, the
traffic for each client port is selected independently from the working or protection line
port.
E-SNCP on 11QPA4
With E-SNCP configuration, the 11QPA4 ingress client signal is broadcast by an 8x8
matrix. The Optical signal is sent out by the two XFPs and transported via diverse optical
paths through a DWDM domain. The two received signals are processed by the two OTN
mappers. The automatic switch decision is made based on Loss of optical signal/Loss of
lock, or by monitoring LOF/LOM/TIM/SSF/PLM/SD/CSF, as detected by the OTN
mapper.
Figure 2-55, “11QPA4 E-SNCP examples” (p. 2-84) provides two examples of E-SNCP
configuration for the 11QPA4. Each client port and two line ports form an independent
protection group. Protected client(s) and unprotected client(s) can co-exist on the board.
In the source direction, the client involved in a protection group is split into two parts in
the matrix component, each goes to one line OTN mapper/framer for signal mapping,
OTN overhead insertion, and FEC coding. The signal is then transmitted after E/O
conversion. The optical wavelength is modulated with WT encoder or attenuated by slow
eVOA before entering the SFD.
In the receiving direction, the OT receives two line signals from the SFD (a working and
protection, signal belonging to the same protection group). After FEC decoding, OTN
overhead termination, and client signal demapping, the two client signals enter the 8x8
switch. Depending on the automatic protection switching criteria or external switching
command, one signal is selected and sent to the client port.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-55 11QPA4 E-SNCP examples
As shown in the above illustration, any one client port on the 11QPA4 and its
corresponding line port and any one of other line ports can form a protection group. On
an idle client port, when the corresponding line port is involved in a protection group, the
SFP does not need be equipped, because no active traffic will go through this client port.
For simplicity, the WT encoder or slow eVOA is not plotted.
E-SNCP 11DPE12
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports service cross-connection between two neighbor OTs
through a backplane high speed connection. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides this
kind of E-SNCP protection on the 11DPE12 OT when it is provisioned for Q-in-Q mode.
With the flexible protection provision, two types of protection scenarios are supported on
this OT:
PRELIMINARY
• Line service protection with one line port bridged to and selected from the other two
line ports which locate at a same OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Protection
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Line service protection with a service of one line port bridged to and selected from the
other two line ports which locate at different OTs
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Alien Wavelength Access
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alien Wavelength Access

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports directly access for alien CWDM or DWDM
channels through an SFD or SFC channel port.
The following figure shows the an example of an alien wavelength channel configuration.
Wavelength channel performance should meet 1830 PSS system requirements for
wavelength deviation. Only unkeyed connections are supported.
Figure 2-56 PSS-4 alien wavelength access
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopbacks
Purpose
This section contains the detailed requirements for LOOPBACKS for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4.
Loopbacks are typically used in a process of installation, system maintenance and
troubleshooting. The basic idea is to allow the user to test the circuit or isolate the failure
by connecting the test equipment to the system interface and creating the loopbacks at
different points in the transmission path. In the process of troubleshooting isolating
segments of the transmission path and associating the addition/removal of a monitored
segment with presence of a failure.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 will support the following types of loopbacks consistent
with GR-253-CORE.
• Facility loopback (GR-253-CORE (2005) section 6.2.3.3.3)
The facility loopback is applied at an interface to loop the signal back toward the
facility. (See Figure 2-57, “Loopback access points” (p. 2-89).)
• Terminal loopback (GR-253-CORE (2005) section 6.2.3.2.1)
The terminal loopback is applied at an interface to loop the signal back toward the
terminal hardware (back into the NE). (See Figure 2-57, “Loopback access points”
(p. 2-89).)
Performing loopbacks
Performing loopbacks is service affecting. You must take the facility out of service before
performing a loopback test.
The loopback operation is persistent in the NE. It will survive system restart and
in-service upgrade. During system restart the looped signal may be temporarily
interrupted. After the completion of a restart, the loopback which existed prior to the
restart will be restored.
A port under loopback operation cannot be provisioned to the In-Service state.
Facilities cannot be deleted while a loopback is still active. And, only one loopback
(facility or terminal) is allowed to be active on a facility at a time.
Note: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the unit.
Loopback access points

PRELIMINARY
The following illustration illustrates the loopbacks supported on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 OTs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Loopbacks
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-57 Loopback access points
OT OT
module module LosProp=LPBK
LosProp=LPBK
O O O O
Client C/DWDM Client C/DWDM
Port E E Port Port E E Port
O O O O
Client Facility DWDM Port

Loopback Terminal Loopback
OT OT
module module
O O O O
Client C/DWDM Client C/DWDM
Port E E Port Port E E Port
O O O O
AAIS
aLaserOFF (or aLaserOFF
if LOSPROP=LASEROFF)
Client Terminal DWDM Port Facility

Loopback Loopback
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Performance Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance Monitoring
Purpose
Performance monitoring (PM) refers to the in-service, non-intrusive monitoring of
transmission quality and equipment health. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 tracks the
signal quality and equipment health through continuous collection and analysis of
performance data. The user can retrieve current and past values of the system to get an
overview of the health of the system. The performance monitoring capability exists for
optical lines, channels, and equipment monitoring. Users have the ability to provision
threshold parameters to levels that might be indicative of impending performance
degradation. Responding to a performance degradation before there is a failure and
system alarms are raised is termed proactive maintenance. Responding to system alarms
is termed reactive maintenance. Crossing of a performance parameter threshold indicates
a potential network quality or performance degradation while the services being
transported have not been impacted. If a condition continues to deteriorate, then alarms
are raised and immediate attention may be required to resolve or repair the problem.
1830 PSS-4 Performance Monitoring

Information below from MD4H - Need information for additional PSS-4
performance monitoring parameters.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports performance monitoring both on the client ports
and on the OTU1 line side ports.
Optical Performance Monitoring
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports optical performance monitoring related to received
and transmitted optical power for both the optical client ports and the OTU1 line side
ports.
OTN Line Performance Monitoring supports a wide variety of client signals. 1830 PSS-4
monitors the following performance parameters accordingly.
OTN Performance Monitoring
• Background Block Errors (BBE-OTU)
• Errored Seconds (ES-OTU)
• Severely Errored Seconds (SES-OTU)
• Unavailable Seconds (UAS-OTU)
•
PRELIMINARY
FEC Corrected Errors (FECC)

• FEC Uncorrected Bits (FECUBC)
• Background Block Errors (BBE-ODU)
• Errored Seconds (ES-ODU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Performance Monitoring
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Severely Errored Seconds (SES-ODU)
• Unavailable Seconds (UAS-ODU)
8B/10B PCS layer performance measurements for 1GBE, FC100, FC200, FC400,
DVBASI
• Code Violations – PCS (CV-PCS)
• Errored Seconds – PCS (ES-PCS)
• Severely Errored Seconds – PCS (SES-PCS)
• Severely Errored Frame Seconds – PCS (SEFS-PCS)
• Code Violations - PCS (transmit direction) (CV-PCS)
• Errored Seconds - PCS (transmit direction) (ES-PCS)
• Severely Errored Seconds - PCS (transmit direction) (SES-PCS)
• Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS (transmit direction) (SEFS-PCS)
ETH layer 2 performance measurements for 1GBE
• Ethernet Number of Octets (ETHOCTETS)
• Ethernet Number of Packets (ETHPKTS)
• Ethernet Broadcast Packets (ETHBCSTPKTS)
• Number of collision events on Ethernet link (ETHCOLLISIONS)
• Ethernet Number of Errored Frames (ETHCRCAE)
• Ethernet Number of Drop Events (ETHDROPEVTS)
• Ethernet Incoming Fragmented Packets (ETHFRGMTS)
• Ethernet Jabber Packets (ETHJABRS)
• Ethernet Multi-cast Packets (ETHMCSTPKTS)
• Ethernet Overzise Packets (ETHOVRSIZEPKTS)
• Ethernet Undersize Packets (ETHUNDRSIZEPKTS)
• Ethernet 64 octet Packets (ETHPKTS64OCTETS)
• Ethernet 65-127 octet Packets (ETHPKTS127OCTETS)
• Ethernet Packet Error Ratio (ETHPKTER)
PRELIMINARY
STM1: SDH Regenerator Section PM Parameters

• Background Block Errors (BBE-RS)
• Errored Seconds (ES-RS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Severely Errored Seconds (SES-RS)
• Unavailable Seconds (UAS-RS)
SONET Section PM Parameters
• Coding Violations (CV-S)
• Errored Seconds (ES-S)
• Severely Errored Seconds (SES-S)
• Severely Error Frame Seconds (SEFS)
How performance monitoring works

Performance monitoring (PM) statistics provide counts or measurements of significant
information that can be used to gauge the performance of the network element and the
services running on it.
The statistics gathered are used primarily for the following:
• to provide instant notification, via alarms, that acceptable thresholds for data such as
CPU utilization or dropped packets have been crossed.
• to provide a historical view of the performance of the network element over a given
period of time.
15 minutes and 24 hours counters
For each parameter, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides 15 minutes and 24 hours
counters:
• 15 minutes counters: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides one current and 32 recent
registers for the Performance Data. Each register is time stamped and contains a
suspect interval indication (this indicates that the duration of the interval is suspected
of being unequal to 15 minutes). The 15 minute intervals are aligned with the 24 hour
intervals.
• 24 hours counters: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides one current and seven
recent 24H registers for the Performance Data. Each register is time stamped and
contains a suspect interval indication (this indicates that the duration of the interval is
suspected of being unequal to 24 hours). The 24 hour intervals are synchronized to the
time-of-day. The suspect indication is supported for all measurement periods. The
suspect indication is supported for all measurement periods.
This complies to ITU-T G.784 and Telcordia GR-253 issue 3 (2000).
Threshold crossing alerts (TCAs)
Performance monitoring statistics are gathered for all interface ports and the statistics are
PRELIMINARY
grouped by functional category. Each category has several monitored parameters for
which you can configure threshold crossing alerts (TCAs). A threshold is the mechanism
for generating a defined notification resulting from changes in PM parameter values. The
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 allows provisioning of performance parameter thresholds,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Performance Monitoring
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
which can be set by the user to show degraded performance. You can configure how
much data is gathered, how it is stored, and how and when you are notified if certain
thresholds levels are crossed.
For ETSI applications, the Single Level Threshold Crossing mechanism applies to
performance parameters with an accumulation period of 24 hours. The Dual Level
Threshold Crossing mechanism applies to performance parameters with an accumulation
period of 15 minutes. TCAs are reported as standing conditions. The standing conditions
are managed via Alarm Severity Profiles, like every other alarm.
For 15 minutes counters, an alarm message is sent towards the management interface, if
the alarm threshold value (TR) for the PM register is crossed during the measurement
period. The TCA will be active from this time on. If the threshold value does change for
an active TCA, the TCA will not be resent.
A message clearing the alarm will be sent towards the management interface at the end of
a measurement period if all of the following conditions are met:
• The clear threshold value (RTR) is not crossed during the measurement period
• The measurement period is not considered as adjusted or not available
• The measurement period contains no Unavailable Time
• The TCA is active for the PM register
From this time on the TCA is considered as inactive The clear threshold value (RTR)
should always be set with a lower value than the alarm threshold (TR).
For the 24h counters, the alarm message will be sent towards the management interface if
the threshold value for the PM register is crossed during the measurement period. The
TCA will be considered active from this time on. If a TCA is active, the clear message
will be sent towards the management interface at the end of a measurement period. From
this time on the TCA will be considered as inactive. If the threshold value is crossed in
the following measurement period, the TCA will be raised again.
When the threshold value is changed for an active TCA:
• If the new threshold is still crossed by the current register value, nothing is done.
• If the new threshold value is not crossed by the current register value, a message
clearing the alarm will be sent and the TCA will be considered as inactive. If the
alarm threshold is crossed again later, the TCA will be raised again.
TCA messages for analog parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter
register, current threshold value, current register value, base-lined value, and the time and
date of the occurrence. TCA message output contains the absolute measured value for the
PRELIMINARY
current register, and not the deviation from the associated base-lined value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The data for each PM group is queried and tested for threshold crossings at the following
intervals:
• 15-min bin: every 15 minutes
• 24-hr. bin: every 24 hours
A TCA event is reported within a minute of the event occurring.
Note: The PM groups are also queried and tested for threshold crossings when the
contents of the raw bin are viewed. This query is in addition to the regularly
scheduled queries.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Status Retrieval
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Status Retrieval
Objective
Configuration parameters and status information can be retrieved for a range of
equipment and conditions on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4. Status information is retrieved
using the CLI. Refer to the 1830 PSS-32 CLI Command Guide
The following status retrieval options are available from the CLI:
• System Timing status
• Loopbacks
• All Faults
Retrieving user status

The NE maintains all active and inactive users.
• Admin or Service users can retrieve session information on all active (session
established) authenticated (logged on) users at any given time.
• Users with appropriate security level privileges can retrieve information related to the
login parameters (i.e., time remaining before a user login becomes disabled due to
password aging) of provisioned users in the system, and information indicating
whether or not the provisioned user is disabled or enabled to login.
• Users with sufficient security level privileges can retrieve session information on all
active (session established) unauthenticated (not logged on) sessions at any given
time.
Retrieving and editing user privileges

The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided
to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:
• Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile
database entry for another user.
• Only users with administrator privileges can modify a user’s security level. It is not
possible to modify the UID or user security level of factory default users.
• Modifications to user specific provisioned values are not allowed for a user that is
currently logged on.
• A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile
entries. Otherwise a user can only retrieve his own user profile entry.
PRELIMINARY
• Only those parameters values that are actually applied for the specified UID are
reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but
still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 System access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System access
Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports local access for provisioning and status retrieval.
IP address
The IP address of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is configured via the CLI. During a
software installation/upgrade, a computer with an IP address is used as the FTP host for
the upgrade. This computer will contain the source file (zipped in tar.gz) to be loaded and
will also have an FTP server running. Refer to, “Software installation”Procedure 4-3:
“Software installation” (p. 4-5).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Synchronization
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronization
Manual Time of Day synchronization
The following apply for manual (non-NTP) Time of Day synchronization.
• The NE date and time are capable of being modified via user interface command
• If NTP synchronization is enabled, attempts to modify date and time are denied.
• Changing the date or time, without input errors, will not cause any alarms, conditions,
or autonomous messages from the NE system due to date or time changes.
• The system ensures the date/time is set and reported within the valid range supported
by the user commands. The valid date range is from 1-Jan-2005 to 31-Dec-2059.
• The NE preserves the correct time and date through a restart/reboot of the processors
where there is no loss of power, and also when a module or device (hard disk) has
been replaced.
• The NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the selected
NTP server, when enabled, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages,
event reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps use this time of day.
Note: Time/date changes may cause partial or incomplete PM data, depending on the
magnitude of the time change. Time/date changes will not affect the application of
security measures such as password aging.
Network Time Protocol (NTP) synchronization

The NE is capable of synchronizing its time of day via Network Time Protocol (NTP). It
is possible to provision up to ten (10) NTP servers and it is also possible to delete an NTP
server. The user can retrieve the attributes and service state of all designated NTP servers
via user command.
The following applies:
• It is possible to enable or disable NTP synchronization. When NTP protocol is
enabled, the NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the
selected NTP server, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages, event
reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps will use this time of day (NTP UTC
time + provisioned offset). PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When NTP protocol is disabled after having been synchronized to an NTP server, the
NE internal clock adopts the last value of the NTP server time as its set time and
continues to calculate time stamps using the provisioned offset.
• The NE supports the following time-of-day synchronization modes:
– non-synchronized, free-running mode: NTP is not enabled, and the NE is not
synchronized to an NTP server and is instead using its own internal clock as a
source.
– synchronized mode: the NE is using the NTP protocol to synchronize to an NTP
server. The NE is polling the NTP server and periodically making corrections to
its internal clock so as to maintain the same clock time as the NTP server.
• The current time-of-day synchronization mode is retrievable via user command
• NTP server addresses and NTP enable/disable status is able to survive a database
backup and restore.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Reliability program
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability program
Overview
The reliability program is implemented as an integral part of the Alcatel-Lucent Product
Life Cycle (PLC) process. The reliability program is comprehensive, and includes
activities such as setting and ensuring compliance with customer-focused
system-reliability requirements, ensuring component qualification is consistent with use
environment and system design, predicting failure rates of Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs), assessing reliability architecture, modeling system reliability, assuring
satisfactory system-downtime performance, reducing hardware failure rates through
Environmental Stress Testing (EST), and tracking field returns.
The reliability program is comprehensive, and includes the following activities:
• Sets and ensures compliance with customer-focused system-reliability requirement
• Ensues component qualification is consistent with use environment and system design
• Predicts failure rates of FRUs
• Assesses reliability architecture
• Models system reliability
• Ensures satisfactory system-downtime performance
• Reduces hardware failure rates through Environmental Stress Testing (EST)
• • Tracks field returns.
Design and development

During the design and development stage, reliability predictions, qualification and
selection of components, definition of quality assurance audit standards, and prototyping
of critical areas of the system ensure built-in reliability.
Manufacturing and field deployment

During manufacturing and field deployment, techniques such as environmental stress
testing, production quality audits, field-return tracking, failure-mode analysis, and
feedback and corrective-action further enhance the ongoing reliability improvement
efforts.
Failure Rates
This section provides reliability figures of 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
PRELIMINARY
Orderable Items with non-zero failure rates per Telcordia SR-332 [1], Method I-D.
Failure rates are expressed in FITs, where one FIT is one failure in 109 operating hours.
The mean time to failure (MTTF) in years is given by:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTBF = MTTF + MTTR

In this equation, λ is the steady-state failure rate per SR-332, Issue 2; Method I-D. The
mean time between failures (MTBF) is defined by:
MTBF = MTTF + MTTR

In this equation, MTTR is the mean time to repair. Since MTTF >> MTTR, MTBF is very
close to MTTF. Hence the two terms MTBF and MTTF are often used interchangeably.
Table 2-8 Failure Rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (controlled
environment)
Acronym Orderable Item APN Failure Rate MTBF

(FITs) (yrs)
E4SHF ED 4 SHELF 3KC12960AA 310 368
(SHELF,BP,
SHELF ID,DUST
FILTER)
E4KIT ED PSS 4 Shelf 3KC12959AA 4191 27
Kit (E4SHF,
E4EC, E4FAN)
E4PFDCAK ED 4 POWER 3KC12831AA 1047 109
FILTER (-48
VDC) with WT-
HARDENED
E4PFDCAU ED 4 POWER 3KC12861AA 1020 112
FILTER (-48
VDC) without WT-
HARDENED
E4EC ED 4 3KC12828AA 1533 74
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
E4FAN ED 4 FAN UNIT 3KC12841AA 2348 49
PRELIMINARY
HARDENED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
environment) (continued)
E4_SFC1A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AA 223 512

FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (A
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AB 223 512
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1C ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AC 223 512
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (C
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1D ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AD 223 512
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1E ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AE 223 512
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (E
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1F ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AF 223 512
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (F
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1G ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AG 223 512
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (G
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
E4_SFC1H ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AH 223 512

FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (H
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 4 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 4 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFC8 ED 4 STATIC 3KC12853AA 296 386
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 8 CH
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (B
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (C
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFD8A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AA 296 386
PRELIMINARY
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (A
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E4_SFD8B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AB 296 386

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFD8C ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AC 296 386
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (C
VARIANT)
E4_SFD8D ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AD 296 386
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (D
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (B
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (C
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (D
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
E4_SFD4E ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AE 260 439

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (E
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E4_SFD4F ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AF 260 439

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (F
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4G ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AG 260 439
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (G
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4H ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AH 260 439
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (H
VARIANT)
11QPA4A 11G Quad Port 8DG60349AB 2463 46
Pluggable Anyrate
(4 client) -
HARDENED
11DPE12 11G DUAL PORT 8DG59340AA 3082 37
PLUGGABLE
GBE ADM(12
CLIENTS)
11QPA4 QUAD 10G 8DG60349AA 2451 47
TRANSPONDER
4DPA4 MSC - 4G Dual 8DG59713AA 2154 53
Port Pluggable
AnyRate (4 client)
A2325A High Power High 8DG59245AA 3301 35
Gain DWDM
Amplifier
AHPHG High Power High 8DG59245AA 3659 31
Gain DWDM
Amplifier
PRELIMINARY
DMSMF010 DCM-SSMF 10 8DG59423AA 20 5708

km
km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
DMTWR020 DCM-TWRS 20 8DG59424AB 20 5708
km
km
km
km
PRELIMINARY

km
km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DMLEF020 DCM-ELEAF 20 8DG59424AC 20 5708

km
km
km
km
km
km
Table 2-9 Failure Rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (uncontrolled
environment)
Acronym Orderable Item APN Failure Rate MTBF

(FITs) (yrs)
E4SHF ED 4 SHELF 3KC12960AA 620 184
(SHELF,BP,
SHELF ID,DUST
FILTER)
E4KIT ED PSS 4 Shelf 3KC12959AA 8382 14
Kit (E4SHF,
E4EC, E4FAN)
E4PFDCAK ED 4 POWER 3KC12831AA 2094 55
FILTER (-48
VDC) with WT-
HARDENED
E4PFDCAU ED 4 POWER 3KC12861AA 2040 56
FILTER (-48
VDC) without WT-
HARDENED
PRELIMINARY
E4EC ED 4 3KC12828AA 3066 37

EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
E4FAN ED 4 FAN UNIT 3KC12841AA 4696 24
HARDENED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (B
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (C
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1E ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AE 446 256
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (E
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1F ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AF 446 256
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (F
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1G ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AG 446 256
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (G
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
E4_SFC1H ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AH 446 256

FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (H
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 4 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 4 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFC8 ED 4 STATIC 3KC12853AA 592 193
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 8 CH
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (B
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (C
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (D
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (A
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (B
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (C
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (D
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (A
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (B
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (C
VARIANT)
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (D
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
E4_SFD4E ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AE 520 220

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (E
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E4_SFD4F ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AF 520 220

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (F
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4G ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AG 520 220
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (G
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4H ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AH 520 220
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (H
VARIANT)
11QPA4A 11G Quad Port 8DG60349AB 4926 23
Pluggable Anyrate
(4 client) -
HARDENED
11DPE12 11G DUAL PORT 8DG59340AA 6164 19
PLUGGABLE
GBE ADM(12
CLIENTS)
4DPA4 MSC - 4G Dual 8DG59713AA 4308 26
Port Pluggable
AnyRate (4 client)
Sparing Tables for Field Replaceable Units

The circuit pack sparing levels in the following tables were determined using the
methodology in Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385 [2]. In the context of
sparing calculations, lead time is the time to replenish the sparing pool with a new or
repaired pack. The sparing levels are based on circuit pack steady-state FIT rates given in
Table 2-8, “Failure Rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (controlled
environment)” (p. 2-100)and a service continuity objective of 99.999%.
PRELIMINARY
Attention: Lead time, as used herein, does not pertain to the delivery intervals from
the submission of a purchase order, as that term may be used under any applicable
contract. Furthermore, lead time should not be confused with mean time to repair
(typically, 2 hours in a central office), which is the time elapsed from when a circuit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pack or unit is known to fail in service to when a spare circuit pack or unit is placed in
service to replace the failed item. It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain the
recommended sparing levels at all times. The need to maintain recommended sparing
levels implies that a replacement spare must be ordered immediately upon the
detection of a pack failing in service. In addition, lead times and FIT rates specified
here are assumptions for purposes of maintaining adequate sparing levels only, and
they do not change the terms of any applicable contracts, including ordering terms,
lead times, delivery provisions, or any applicable warranties that may be in effect.
Figure 2-58 Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead Time (controlled environment)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead Time (uncontrolled environment)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Ordering
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ordering
Purpose
This section provides ordering details for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ordering
information.
Table Contents
Table 2-10, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-4 NE lists the ordering information for the 1830
CD-ROMs and License Point Fees” PSS-32/1830 PSS-4 network element (NE)
(p. 2-118) software CD-ROMs.
Need to know if there will be a separate PSS-4
CD-ROM.
Table 2-11, “PSS-4 SFPs” (p. 2-119) lists the ordering information for the 1830
PSS-32 and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 SFP
pluggable optics
Table 2-12, “1830 PSS-4 common lists the ordering information for the
equipment” (p. 2-126) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 common equipment.
Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-4 installation kits” lists the ordering information for Alcatel-Lucent
(p. 2-127) 1830 PSS-4 installation kits, and their contents.
Table 2-14, “1830 PSS-4 power options” lists the ordering information for Alcatel-Lucent
(p. 2-127) 1830 PSS-4 power options.
Table 2-15, “1830 PSS-4 customer- lists the ordering information for the
replaceable items” (p. 2-128) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4kit:
customer-replaceable items.
Table 2-16, “1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous lists the ordering information for the
equipment” (p. 2-128) Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous
equipment.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ordering details
Table 2-10, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-4 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees”
(p. 2-118) lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-4 network
element (NE) software CD-ROMs.
Table 2-10 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-4 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI 1830 1830

code PSS-32 PSS-4
SWP-1830 1830 PSS — X —
PSS R3.0.0 R3.0.0
CDROM
SWP 1830PSS-4 — — X
1830PSS-4 R1.5.0
R1.5.0 CDROM
SWL- 1830 PSS-32 8DG60207AA — X —
Wavelength R2.0
Tracker Software
1830PSS32 License Fee
License Fee (incl.
Wavelength
Tracker)
SWL- WDM Blade 3AL75117AA — X —
Photonics License
VERS “A” Point Fee
WDM LP
SWL- TDM Blade 3AL75118AA — X —
Photonics License
VERS “A” Point Fee
TDM LP
SWL- Ethernet 8DG59727AA — X —
Photonics Blade
VERS “A” License
ETH LP Point Fee
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-11, “PSS-4 SFPs” (p. 2-119) lists the ordering information for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4 SFP pluggable optics.
Table 2-11 PSS-4 SFPs
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code

155M SFP SFP L-1.1 -40/+85 1AB376350001 NGI7AMEMAA
S-1.1/IR-1 (Black and White
STM-1/OC-3 DDM
1310 nm)
(S-1.1/IR-1)
155M SFP SFP L-1.1 -40/+85 1AB376350002 NGI7AMFMAA
L-1.1/LR-1 (Black and White
STM-1/OC-3 DDM
1310 nm)
(L-1.1/LR-1)
155M SFP SFP L-1.1 -40/+85 1AB376350003 NGI7AMGMAA
STM-1/OC-3 DDM
1310 nm)
(L-1.2/LR-2)
622M SFP SFP S-4.1 -40/+85 1AB376360001 NGI7AMHMAA
S-4.1/IR-1 (Black and White
STM-4/OC-12 DDM
1310 nm)
(S-4.1/IR-1)
622M SFP SFP S-4.1 -40/+85 1AB376360002 NGI7AMJMAA
STM-4/OC-12 DDM
1310 nm)
(L-4.1/LR-1)
SFP 1000BX / B&W 1000BX / 1AB393080005 NG17AWJ2AA
STM-4 STM-4 (20km
upstream)
SFP 1000BX / B&W 1000BX / 1AB393080006 NG17AWK2AA
STM-4 STM-4 (20km
downstream)
PRELIMINARY
SFP FE B&W 100BX/FE 1AB393080007 NG17AWL2AA

(100Base (40km upstream)
BX40)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-11 PSS-4 SFPs (continued)

SFP FE B&W 100BX/FE 1AB393080008 NG17AWM2AA
(100Base (40km downstream)
BX40)
SFP 1000BX / B&W 1000BX / 1AB393080009 NG17AWG2AA
STM-4 STM-4 (40km
upstream)
SFP 1000BX / B&W 1000BX / 1AB393080010 NG17AWH2AA
STM-4 STM-4 (40km
downstream)
2G5 SFP SFP I-16.1 -40/+85 1AB376370001 NGI7AMTMAA
I-16.1/SR-1 (Black and White
STM-16/OC-48 DDM
1310 nm)
(I-16.1/SR-1)
2G5 SFP SFP I-16.1 (Black and 1AB376370001 NGI7AMTMAA
I-16.1/SR-1 White STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm)
(I-16.1/SR-1)
2G5 SFP SFP L-16.1 -5/+85 1AB376370003 NGI7ANRMAA
STM-16/OC-48 DDM
1310 nm)
(L-16.1/LR-1)
2G5 SFP SFP L-16.2 -5/+85 1AB376370004 NGI7ANSMAA
STM-16/OC-48 DDM
1310 nm)
(L-16.2/LR-2)
2G5 MR SFP SFP SS-16.1A ANY 1AB376370005 WMU1AF2CAA
SS-16.1A RATE -40/+85 (Black
and White
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU-1 Multirate
PRELIMINARY
[<2.7G] DDM 1310

nm
(S-16.1A)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SFP SFP 1000BASE-T 1AB382180001 NGI7ASGMAA
1000BASE-T (Electrical GbE)
1G SFP SFP GBE SX -40/+85 1AB376720001 NGI7ANPMAA
1000BASE (Black and White 1
GbE DDM 850 nm
-SX
[1000BASE-SX])
1G SFP SFP GBE LX -40/+85 1AB376720002 NGI7AMLMAA
GbE DDM 1310 nm
-LX
[1000BASE-LX])
1G SFP SFP GBE LX -40/+85 1AB376720003 NGI7AMMMAA
GbE DDM 1550 nm
-ZX
[1000BASE-ZX])
FC SFP SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1AB379640001 NGI7ANVMAA
1G FC/2G 850NM (Black and
FC/4G FC White 1G/2G/4G Fibre
SN-I Channel DDM 850 nm
[SN-1])
FC SFP 1G FC SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1AB379640002 NG17ANWMAA
/ 2G FC / 4G 1300NM (Black and
FC LC-L White 1G/2G/4G Fibre
Channel DDM 1310
nm (LC-L))
2G MR SFP CWDM-SH 1AB377160001 NG17AM7MAA
CWDM SFP 1471NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
PIN/1471nm (<2.7G) DDM

2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km

PRELIMINARY

2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2G MR SFP CWDM-SH 1AB377160004 NG17ANAMAA
2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
2G MR SFP CWDM-SH 1AB377160005 NG17ANBMAA

2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
2G MR SFP CWDM-SH 1AB377160006 NG17ANCMAA

2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
2G MR SFP CWDM-SH 1AB377160007 NG17ANDMAA

2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
2G MR SFP CWDM-SH 1AB377160008 NG17ANEMAA

2.5G Multirate PIN)
40 km
2G MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200001 NGI7ANFMAA

2.5G Multirate APD)
80 km
APD/1471 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200002 NGI7ANGMAA

2.5G Multirate APD)
80 km
APD/1491 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200003 NGI7ANHMAA

PRELIMINARY
80 km APD / 2.5G Multirate APD)

1511 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200004 NGI7ANJMAA
80 km APD/ 2.5G Multirate APD)
1531 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200005 NGI7ANKMAA
1551 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200006 NGI7ANLMAA
1571 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200007 NGI7ANMMAA
1591 nm [(2.7G) DDM]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200008 NGI7ANNMAA
1611 nm [(2.7G) DDM
CH1610]
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200009 NGI7AUHMAA
80km APD / 2.5G Multirate APD
1471nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200010 NGI7AUNMAA
1491nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200011 NGI7AUPMAA
PRELIMINARY

1511nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200012 NGI7AURMAA
1531nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200013 NGI7AUSMAA
1551nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200014 NGI7AUTMAA
1571nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200015 NGI7AUUMAA
1591nm (<2.7G) DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200016 NGI7AUVMAA
1611nm (<2.7G) DDM
CH1610) HARDENED
2G5 SFP OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070001 WOTRB1XTAA
CWDM 1471 STM16/OC48
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.471µm
2G5 SFP OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070002 WOTRB1YTAA
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.491µm
2G5 SFP OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070003 WOTRB1ZTAA
PRELIMINARY

CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.511µm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2G5 SFP OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070004 WOTRB10TAA
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.531µm
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.551µm
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.571µm
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1.591µm
CWDM TTL--5/+75 C
1611µm
S4FCW60LC ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360003 WOTRBFKTAA
CH 600
S4FCW59LC- ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360004 WOTRBFVTAA
S4FCW55LC CH 590-CH 550 -thru- -thru-
1AB383360008 WOTRBFZTAA
S4FCW54LC- ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360009 WOTRBF0TAA
1AB383360018 WOTRBF9TAA
S4FCW44LC- ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360019 WOTRBGATAA
1AB383360026 WOTRBGHTAA
PRELIMINARY
S4FCW36LC- ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360027 WOTRBGJTAA

1AB383360031 WOTRBGNTAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S4FCW31LC ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360032 WOTRBGPTAA
CH 310
S4FCW30LC- ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360033 WOTRBGRTAA
1AB383360041 WOTRBGZTAA
S4FCW21LC- ALU SFP 4FC DWDM 1AB383360042 WOTRBG0TAA
1AB383360046 WOTRBG4TAA
Table 2-12, “1830 PSS-4 common equipment” (p. 2-126) lists the ordering information
for the 1830 PSS-4 common equipment.
Table 2-12 1830 PSS-4 common equipment

E4KIT ED PSS 4 Shelf Kit 3KC12959AA —
(E4SHF, E4EC,
E4FAN)
E4SHF ED 4 3KC12960AA WOM3100CRA
SHELF(SHELF,BP,
SHELF ID,DUST
FILTER)
E4CVR ED 4 SHELF 3KC12890AA —
COVER - All Rack
Sizes
DUJSME1 Duplex JUMPER 1AB215120060 —
S.M. LC/PC-LC/PC
1.4m ETSI
DUJSMN1 Duplex JUMPER 1AB215120061 —
S.M. LC/PC-LC/PC
1.4m NAR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-4 installation kits” (p. 2-127) lists the ordering information for the
1830 PSS-4 kits and their contents.
Table 2-13 1830 PSS-4 installation kits

E4INST19 ED 4 INSTALLATION 3KC12948AA —
KIT (19" RACK)
E4INST19E ED 4 INSTALLATION 3KC12948AD —
KIT (19" EUROPEAN
RACK)
E4INST23 ED 4 INSTALLATION 3KC12948AB —
KIT (ANSI RACK)
E4INSTET ED 4 INSTALLATION 3KC12948AC —
KIT (ETSI RACK)
Table 2-14, “1830 PSS-4 power options” (p. 2-127) lists the ordering information for the
1830 PSS-4 power items.
Table 2-14 1830 PSS-4 power options

E4PFDCAK ED 4 POWER 3KC12831AA WOPUACHMAA
FILTER (-48 VDC)
with WT-
HARDENED
E4PFDCBK ED 4 POWER 3KC12961AA —
FILTER (+24 VDC)
with WT-
HARDENED
E4PFDCBU ED 4 POWER 3KC12962AA —
FILTER (+24 VDC)
without WT-
HARDENED PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-15, “1830 PSS-4 customer-replaceable items” (p. 2-128) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-4 customer-replaceable items.
Table 2-15 1830 PSS-4 customer-replaceable items

E4EC ED 4 EQUIPMENT 3KC12828AA WOCUASPUAA
CONTROLLER
E4FAN ED 4 FAN UNIT 3KC12841AA WOCUATAUAA
HARDENED
E4AIRFLT ED 4 DUST FILTER 3KC12864AA —
Table 2-16, “1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous equipment” (p. 2-128) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous equipment.
Table 2-16 1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous equipment

E4HSFB ED 4 STATIC 3KC12952AA —
FILTER BLANK (1/2
SLOT)
E4FSFB ED 4 STATIC 3KC12953AA —
FILTER BLANK
(FULL SLOT)
E4PSFB ED 4 POWER 3KC12950AA —
FILTER BLANK
EDHSLAD Half-slot adapter 8DG59642AA —
(filter slot)
E4_SFC1A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AA WOFFAB4BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (A
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AB WOFFAB5BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (B
PRELIMINARY
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-16 1830 PSS-4 miscellaneous equipment (continued)

E4_SFC1C ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AC WOFFAB6BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (C
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1D ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AD WOFFAB7BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1E ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AE WOFFAB8BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (E
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1F ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AF WOFFAB9BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (F
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1G ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AG WOFFACABAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (G
VARIANT)
E4_SFC1H ED 4 STATIC 3KC12849AH WOFFACBBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 1 CH (H
VARIANT)
E4_SFC4A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12852AA WOFFACCBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 4 CH (A
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E4_SFC4B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12852AB WOFFACDBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 4 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFC8 ED 4 STATIC 3KC12853AA WOFFACJBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 8 CH
E4_SFC2A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12851AA WOFFACEBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (A
VARIANT)
E4_SFC2B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12851AB WOFFACFBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFC2C ED 4 STATIC 3KC12851AC WOFFACGBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (C
VARIANT)
E4_SFC2D ED 4 STATIC 3KC12851AD WOFFACHBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
CWDM 2 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFD8A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AA WOFFACKBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (A
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
E4_SFD8B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AB WOFFACLBAA

FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (B
VARIANT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E4_SFD8C ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AC WOFFACMBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (C
VARIANT)
E4_SFD8D ED 4 STATIC 3KC12854AD WOFFACNBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 8 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4A ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AA WOFFABWBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (A
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4B ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AB WOFFABXBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (B
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4C ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AC WOFFABYBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (C
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4D ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AD WOFFABZBAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (D
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4E ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AE WOFFAB0BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (E
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E4_SFD4F ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AF WOFFAB1BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (F
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4G ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AG WOFFAB2BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (G
VARIANT)
E4_SFD4H ED 4 STATIC 3KC12857AH WOFFAB3BAA
FILTER
HARDENED
DWDM 4 CH (H
VARIANT)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Technical specifications
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical specifications
Purpose
This section provides technical specifications for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
Power
This section provides the power specifications for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and its
external power options.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
A fully populated Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 will draw a maximum of 290 Watts.
Power filter input
The input voltage for power filters on the 1830 PSS-1 have the follwing specifications:
Table 2-17 Power filter input specifications
System voltage Input range

-48Vdc -40.5 to -57Vdc
-60Vdc -50 to -72Vdc
Plugin sensitivity and power

The information in the table on the following pages identifies the sensitivity and power
information for SFPs and XFPs used with the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY PRELIMINARY
Table 2-18 SFP-XFP specifications
2-134
APN Description App Code Fiber Type Launch Power Receiver Sensitivity Receiver
Overload
Min BOL Max BOL Min EOL Max EOL Min (dBm) EOL
(dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
1AB376350001 SFP S-1.1 S-1.1/IR-1 SSMF -14 -9 -15 -8 -30 -28 -8..
-40/+85 (B&W)
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(S-1.1/IR-1))
1AB376350002 SFP L-1.1 L-1.1/LR-1 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -36 -34 -10

-40/+85 (B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(L-1.1/LR-1)
1AB376350003 SFP L-1.2 L-1.2/LR-2 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -36 -34 -10
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1550nm
(L-1.2/LR-2))
1AB376360001 SFP S-4.1 S-4.1/IR-1 SSMF -14 -9 -15 -8 -30 -28 -8
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(S-4.1/IR-1))
1AB376360002 SFP L-4.1 L-4.1/LR-1 SSMF -2 +1 -3 +2 -30 -28 -8
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(L-4.1/LR-1))
1AB376360003 SFP L-4.2 L-4.2/LR-2 SSMF -2 +1 -3 +2 -30 -28 -8
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1550nm
(L-4.2/LR-2))
nop;
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-18 SFP-XFP specifications (continued)
Overload
September 2010
1AB376370001 SFP I-16.1 I-16.1/SR-1 SSMF -9 -4 -10 -3 -20 -18 -3
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(I-16.1/SR-1))

1AB376370002 SFP S-16.1 S-16.1/IR-1 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -20 -18 0
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(S-16.1/IR-1))
1AB376370003 SFP S-16.1 L-16.1/LR-1 SSMF -1 +2 -2 +3 -29 -27 -9
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
1AB376370005 SFP S-16.1 S-16.1/IR-1 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -20 -18 0
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
MultiRate
≤2.7GBPS(S-
16.1/IR-1))
1AB376370003 SFP L-16.1 L-16.1/LR-1 SSMF -1 +2 -2 +3 -29 -27 -9
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
1AB196370009 SFP L-16.2 L-16.2/LR-2 SSMF -1 +2 -2 +3 -30 -28 -9

-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
(L-16.2/LR-2))
2-135
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-136
Overload
1AB382180001 SFP 100B-LX10 MMF -19 -15 -20 -14 -33 (BER -31 (BER -14
100BASE-LX 1E-10) 1E-10)
-40/+85 -31 (BER -27 (BER

1E-12) 1E-12
1AB359780002 EL TRX SFP 1000B-T — — — — — — — —
10/100/1000BASE-T
-40/+85
1AB376720001 SFP GBE SX 1000BASE-SX MMF -8.5 -1 -9.5 0 -19 -17 0
-40/+85 (B&W
1GBE DDM
850nm
(1000BASE-
SX))
1AB376720002 SFP GBE LX 1000BASE-LX SSMF -8 -4 -9 -3 -21.5 -19.5 -3
-40/+85 (B&W
1GBE DDM
1310nm
(1000BASE-
LX))
1AB376720003 SFP GBE LX 1000BASE-ZX SSMF +1 +4 0 +5 -26 -24 0
-40/+85 (B&W
1GBE DDM
1550nm
(1000BASE-ZX)
1AB379640003 OPTO-TRX SFP 1G FC / 2G MMF -9 -1 -10 0 -17 -15 0
FC/2FC MM W/ FC SN-I
DDM (B&W
1G/2G Fibre
Channel DDM
850nm (SN-I))
nop;
September 2010

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overload
September 2010
1AB379640002 OPTO-TRX SFP 1G FC / 2G SSMF -10.7 -4 -11.7 -3 -22 -20 -3
FC/2FC SM W/ FC LC-L
DDM (B&W
1G/2G Fibre
Channel DDM
1310nm (LC-L)

1AB377160001 SFP CWDM-SH S-C8S1-1D2 SSMF +1 +4 0 +5 -20.5 -18.5 0
1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM )
1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM )

1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)

1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
PIN(<2.7G)
DDM)
2-137
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-138
Overload

1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB377200001 SFP CWDM-LH S-C8L1-1D2 SSMF +1 +4 0 +5 -30 -28 -8

1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)

1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
nop;
September 2010

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overload
September 2010
1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)

1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD(<2.7G)
DDM)
1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)

1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM
CH1610)
1AB377220003 SFP DWDM CH N/A SSMF +1 +3 0 +4 -34 with -32 with -8

60 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (196.0))
2-139
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-140
Overload

59 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.9))
58 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.8))

57 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.7))
56 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.6))
55 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.5))
54 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.4))
53 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.3))

52 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.2))
nop;
September 2010

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overload
September 2010
51 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.1))

50 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.0))
49 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.9))
48 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.8))
47 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.7))
46 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.6))
45 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.5))

44 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.4))
2-141
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-142
Overload

43 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.3))
42 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.2))

41(DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.1))
40 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.0))
39 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.9))
38 ( DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.8))
37 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.7))

36 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.6))
nop;
September 2010

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overload
September 2010
35 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.5))

34 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.4))
33 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.3))
32 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.2))
31 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.1))
30 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.0))
29 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.9))

28 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.8))
2-143
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-144
Overload

27 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.7))
26 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.6))
1AP377220038 SFP DWDM CH N/A SSMF +1 +3 0 +4 -34 with -32 with -8

25 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.5))
24 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.4))
23 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.3))
22 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.2))
21 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.1)

20 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.1)
nop;
September 2010

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overload
September 2010
19 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (191.9)

18 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (191.8)
17 (DWDM FEC FEC
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (191.7))
1AB375380002 XFP I-64.1 (SR-1) SSMF -4 -2 -6 -1 -13 -11 0.5
I-64.1/10GBE
BASE-L (B&W
Multirate 11G
(STM64/OC-
192/OTU-
2/10GBASE-LX)
DDM
1AB375380003 XFP S64.2B SSMF 0 +1.5 -1 +2 -16 -14 -1

S-64.2B/10GBE (IR-2)
BASE-E (B&W)
Multirate
11G(STM64
/OC-192/OTU-2
/10BASE-EX)
DDM
1AB375380001 XFP 10BASE-S 10GBase-SR MMF -6.3 -2 -7.2 -1 -12.1 -11 -1
(B&W)
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
2-145
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-146
Overload
1AB379240001 XFP CWDM N/A SSMF +2 +4 +1 +5 -17 or -20 -15 or -18 -1

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1471 nm
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1491 nm

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1511 nm

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1531 nm
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1551 nm
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1571 nm

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1591 nm
1AB379240008 XFP CWDM N/A SSMF +2 +4 +1 +5 -17 or -15 or -18 -1
(40 km) 10G -2019
DDM 1611 nm
1AB378370001 XFP CWDM N/A SSMF +2 +4 +1 +5 -26 -24 -8

(70km) 10G
DDM 1471nm
nop;
September 2010

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overload
September 2010
(70km) 10G
DDM 1491nm
(70km) 10G

DDM 1511nm
(70km) 10G
DDM 1531nm
(70km) 10G
DDM 1551nm
(70km) 10G
DDM 1571nm
(70km) 10G
DDM 1591nm

(70km) 10G
DDM 1611nm
2-147
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical filter insertion loss specifications
Preliminary note: Spec.s unverified
Table 2-19 SFC1 Optical Insertion Loss
SFC1 Loss Value Unit

Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch i 1.5 dB
_OUT
Insertion Loss OMD-In → 1.3 dB
EXP_OUT
Insertion Loss Exp-In → OMD-OUT 0.8 dB
Insertion Loss Ch i_In → OMD-OUT 1.0 dB

Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch i 1.8 dB
_OUT
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 1.5 dB
EXP_OUT
Insertion Loss EXP-In → OMD-OUT 0.8 dB
Insertion Loss Ch i_In → OMD-OUT 1.3 dB

Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 4/8 1.4 dB
_OUT
_OUT
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2/6 2 dB
_OUT
_OUT
PRELIMINARY
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Exp_OUT 2.2 dB

Insertion Loss Exp-In → OMD-OUT 1.7 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 4/8_In → 1.8 dB
OMD-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Technical specifications
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-21 SFC4 Optical Insertion Loss (continued)

OMD-OUT
OMD-OUT
OMD-OUT

1_OUT
8_OUT
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2/6 2 dB
_OUT
7_OUT
6_OUT
5_OUT
4_OUT
3_OUT
2_OUT
Insertion Loss Ch 1_In→ OMD-OUT 0.9 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 2_In → 1.2 dB
OMD-OUT
PRELIMINARY

OMD-OUT
OMD-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-22 SFC8 Optical Insertion Loss (continued)

OMD-OUT
OMD-OUT
OMD-OUT
OMD-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
3
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to provision a network element (NE) to get it ready to operate
in the network.
Contents
Before you begin 3-3

Procedure 3-1: Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-4
Procedure 3-2: Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-5
Procedure 3-3: XFP module extraction 3-15
Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction 3-17
Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal 3-19
Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs 3-20
Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database 3-21
Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access 3-24
Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load, and commit the 3-26
software
Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode 3-32
Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address 3-33
Procedure 3-12: Configure the OAMP Ethernet port 3-34
Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time 3-35
PRELIMINARY
Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs 3-36

Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties 3-37
Procedure 3-16: Verify system provisioning 3-38
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-17: Example configuration of ftp server 3-39

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Before you begin
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin

Before you begin
Prior to performing any procedures in this chapter, review Chapter 1, “Safety”.
Note: Any Command Line Interface (CLI) commands associated with carrying out
procedures are listed in this chapter. CLI commands are in bold type text and are
entered by the user performing the procedures; example: <CTRL>B Go back one
character on the CLI screen display.
Safety labeling
Figure 3-1 Showing compliance and safety warnings
PRELIMINARY
Label illustration pending

Figure 3-1, “Showing compliance and safety warnings” (p. 3-3) shows the Alcatel-Lucent
labeling on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 device that provides compliance and safety
warnings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-1: Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-1: Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

Procedure
(Preliminary note: physical installation details unverified/pending.) Mounting kits are
available with the hardware needed to install an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in a standard
EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. (See Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-4 installation kits”
(p. 2-127).)
Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an equipment rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the mounting location.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount bay frame brackets to unit using 3 T8 screws per side.

Note: There are two sets of threaded holes on each side of the unit. Use the holes
closest to the front for a 2 ¼” protrusion, or the rear holes for a 5” protrusion.
Front holes are also used for ESTI 300mm deep mounting.
Figure 3-2 Bay frame bracket installation
Illustration needed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using the screws provided (EAI and ANSI kits come with four 12-24 screws, ETSI
comes with four M6x1 screws), secure the unit to the desired position in the bay frame
with each screw installed loosely to allow proper positioning of the screw holes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Once all 4 screws are in place, tighten them securely.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-2: Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent
PRELIMINARY
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-2: Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-4
Powering and provisioning procedure
Complete the following steps to apply power and provision Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or Isolated
Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for IBN
applications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-4. A ground cable is
not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The ground wire should
be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2 cross section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy
YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 in. spacing.
Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground
cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8mm may damage the equipment.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-2: Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 Rear ground attachment point
Bay frame must be properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and
non-conductive coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal
must be clean and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only
thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
4 Measure resistance between the case of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and the CBN or
IBN. The resistance must be less than 1 ohm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure power supply for device is shut off at BDFB.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Connect A and B power cables to customer provided power supply cables using table
Table 3-1, “Office power connection and cable color” (p. 3-7)
Note: In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, the battery return conductor is an Isolated
DC return (DC-I).
Table 3-1 Office power connection and cable color
Office power connection Cable color

A Battery - Blue
A Return + Brown
A Ground Black (NAR)
Yellow/Green (ETSI)
B Battery - Blue
B Return + Brown
B Ground Black (NAR)
Yellow/Green (ETSI)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Test continuity of A and B power cables using Table 3-2, “Test and expected results”
(p. 3-8) for each cable.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 Power Cable
Table 3-2 Test and expected results
Test point 1 Test point 2 Expected measurement

Pin 1 Pin 3 Open circuit
Pin 3 Pin 2 Minimal closed circuit,
dependent on wire length (~1
ohm)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
8 Connect power cables to power filters. Route cables to the left to provide access to filter
ports and for air filter replacement.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-5 Power cables installed (front cover open)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 Power cables installed (front cover closed)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Turn on A and B power at BDFB and verify power connection using Table 3-3, “Power
connection test and Results” (p. 3-10).
Table 3-3 Power connection test and Results
Test Expected Results

Shut off power A at BDFB, with Power Filter A status LED extinguishes
corresponding power B turned on Power Filter B status LED remains lit
Shut off power B at BDFB, with Power Filter B status LED extinguishes
corresponding power A turned on Power Filter A status LED remains lit
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Turn off A and B power at BDFB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Insert a half-size pack adapter in the filter slot next to the Equipment Controller, if
required (consult shelf-specific, customer documentation). There are two sizes of filter
packs, full size and half size. Half-size packs require that a half-size pack adapter be
installed prior to inserting the filter pack(s). The half-size pack adapter is held in place by
the filter packs.
Figure 3-7 Half size pack adapter
PSS-4 illustration pending

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Install any required SFD/SFC2, 4, or 8 filters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Insert OTs as specified by the client.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Insert blanks in any unused slots. If no circuit pack is installed, insert the full-size blank.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Set the Shelf ID using Shelf ID selector switch on lower left of shelf. Choose from the
options in Table 3-4, “Shelf ID and Settings” (p. 3-12).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-8 Shelf ID
Table 3-4 Shelf ID and Settings
Shelf Shelf ID setting

Master 1
Peer shelf 1 2
Peer shelf 2 3
Peer shelf 3 4
Peer shelf 4 5
Peer shelf 5 6
Peer shelf 6 7
Peer shelf 7 8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Verify that the PSS-4 FAN and air filter is installed (see Procedure 4-15: “Fan and air
filter cleaning and replacement” (p. 4-30)).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Connect shelf-to-shelf LAN cables. LAN cables should be “daisy chained” from port
“LAN E2” of the master shelf to port “LAN E1” of Peer shelf1, then from Port “LAN E2”
of Peer shelf 1 to port “LAN E1” of Peer shelf 2, and so on. Cables should not enter and
exit directly to the right, as this will block removal and replacement of the air filter for
maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Insert XFPs and SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the
customer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Inspect and clean the XFP/SFP modules after insertion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports, per shelf-specific
customer documentation. Turn angled boots on each fiber toward the direction the fiber
exits the shelf.
Figure 3-9 Fibers (PSS-1 photo - PSS-4 illustration pending)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
21 Fiber slack should be coiled neatly, using the hook-and-loop fasteners included in the
installation kit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
1830 PSS-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Turn on A and B power at BDFB.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-3: XFP module extraction
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-3: XFP module extraction

Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use the hook on the end of the XFP extractor/LC connector tool to pull down the bail on
the XFP.
Figure 3-10 XFP bail (PSS-1 photo - PSS-4 illustration pending)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use hook on end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool to pull the XFP straight back until
its bail can be grasped by fingers.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-3: XFP module extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 XFP bail pull
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Grasp the bail with fingers and completely extract XFP module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction

Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Insert SFP extraction tool into SFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Gently push in bottom wedge on SFP extraction tool to release SFP retention spring.
Figure 3-12 Push in wedge (PSS-1 photo - PSS-4 illustration pending)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Pull on body of SFP extraction tool to remove SFP.

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-13 Pull out SFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove SFP from extraction tool by depressing blue locking clips on SFP extraction tool.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal

Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Grasp LC fiber connector with LC connector end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool.
Figure 3-14 LC fiber tool
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Squeeze XFP extractor/LC connector tool until blue locking tab on LC connector is
depressed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Pull on XFP extractor/LC connector tool to remove LC connector.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs

Objective
Ensure that the NE has been installed as described in the previous procedures and is ready
for initial set up.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted
correctly. Verify the fibers are properly run between packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure they are run properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If there are multiple shelves, verify that shelf ID settings and LAN cables are correctly
linked between the shelves.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the shelf is powered up and the green led is lit on both power filter modules.
Verify that the fans are running.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Fully seat all circuit packs in the shelf if they have not already been seated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database

Purpose
You can connect directly to the network element (NE) to access the web interface
(webUI). No client software is needed on your PC, only Internet Explorer.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 will ship with software and a factory image. This
procedure will provide the first steps for establishing connection to the NE using webUI
and creating an initial database.
Procedure
Note: SUN Java Runtime Environment must be installed on the PC.
Note: Popup blockers must be turned off in Internet Explorer.
Note: The network element is equipped with a DHCP server. Your LAN port must be
configured to obtain an IP address automatically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the EC of the master shelf.
Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Verify that the IP address
assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.2. See Figure 3-15, “PC command window”
(p. 3-21).
Figure 3-15 PC command window
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the CIT port in the Address bar. The
default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Go. The browser connects to the network element and the webUI login window is
displayed. See Figure 3-16, “Login Screen” (p. 3-22).
Figure 3-16 Login Screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter admin in the “User:” field and admin in the “Password:” field. Then click the
“Login” button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 A Warning message will appear similar to Figure 3-17, “WebUI uninitialized database
warning” (p. 3-22), indicating that the database is uninitialized.
Figure 3-17 WebUI uninitialized database warning

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click “OK” and the system will automatically restart after initialization.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 After the restart is complete, the system will prompt you for a new NE name as shown in
Figure 3-18, “WebUI NE name prompt” (p. 3-23). Type the NE name provided in the site
documentation.
Figure 3-18 WebUI NE name prompt
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click the “Submit” button and the system will restart once again. The restart will take
approximately 2 minutes. A window will appear showing the restart progress as shown in
Figure 3-19, “WebUI NE restart progress window” (p. 3-23).
Figure 3-19 WebUI NE restart progress window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 After restart is complete, the webUI interface will open with the system properties view.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access

Overview
After completing the database initialization using webUI, you can connect directly to the
network element to access the CLI. No client software is needed on your PC for either
application, only a Telnet application. The remaining procedures in this chapter will be
completed using CLI.
Procedure
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the CLI using the CIT port on the EC. On multi-shelf network elements, the CIT port is
active on the master shelf only. Note that this is the same connection used for the webUI
interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If not already connected, connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the EC.
Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address
of the CIT port.
• The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Hit <Enter> and the login: prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type cli at the Password: prompt and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 This starts the cli interface, and another Username: prompt will appear. Type admin and
<Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 At the Password: prompt type admin and <Enter>. This will bring up the following
warning notice.
1830 PSS-4, WAVELENGTH TRACKER

PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent
(c) 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Welcome to the CLI
Warning Notice
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This system is restricted solely to Alcatel-Lucent authorized

users for legitimate business purposes only. The actual or
attempted unauthorized access, use, or modification of this system
is strictly prohibited by Alcatel-Lucent. Unauthorized users are
subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and/or criminal and
civil penalties under state, federal, or other applicable domestic
and foreign laws. Use of this system may be monitored and
recorded for administrative and security reasons. Anyone accessing
this system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised
that if monitoring reveals possible evidence of criminal activity,
Alcatel-Lucent may provide the evidence of such activity to law
enforcement officials. All users must comply with Alcatel-Lucent
Corporate Instructions regarding the protection of Alcatel-Lucent
information assets.
Do you acknowledge? (Y/N)?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type Y and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The current alarm summary will be displayed followed by the NE# prompt. CLI
commands can now be entered. Type ? for a list of commands.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load, and commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load,

and commit the software
Purpose
The NE is shipped with software pre-loaded. However, the software version that is
pre-loaded on the cards may not be the same as the software version that will be run in the
network. You must therefore perform the following tasks to load and commit the correct
software load on the NE.
The PC connected to the NE must have an FTP server running. The first procedure is to
prepare the FTP server on the NE. Then follow the CLI procedure for software download
and activation.
FTP server preparation

Note: Refer to Procedure 3-17: “Example configuration of ftp server” (p. 3-39) for
more detailed instructions on configuring an ftp server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start the FTP server application on your PC and create a user account. Record the userid
and password established for the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Establish a root directory for the server and make sure it has read and write privileges.
You may create a folder in the root directory that will contain the NE software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Copy the folder and sub-folders with the NE software into the ftp root directory
established above.
Note: The software folder name will have the format 1830PSS4-<ver>, where <ver>
is the version of software to be loaded. There should also be two subfolders named
“1830PSS4” and “1830PSS4M”. The software will typically be provided on a CD.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PC preparation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 3-20, “Windows Firewall
settings” (p. 3-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 Windows Firewall settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Off. Then click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Note the IP address
assigned by the NE to your PC. This will be used later in the procedure. See Figure 3-15,
“PC command window” (p. 3-21).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config software server <ip> and <Enter>.

Where <ip> is the ip address of the PC with the FTP server. This is the ip address you
obtained when using the ipconfig command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config software server userid <userid> and <Enter>.

Where <userid> is the userid of the user account defined on the ftp server.
Sample output below.
Enter password:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password for user account defined on the FTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type config software server root <path> and <Enter>.

Where <path> is the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory.
Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / for the
<path>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type config software server detail and <Enter>.

Software Server Protocol : FTP

Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2
Software Server Userid : sw1
Software Server Root Directory : /
Verify the settings are correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.

PRELIMINARY
Software Upgrade Information:

Committed Release :
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working Release Directory :
Working Release : 1830PSS4-0.00-2
Active Release : 1830PSS41-0.00-2/
Operation :
Operation Status :
Upgrade Path Available : True
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):

Verify the current active software is an older release than the software that you are
loading.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> no backup and <Enter>.
Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software.
This will check the path and verify that the system is ready for upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

A listing of packs will be displayed along with the status showing which packs need to be
upgraded. Sample output below.

Software Server Root Directory : /SVT/
Committed Release :
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS4-0.00-2/
Working Release : 1830PSS4-0.00-2
Active Release : 1830PSS4-0.00-2
Operation : Audit
Operation Status : Completed
Upgrade Path Available : True
Stage=0 Step=1 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC

ACTION: Audit node Completed 100% complete
RESULT: Success
Stage=1 Step=0 SH/SL: 0/0 CARDTYPE: Empty

ACTION: Transfer to disk Planned 0% complete
PRELIMINARY
RESULT: None
Stage=2 Step=0 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC

ACTION: Activate Planned 0% complete
RESULT: None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Repeat Step 8 until the Operation Status indicates Completed. Verify the Upgrade Path
Available changes to True.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Type config software upgrade manual load and <Enter>.

This will transfer the software to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Watch for the following lines.
...
Operation : Load
Operation Status : In Progress 0%
...
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Type config software upgrade manual activate and <Enter>.

This will activate the software on the 1830 PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The NE will reboot and the Telnet connection will drop. Wait about 2 minutes after the
fan speed drops back down to normal speed and log back into the NE. Refer to Procedure
3-8: “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 3-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...
Operation : Activate
...
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
15 Type config software upgrade commit and <Enter>.

This will commit the software to be the primary release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...
Operation : Commit
.
Continue to execute the status command until the Operations Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 After the last status command is executed, verify the new software release is displayed as
the committed, working, and active release. See the sample output below.

Committed Release : 1830PSS4-1.0-0
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS4-1.0-0/
Working Release :
Active Release : 1830PSS4-1.0-0/
Operation : Commit
Operation Status : Completed
Upgrade Path Available : False
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode

Background
The network element defaults to SONET mode. You need to perform this procedure only
if you want the network element to operate in SDH mode.
Note: This procedure should only be executed when a system is first turned up.
Procedure
If you want the network element to operate in SONET mode, skip to Procedure 3-11: “Set
the loopback IP address” (p. 3-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type show version and <Enter>.

Sample output:
Software Version: 1830PSS4-1.0-0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Copy the string after “Software Version:” This will be used as the password for the SDH
mode command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type config admin mode sdh <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password copied in the previous step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The following Warning will appear.
WARNING: Changing the SONET/SDH mode will cause the database to be

cleared, the node to be cold reset and all services to be
deleted.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type yes and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 You will be logged out. The procedure is complete.

PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address

Purpose
Each network element (NE) requires a loopback address for IP connectivity. The default
loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface loop ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The following warning message will appear.
WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result

in a warm reset of this network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The CLI session will be terminated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Follow the CLI login procedure described in Procedure 3-8: “Connect to the NE for CLI
access” (p. 3-24).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-12: Configure the OAMP Ethernet port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-12: Configure the OAMP Ethernet port

Background
The OAMP port is used to connect to the Element Management System (EMS) and is the
main control interface to the NE. The signaling format is 10/100BaseT.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface ec oamp ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time

Purpose
You can set the network element (NE) date and time manually using the network
element’s internal clock.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config general date <date> and <Enter>.

Where <date> is of the format yyyy mm dd.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config general time <time> and <Enter>.

Where <time> is of the format hh mm ss,and hh is between 0 and 23.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs

Purpose
This procedure will ensure that the latest firmware is uploaded to all the installed circuit
packs. This is done by performing a cold reboot on the NE.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config admin resetNE cold and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The following Warning message will appear.
WARNING: You are about to perform a cold system restart.

This is a service affecting command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes, depending on the number of
circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties

Purpose
This procedure allows changes to system properties including temperature units and
AINS timer. The AINS timer value is system-wide and will become the default for all
ports; the value can be overridden on each individual port.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To change the AINS timer value, type config general ainstimer <hours> and <Enter>.
Where <hours> is of the format <hh> [<mm>]. You can also type config general
ainstimer help for the default value and range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The temperature unit defaults to Celsius. To change the temperature units to Fahrenheit,
type config admin tempUnits fahrenheit and <Enter>.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-16: Verify system provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-16: Verify system provisioning

Purpose
This procedure will verify that the network element (NE) is installed and turned-up
correctly and that all system provisioning is correct.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Capture all the logging of this session and save for record keeping.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type alm and <Enter>.

Verify there are no unexpected alarms on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type show software upgrade status and <Enter>.

Verify the correct version of software has been successfully committed on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type show general detail and <Enter>.

Verify system details are correct, including IP addresses, date and time, and SONET/SDH
mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type show shelf * and <Enter>.

Verify the master shelf and all sub-tending shelves are properly displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type show slot inventory * and <Enter>.

Verify all installed circuit packs are properly displayed, including packs installed in
sub-tending shelves.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type show interface topology * and <Enter>.

Verify all topological links have been provisioned correctly.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-17: Example configuration of ftp server
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-17: Example configuration of ftp server

Background
There are many different ftp server software applications available. This procedure
provides detailed configuration instructions using one of the most common platforms,
FileZilla. However, the steps can be used as a reference for configuring other ftp server
applications. Consult the documentation for your specific FTP server software for
detailed instructions.
Purpose
This procedure provides more detail to the steps listed in “FTP server preparation”
(p. 3-26).
Prerequisites
The ftp server application must be downloaded and installed on the PC. The FileZilla
server software can be downloaded from
http://filezillaproject.org/download.php?type=server.
Procedure
Disable the firewall on the PC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Off. Then click OK.

FTP server configuration using FileZilla
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Start the FileZilla server software. The Connect to Server window will open as shown in
Figure 3-21, “FileZilla connect to server window” (p. 3-40).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Stand-alone node set-up Procedure 3-17: Example configuration of ftp server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-21 FileZilla connect to server window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Leave the default settings and click “OK”. The server window will open as shown in
Figure 3-22, “FileZilla server window” (p. 3-41).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-22 FileZilla server window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select Edit -> Groups from the top menu as shown in Figure 3-23, “FileZilla groups
menu” (p. 3-42).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-23 FileZilla groups menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The Groups window will open as shown in Figure 3-24, “FileZilla groups window”
(p. 3-42).
Figure 3-24 FileZilla groups window

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 With the “General” page highlighted in the left bar, click on the “Add” button on the
right. The Add user group window will open as shown in Figure 3-25, “FileZilla add
group window” (p. 3-43).
Figure 3-25 FileZilla add group window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter a group name in the dialogue box and click the “OK” button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select the “Shared folders” page in the left bar and the Groups window will change as
shown in Figure 3-26, “FileZilla groups shared folders window” (p. 3-44).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-26 FileZilla groups shared folders window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click the “Add” button and a browse window will open as shown in Figure 3-27,
“FileZilla browse folder window” (p. 3-45).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-27 FileZilla browse folder window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software is or will be copied
to, and select it. Then click “OK”.
Note: You may wish to create a new folder for the software before performing this
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 The folder will appear in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected,
make sure the “Read” and “Write” check-boxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Click the “Set as home dir” button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Click the “OK” button to close the window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
15 Select Edit -> Users from the top menu as shown in Figure 3-28, “FileZilla users menu”
(p. 3-46).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-28 FileZilla users menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 The Users window will open as shown in Figure 3-29, “FileZilla users window” (p. 3-47).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-29 FileZilla users window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 With the “General” page highlighted, click on the “Add” button on the right. The Add
user account window will open as shown in Figure 3-30, “FileZilla add user window”
(p. 3-47).
Figure 3-30 FileZilla add user window
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Type a user account name in the top dialogue box.

Note: The account name will be the userid used in Procedure 3-9: “Configure the
software environment and load, and commit the software” (p. 3-26).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Select the group created in Step 8 from the drop down list and click “OK.”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Check the “Password” check-box and type a password in the dialogue box.
Note: This will be the password used in Procedure 3-9: “Configure the software
environment and load, and commit the software” (p. 3-26).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Select the group created in Step 8 from the “Group Membership:” drop-down list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Select the “Shared folders” page in the left bar and the Users window will change as
shown in Figure 3-31, “FileZilla users shared folders window” (p. 3-49).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-31 FileZilla users shared folders window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Click the “Add” button and a browse window will open as shown in Figure 3-32,
“FileZilla browse folder window” (p. 3-50).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-32 FileZilla browse folder window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software is or will be copied
to, and select it. Then click “OK.”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 The folder will appear in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected,
make sure the “Read” and “Write” check-boxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Click the “Set as home dir” button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Click the “OK” button to close the window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
4 4 ser Operations
U
Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter includes procedures necessary to support features in Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4
Contents
Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user interface 4-2
(WebUI) or CLI
Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning 4-4
Procedure 4-3: Software installation 4-5
Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) 4-6
Provision
Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning 4-10
Procedure 4-6: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provision 4-12
Procedure 4-7: IP route provisioning 4-18
Procedure 4-8: GCC network setup 4-19
Procedure 4-9: TCA profiles 4-20
Procedure 4-10: Provisioning for ETR operation 4-23
Procedure 4-11: Cleaning optical connectors 4-24
Procedure 4-12: Inspecting optical connectors 4-27
Procedure 4-13: Cleaning other optical components 4-28
PRELIMINARY
Procedure 4-14: ID module replacement 4-29

Procedure 4-15: Fan and air filter cleaning and replacement 4-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web
user interface (WebUI) or CLI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user

interface (WebUI) or CLI
Introduction
The web interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE). You
access the web interface using Internet Explorer running on a computer that is connected
via Ethernet to the NE, either directly or over a LAN.
Hardware requirements
• Laptop or desktop computer capable of running the required software.
• Ethernet card (10 Mb/s minimum, 10/100 Mb/s recommended).
• It is recommended that you use a monitor capable of displaying at a resolution of
1024x768 or greater.
Software requirements
• Windows XP or Windows 2000, updated to the most recent patch level.
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or Internet Explorer 7.0, updated to the most recent patch level.
• J2SE Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 5.0. The supported version for the NE
software version you are running is included on the NE software CD-ROM.
Login to the web interface

the WebUI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. Note this is the same connection used for
a CLI connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the Internet Explorer browser.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the IP address of the NE in the Address field, for example, http://123.45.6.78. The
web interface login window is displayed.
Note: The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the user name “admin” in the “Username”: field.

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the password “admin” in the “Password”: field. The characters you enter for the
password are not displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web
PRELIMINARY
user interface (WebUI) or CLI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Passwords are case sensitive. If you experience difficulty logging in, verify that
the Caps Lock key is off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on the Login button, or press the Enter key.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Connect to the NE through CLI

the CLI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. Note this is the same connection used for the
WebUI interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the FAN unit. Connect the other
end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address
of the CIT port. The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Hit <Enter> and the user: prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type cli at the password: prompt and <Enter>. This will bring up a welcome message.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 At the next User: prompt type admin and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 At the Password: prompt type admin and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 This will bring up the CLI “#” prompt. You can now enter CLI commands. Type ? for a
list of commands.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and
provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and

provisioning
PC and software requirements
Table 4-1 PC and software requirements
Item Minimum Recommended

Processor 350-MHz 500-MHz Pentium III
RAM 256 Mbyte 512 Mbyte
Disk space 120 Mbyte 120 Mbyte
Video 1024 X 768- 256 Color 1024 X 768 - 256 color
Network Interface 10/100BaseT LAN NIC with 10/100BaseT LAN NIC
RJ45 interface with RJ45 interface
CDROM Required Required
Operating System Windows 2000 Windows 2000\Windows
XP
PC Card Slot available (FMM) Required Required
Compact Flash Card with 256 MB PCMCIA Compact 512 MB PCMCIA
Adapter for ILA and TOADM. Flash Card. P.N 848922639 Compact Flash Card. P.N
848999835
Verify PC capabilities
It is anticipated that most customers will have a dedicated laptop personal computer (PC)
for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 applications software. However, a properly configured
desktop PC will suffice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The Table 4-1, “PC and software requirements” (p. 4-4) shows the PC requirements for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-3: Software installation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3: Software installation

Before you begin
Prior to performing this procedure, refer to Procedure 4-2: “Personal computer
requirements and provisioning” (p. 4-4).
Procedures for NE software installation

Initial software installation is covered in the applicable Release Notes for this product.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Initial software is always downloaded locally. Software is loaded onto a PC and then into
the network element. Remote downloads for first time installations are not possible.
Note: The Comcodes for release of software to be installed will be available on the
customer order.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
Protection (E-SNCP) Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection

(E-SNCP) Provision
Overview
The 11DPE12 can have up to 100 Virtual Time Slots (VTS)s for each line port. Ethernet
Virtual Private Line (EVPL) services are transported over the 10G line structure with 100
designated VTSs. However, only VTS 1-32 can used for ESNCP.
It also provides 1+1 dedicated, sub-50ms, ESNCP protection for EVPL services by using
out-of-band channel for status and protection signaling. Automatic Protection Switching
(APS) channel communication is established by using APS/PCC channel in ODU2
overhead of 10G line port, thus not reducing client signal bandwidth.
Each 4DPA4 OTU1 is divided into 16 proprietary Virtual Time Slots (VTS)s. Services are
transported over the 2.7Gb line structure with the designated VTSs depending on the
bandwidth requirement of the service.
It also provides 1+1 dedicated, sub-50ms, ESNCP protection for services by using
out-of-band channel for status and protection signaling. Automatic Protection Switching
(APS) channel communication is established by using APS/PCC channel in ODU1
overhead of line port, thus not reducing client signal bandwidth.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 also supports provisioning of GbE protection switching
modes: e.g. unidirectional switching, revertive/non-revertive switching.
Unidirectional Switching:
A switching mode in which the selection decision for the service path is made
independently of the Far-End node's switch state. The APS channel is not used to
coordinate switching activity between the nodes.
Bidirectional Switching:
A switching mode in which a channel is switched to the protection path in both directions.
Switching of only one direction is not allowed. Head-end to tail-end signaling is
accomplished using the APS channel.
Non-Revertive mode:
A switching mode in which a switch of service to the protection entity is maintained even
after the working entity has recovered from the failure or the manual command to
protection that caused the switch is cleared.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Revertive switching mode:
In revertive switching, the traffic is automatically switched back to the working line when
the working line has recovered from the failure or the user command is cleared. In the
failure-recovery case, the switch back to working is delayed until working has been
continuously good for the number of minutes specified by the wait-to-restore (WTR)
parameter. In the case of clearing a user switch command, there is no delay.
Both revertive and non-revertive switching can be used in unidirectional protection
groups. Both revertive and non-revertive switching can be used in bidirectional protection
groups.
Procedure overview
The following procedure steps outline high-level tasks. For the latest detailed information
about CLI options and parameters, see the “config aps group” in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Commands Guide (Volume II).
Use the latest version of the Web Interface to display the most current WebUI. In the
WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Create an APS Group

Procedure to create a new APS group, the following attributes need to be specified via
CLI or Web Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For the 11DPE12, provision the EVPL connection for the GE port and working port VTS,
and provision the protected port VTS /svlan id map. see details in Procedure 4-6:
“Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provision” (p. 4-12).
Note: The working port VTS and protected port VTS can only be in the range, 1-32.
The SVLAN ID for protection port VTS and working port VTS should be same.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Group ID: An integer identifier for the APS group (not needed via WebUI, WebUI will
automatically assign a group ID)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 GE Port no.: C1-C12 client GE ports on 11DPE12

For 11DPE12: GE Port VTSno.: The VTS No. (1-10) on C1-C12 client ports for q inq
mode.
PRELIMINARY
Port no.: C1-C4 client ports on 4DPA4 and 11QPA4

Note: For 11DPE12 Q-in-Q mode, ESNCP can be cross-pack. In a cross-pack
application, the slots related to the GBE port, working port, and protected port should
be different.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For 11DPE12: Protection port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-10) on L1,L2 line ports
For 11DPE12: Protection port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-32) on L1,L2 line ports for Q-in-Q
mode
For 4DPA4: Protection port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-4) on L1,L2 line ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 For 11DPE12: Working port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-10) on L1, L2 line ports
For 11DPE12: Working port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-32) on L1, L2 line ports for Q-in-Q
mode
For 4DPA4: Working port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-4) on L1, L2 line ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Uni/bidirectional switching
Note: If using Release 1 only unidirectional is supported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Edit an APS Group

The user can edit the following attributes of an APS group:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The description string for the APS group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The direction mode for the APS group.

Note: Release 1 supports unidirectional only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The reversion mode for the APS group: revertive or non-revertive switching.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Initialize/Clear an external switch request

PRELIMINARY
The user can initialize or clear an external request on an APS group. External switch
requests are the received commands from a user interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The following options are provided by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4:

• Lockout
• Forced Switch
• Manual Switch
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning

Overview
The 11DPE12 contains a Dual port pluggable module, which houses 12 GbE Client ports
and 2 10G line ports. Client ports must be manually provisioned as either FE or GBE.
Line ports must be manually provisioned as either OTU2 or 10GBE LAN.
The 4DPA4 contains dual OTs. Each OT houses 4 multiservice client ports and 2 OTU-1
line ports.
Client ports remain in unassigned state until user command to create specific client port
type is issued. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 needs to manage virtual circuits between
client ports and any of the virtual time slots (VTS) on the two line ports. In addition,
VTSs received on one line port could be passed through to the other line port.
The user can provision the following port attributes:
• Specify a name and description for the port.
• Set the loopback mode
• Set the performance monitoring, specifying the connected SFC ports. For channel
parameter, this can be provisioned via Optical connection (config xc) and will be
reflected in show interface line port detail report.
• Set the administrative state
• Set the port attributes including the client port to virtual time slot mapping (VTS)
• Set the 10 Gb Ethernet attributes
• Set the line port to virtual time slot mapping (VTS)
• Set the OTU1/ODU1 or OTU2/ODU2 attributes, depending upon the card application.
• For an EVPL connection that is unidirectional: The user must set up the EVPL
connection from the Client to the line VTS (add), between line VTS (if there is a
through node) and line VTS to client (drop) in one direction, and provision EVPL in
the other direction using the same procedure.
• Set the VTS through mapping between two line ports.
• Set the optical connection by specifying the port to which the OTU1 or OTU2 port is
optically connected.
To create a protected service, the port-to-VTS mapping is provisioned via APS group
settings. Refer to the procedures in Procedure 4-4: “Electrical Sub-Network Connection
Protection (E-SNCP) Provision” (p. 4-6).
PRELIMINARY
Procedure overview
The following procedure steps outline high-level tasks. For the latest detailed information
about CLI options and parameters, see the “config interface” information in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Commands Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the latest version of the Web Interface to display the most current WebUI. In the
WebUI equipment tree, select the port.
Procedure
The following procedure will set up an unprotected service, using the CLI or Web
Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Specify the module types (the module type by default is AUTO), and insert the SFP/XFP
modules into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Line Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Specify the module types (the module type by default is AUTO), and insert the SFP
modules into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 client Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Configure Line OTU1 or OTU2 attributes by specifying the connected SFC ports and
GCC status, or configure the Line 10GBE LAN attributes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Configure the Line port-to-VTS mapping (both: ingress and egress). For example:
config interface 11DPE12 1/7/L1 vts 4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the administrative state of the line interface to Up.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Configure the attributes of the client port:

• Auto negotiation attributes
• Losprop attributes
• AINS timer attributes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Configure the Client port-to-VTS Mapping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Set the administrative state of client port to Up.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-6: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provision

Overview
The 11DPE12 supports the transport of both full-rate and sub-rate GbE service. It can be
provisioned with one of three operational modes: full-rate mode, sub-rate mode, and
Q-in-Q mode, which can support GBE service and sub-GBE service transport.
The following table lists the difference of the EVPL attributes between the three pack
modes:
Attribute Full-rate Sub-rate Q-in-Q

Client Port bandwidth 1 Gb/s 100 Mb/s – 1 Gb/s 50 Mb/s – 1 Gb/s
(fixed) (user-provisionable) (user-provisionable)
Number of 1 1-10 1-10

bidirectional EVPL
service within Client
Port
Number of 1-10 1-32 1-100 (1-32 can
bidirectional EVPL support ESNCP)
service within Line
Port
EVPL Direction Unidirectional & Bidirectional Unidirectional &
Bidirectional Bidirectional
Full-rate EVPL connection

The following procedure will set up an unprotected full-rate GbE service, using the CLI
or Web Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the 11DPE12 operational mode to full-rate.

In the WEB-UI, Select the 11DPE12 card from the equipment tree and select the
Provision/Info function. Then provision the operational mode parameter. (CLI command:
configure card 11DPE12 1/7 mode fullrate)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
2 Assign and provision the client port and the line port, see details in Procedure 4-5: “Port
Provisioning” (p. 4-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Configure the EVPL connection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-6: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
PRELIMINARY
Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WEB-UI, Select Connections >Cross-Connects >EVPL. The EVPL connection
screen is displayed. Then click the Create button to provision the EVPL.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Provision the add/drop type EVPL connection between the client port and the line Port,
by specifying the source (A-end) port and destination (Z-end) port.
For ADD type unidirectional EVPL, A-end port is the client port and Z-end port is line
port. For DROP type unidirectional EVPL, A-end port is line port and Z-end port is client
port.
Enter the VTS number (1 – 10) for the Line Port, and leave the VTS field blank for client
port. For a bidirectional service, check the box of 2nd connection in reverse direction.
CLI commands:
ADD-type EVPL from client port 8 to line port 1 vts 8: config
interface 11dpe12 1/7/L1 otu2 vts8 c8
Drop-Type EVPL Line VTS 8 to Client Port 8: config interface
11dpe12 1/7/c8 1gbe timeslot line 8 vts 8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To provision the pass-through type EVPL connection between two line ports, the user
needs to specify the line port and VTS number in both A-end and Z-end fields. For a
bidirectional service, check the box of 2nd connection in reverse direction.
CLI commands to create a bidirectional service between two line ports ninth:
config interface 11dpe12 1/7/L1 otu2 vts9 l2vts9
config interface 11dpe12 1/7/L2 otu2 vts9 l1vts9
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Sub-rate EVPL connection

The following procedure will set up an unprotected sub-rate GbE service, using the CLI
or Web Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Specify the 11DPE12 operational mode to be sub-rate.

In the WEB-UI, select the 11DPE12 card from the equipment tree and select the
PRELIMINARY
Provision/Info function. Then provision the operational mode parameter.

(CLI command: configure card 11DPE12 1/7 mode sub-rate)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the vlan id map for client port.

In the WEB-UI, select the 11DPE12 client port from the equipment tree and select the
Provision/Info>virtual timeslot map function. In the virtual timeslot map screen, assign
the vlan id to each client vts (1-10).
CLI command to assign the service flow with vlan id of 7 within the client port C1 to the
VTS 2:
config interface 11dpe12 1/7/C1 vts2 cevlanid 7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a bidirectional service, the client port can provisioned either as a A-end port or a
Z-end port. Enter the VTS number (1 – 32) for Line Port, and VTS number (1-10) for
client port. The connection name, connection state and bandwidth profile also must be
specified.
CLI command to configure EVPL between client port 8 vts8 and Line port 1 vts 8 with
CIR/EIR 500 Mb/s/1000Mb/s profile:
config vtsxc 11dpe12 1/7/C1/8 1/7/L1/8 create “evc#8” profile
CIR 500 EIR 1000
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Provision the pass-through type EVPL connection between two line ports by specifying
the line port and VTS number in both A-end and Z-end fields in the WEB-UI. The
connection name, connection state and bandwidth profile must also be specified.
CLI command to configure EVPL between Line port 1 vts8 and Line port 2 vts 8 with
PRELIMINARY

config vtsxc 11dpe12 1/7/C1/8 1/7/L1/8 create “evc#8” profile
CIR 500 EIR 1000
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q-in-Q EVPL connection
The following procedure will set up an unprotected sub-rate GbE service, using the CLI
or Web Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Specify the 11DPE12 pack operational mode to be QINQ.

In the WEB-UI, select the 11DPE12 card from the equipment tree and select the
Provision/Info function. Then provision the operational mode parameter.
CLI command: configure card 11DPE12 1/7 mode QINQ
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the vlan id map for client port.

In the WEB-UI, select the 11DPE12 client port from the equipment tree and select the
the vlan id to each client vts (1-10) for both ingress and egress directions.
VTS 2 ingress:
config interface 11DPE12 1/7/C1 vts2 cevlanid 7 ingress
VTS 2 egress:
config interface 11DPE12 1/7/C1 vts2 cevlanid 8 egress
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Provision the svlan id map for line port.

In the WEB-UI, select the 11DPE12 line port from the equipment tree and select the
the vlan id to each line vts (1-100) for ingress directional and egress directional.
CLI command to assign the service flow with svlan id of 10 within the line port L1 to the
VTS 2 ingress:
config interface 11DPE12 1/7/L1 vts2 svlanid 10 ingress
PRELIMINARY
CLI command to assign the service flow with svlan id of 8 within the line port L1 to the
VTS 2 egress:
config interface 11DPE12 1/7/L1 vts2 svlanid 8 egress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a bidirectional service, two unidirectional VTSXC should be configured because
VTSXC is unidirectional. For the add service the client port can provisioned as a A-end
port , and line port can provisioned as a Z-end port. For the drop service the client port
can provisioned as a Z-end port , and line port can provisioned as a A-end port. Enter the
VTS number (1 – 100) for Line Port, and VTS number (1-10) for client port. The
connection name, connection state and bandwidth profile also must be specified.
CLI commands to configure bidirectional service between client port 8 vts8 and Line port
1 vts 8 with CIR/EIR 50 Mb/s/1000Mb/s profile:
Add VTSXC :config vtsxc 11DPE12 1/7/C1/8 1/7/L1/8 create “evc#8”
profile CIR 50 EIR 1000
Drop VTSXC :config vtsxc 11DPE12 1/7/L1/8 1/7/C1/8 create
“evc#8” profile CIR 50 EIR 1000
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Provision the pass-through type EVPL connection between two line ports by specifying
the line port and VTS number in both A-end and Z-end fields in the WEB-UI. The
connection name, connection state and bandwidth profile must also be specified.
CLI command to configure EVPL between Line port 1 vts8 and Line port 2 vts 8 with
config vtsxc 11DPE12 1/7/C1/8 1/7/L1/8 create “evc#8” profile
CIR 500 EIR 1000
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Provision the cross-pack pass-through type EVPL connection between two line ports by
specifying the line port and VTS number in both A-end and Z-end fields in the WEB-UI.
For a bidirectional service, two unidirectional VTSXC should be configured because
VTSXC is unidirectional. Enter the VTS number (1 – 100) for Line Port. The SVLAN ID
PRELIMINARY
should be same for the two connecting VTS. The connection name, connection state, and
bandwidth profile must also be specified.
CLI commands to configure EVPL between Line port 1 vts8 and Line port 2 vts 8 with
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
config vtsxc 11DPE12 1/7/L1/8 1/7/L2/8 create “evc#8” profile
CIR 500 EIR 1000
config vtsxc 11DPE12 1/7/L2/8 1/7/L1/8 create “evc#8” profile
CIR 500 EIR 1000
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-7: IP route provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-7: IP route provisioning

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 supports OSPF routing, and the establishment of static routes.
A default route can also be configured for use when no other OSPF or static route can be
associated with a specific destination IP address.
Procedures
The following procedure adds a default route, a static route and an OSPF area to the
network element. A maximum of 3 OSPF areas may be created at the system level in
addition to the default backbone area (0.0.0.0). Once an OSPF area is configured at the
system level, it may be assigned to a particular DC interface (1830PSS-4 GCC0 or
1830PSS-4 LAN1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Add a default route using the command: config cn routes default add gateway [metric]
[redist | nonredist].
For example, the following command will send IP traffic by default to 10.1.1.2, for
further routing when no other route to the IP address of the destination of the traffic is
known. It also assigns a metric of 100 to this route, and establishes that the default route
will not be distributed to other routing tables.
config cn routes default add 10.1.1.2 100 nonredist
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add a static route to the local routing table using the command: config cn routes static
add destination_IP_address/subnet_mask gateway [metric] [redist|nonredist].
For example, the following command will send IP traffic with a destination address of
10/1/20/13 to 10.1.20.4 for further routing to its destination. Only a single destination
address is specified, by virtue of the /32 netmask. The route is given a metric of 100 and
will not be distributed to other routing tables.
config cn routes static add 10.1.20.13/32 10.1.20.4 100 nonredist
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Add an OSPF area to the network element using the command: config cn ospf area add
area_id [type nonstub | stub].
PRELIMINARY
For example, the following command will add an OSPF area at 0.0.0.7, which is a stub
area.
config cn ospf add area 0.0.0.7 type stub
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-8: GCC network setup
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-8: GCC network setup

Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify GNE node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Provision loopback address for all nodes in the network using the config interface
loopback command, as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command
Line Interface Commands Guide (Volume I).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enable GCC status for all nodes in the network using the config interface {11dpe12,
4DPA4} shelf/slot/{L1, L2} otu2 command, as detailed in the config interface 11dpe12
information in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface
Commands Guide (Volume II).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 At GNE nodes: Connect LAN cable to OAMP port (LAN1). Provision OAMP IP, admin
state and enable OSPF routing (routestate) using the config interface fan lan1 command
as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface
Commands Guide (Volume I).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure the default route and set the distribution mode to redistribution using the config
cn route default add command, as detailed in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0
Command Line Interface Commands Guide (Volume I).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: TCA profiles
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-9: TCA profiles

Purpose
As the PM data is collected, the attribute counters in the active bin get incremented or
updated each time an event, such as an errored second, occurs. If desired, it is possible to
configure and assign a profile to an interval to monitor the value of each attribute in the
active bin and raise a log event when a certain threshold level is reached. When a
specified threshold is crossed a log event is raised. You can configure each PM group
with up to eight profiles, all having different threshold levels. The NE provides the ability
to modify all TCA profiles.
The threshold levels you define in the profiles depend on two factors:
• the interval length. For example, if you were gathering statistics for an interface over
15 minute and 24 hour intervals you would need to define two profiles, one that
defines the threshold values for the 15 minute interval and one that defines thresholds
for the 24 hour interval.
• the service level of the traffic using the interface.
There are 9 instances of each profile type supported. Profile instance 0 is used to disable
TCAs for the group. Profiles with index 7 contain factory default data with 15-min
defaults preloaded while profile with index 8 contains 1-day defaults preloaded.
Instances 1-6 are initialized with all 0 values and can be customized by user. The system
supports the following TCA profile types:
• OC_N (SONET port section monitoring)
• STM_N (SDH port section monitoring)
• DW (OTU2 and ODU2 layer PM parameters)
• ETH (Ethernet group)
• INF (Interface group)
• PCS (PCS layer monitoring for Ethernet/FC ports)
• CP (Equipment PM parameters, applicable to EC)
• OPR (Optical Power Received on OT and OSC ports)
• OPT (Optical Power Transmitted on OT and OSC ports)
Testing for threshold crossings (TCAs)

If the system is working under ANSI mode, A TCA transient event is raised as soon as the
PRELIMINARY
raise threshold crossing is detected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: TCA profiles
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the system is working under ETSI mode:
• For the 15 minute counters — A TCA standing event (alarm) is raised as soon as the
raise threshold crossing is detected during the measurement period. And the TCA
standing event (alarm) is cleared at the end of a measurement period if the clear
threshold value (RTR) will be not crossed.
• For the 24 hours counters — A TCA standing event (alarm) is raised as soon as the
raise threshold crossing is detected during the measurement period. And the TCA
standing event (alarm) is cleared at the end of same measurement period.
Determining which interfaces and cards to configure to collect PM data

The cards and interfaces on the network element determine the PM groups for which you
need to create profiles. Card-level statistics are gathered by the Card (CP in TL1) PM
group.
Note: It is recommended that you create a document that lists the shelf, slot, and port
of all of the interfaces on the NE that you need configure, along with the PM group,
or groups, that apply to each interface.
Viewing performance monitoring data

Performance monitoring data is recorded in logs or in bins. The logs record all of the
threshold crossing events that occurred on the network element. The bins hold data
gathered on a specific card or interface over a specific interval. In addition to the interval
bins, there is a raw bin for each PM group that continues to gather data until cleared.
Configuring performance monitoring

The major steps in high-level performance monitoring configuration are as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the interfaces you need to configure to collect performance monitoring data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Configure the profiles to define the threshold levels at which log events are generated for
the PM groups you will be monitoring on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Configure each of the interfaces on the network element for which you will be collecting
performance monitoring statistics. You need to define which PM statistics are gathered,
the interval period over which they are gathered, and the profile used for each interval
PRELIMINARY
period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: TCA profiles
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the latest detailed information about CLI options and parameters, see the information
in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Commands Guide
(Volume II).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-10: Provisioning for ETR operation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-10: Provisioning for ETR operation

Overview
PSS-4 units that are capable of supporting ETR operation and must be completely
equipped with cards and plugins that support ETR operation. Operation of non-ETR
capable cards or plugins in an ETR environment can result in hardware damage.
ETR provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the ETR status of all hardware by using the "show card inventory" command. If
"ETR" characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field for all components,
the hardware is ETR qualified. If it is missing from any component, the unit should not be
used in an ETR environment.
Note: The 4DPA4 does not have ETR bytes programmed, but is a hardened card. So,
software will not raise an ETR mismatch alarm for this card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use "show general detail" to view the ETR capability status of the PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the unit is qualified for ETR operation, and will be used in an ETR environment, use
config general etr enabled to configure the unit for ETR operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the unit is not qualified for ETR operation, or will not be used in an ETR environment,
use config general etr disabled to configure the unit for non-ETR operation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-11: Cleaning optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-11: Cleaning optical connectors

Materials and tools
For proper cleaning, the equipment and materials in the following table are
recommended:
Table 4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors
Product Model Comcode ITE # Installation

Order #
Optical Fiber Noyes OFS 408463636 ITE-7129 33712900
Scope 300-200X
2.5-mm For use with the 408197044 ITE-7129D1 33712901
Universal Noyes OFS
Adapter Cap 300-200X
1.25-mm For use with the 408197069 ITE-7129D2 33712902
Universal Noyes OFS
Adapter Cap 300-200X
Video Fiber Noyes VFS- 408356830 ITE-7146 4171600
Scope*
1.25-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356848 ITE-7146D1 33714601
2.5-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356855 ITE-7146D2 33714602
FC Adapter For VFS-1 408356863 ITE-7146D3 33714603
LC Adapter For VFS-1 408356889 ITE-7146D4 33714604
SC Adapter For VFS-1 408356954 ITE-7146D5 33714605
ST Adapter For VFS-1 408356962 ITE-7146D6 33714606
Individual 99% Pure 901375147 ITE-7136 33713600
Pre-Saturated Isopropyl Alcohol
Alcohol Wipes
CLETOP Type A Reel 901375154 ITE-7137 33713700
Cleaning Cassette
CLETOP Type A Reel 901375014 ITE-7137 D1 33713701
Cleaning Cassette
Replacement
Reel
PRELIMINARY
Luminex Stick 1.25 mm 901375030 ITE-7134 33713400

Port Cleaners
Luminex Stick 2.5 mm 901375022 ITE-7135 33713500
Port Cleaners
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-11: Cleaning optical connectors
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors (continued)
Luminex Cloth 5.5” x 5.5” 408201226 R6033 23603300
Note: The equipment and material previously listed has been tested and is proven
effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or
materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent.
Fiber cleaning considerations

Observe the following precautions when handling fibers to prevent contaminates from
adhering to the fibers and creating potential errors and unnecessary losses:
• Assume that all fibers are dirty and must be inspected and cleaned before connection
to equipment.
• Always inspect fibers for contaminants and clean where required.
• Do not remove the protective end caps on fibers or fiber ports until ready to connect.
• If it is suspected that a fiber or port was contaminated during test or turn up
procedures, reinspect and clean as necessary.
Cleaning process
The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule exposing the connector end-face.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open an individual foil packet of a pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe.
Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular to the
alcohol wipe.
Drag it against the wipe three (3) times in a figure eight pattern. This action applies the
alcohol solvent to the end-face and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid
contaminates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 7. Otherwise, hold the
CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing
up.
PRELIMINARY
Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The
lever advances the “dry” Luminex cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously
opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning
the connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-11: Cleaning optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Insert and press the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in
the first of two slots of the cleaner.
Drag it down in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner. Do not release the
lever of the cassette.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the wiping
procedure using the second slot. Be sure the ferrule is pressed snug against the cleaning
cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position.
Continue with Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Wrap a Luminex cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing,
cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule.
Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule end-face
and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the
ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the Luminex cleaning
cloth is not available, a lint-free clean room optic wipe can be used. The Luminex
cleaning cloth is washable and can be used multiple times. The optic wipes are single use
and disposable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-12: Inspecting optical connectors
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-12: Inspecting optical connectors

Connector inspection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the
ferrule end-face of the fiber under inspection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The visual area of the ferrule end-face (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection
system/scope should be free of any contaminates. Repeat the Cleaning Procedure if the
fiber end-face does not meet the following requirements:
Requirement:
No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same location after three
wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the restricted area of the glass
fiber end-face.
Note: The restricted area is defined as ~66 micron (µ) diameter for both single mode
and multi-mode fibers.
Requirement:
No chips, cracks or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber end-face.
Requirement:
No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and ceramic ferrule
end-face.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it should be immediately inserted into
the adapter build-out of the optical component. This will assure maximum cleanliness and
effectiveness of the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the cleaned connector can not be “connectorized” with a corresponding adapter, the
connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on
the ferrule, make sure the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP
stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 or 1.25 mm) and
rotate the stick 360 degrees three (3) times. Following this procedure, carefully place the
cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be
PRELIMINARY
reinspected for cleanliness prior to connectorization.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-13: Cleaning other optical components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-13: Cleaning other optical components

Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors
During testing and/or troubleshooting activities, it may be necessary to clean the optical
build-out adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors,
1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the
alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while
inserting. Push/rotate the stick until the stick cleaner makes contact with the connector.
Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate the stick 360 degrees at least three (3)
times.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the stick cleaner, rotating it upon removal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat the above cleaning
procedure. This procedure will clean the side walls of the adapter and the end-face of the
circuit pack connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into
view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat the process in Steps 1 - 3 if the fiber does not
meet the requirements specified in Procedure 4-12: “Inspecting optical connectors”
(p. 4-27)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-14: ID module replacement
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-14: ID module replacement

Overview
Unlike the user panel for the 1830 PSS32, the 1830 PSS-4 ID module can only be
replaced when the unit is powered down. The 1830 PSS-4 ID module has an EPROM that
contains the serial number and information to retain remote access capability in the event
of a database loss, similar to a user panel in the 1830 PSS-32.
ID module replacement procedure

Note: When restarting after replacement of an ID module on an NE that has been
powered down, the new ID module will cause the NE to appear as though it has never
been commissioned. In order to preserved traffic, during the restart the NE's database
should NOT be initialized. Instead, a previously backed up database should be
restored to the NE after the restart.
You should use the following procedure to replace an ID module on an 1830 PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Re-provision the NE Name for the NE. This can be done during the initial connection to
the NE with the WebUI, or using the CLI command: config general name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-provision the loopback IP address for the NE, using the CLI command:
config interface loopback ip.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 On an 1830 PSS, re-provision the user panel OAMP port IP address for this NE, using the
CLI command: config interface ec shelf/slot/oamp ip.
Physically replace the 1830PSS-1 FAN (integrated Fan/User Panel).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-provision the static routing (gateway) information for this NE, using the CLI
command: config cn routes static add.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Tto bring the database from a remote server to the NE, enter the CLI command:
config database restore force.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-15: Fan and air filter cleaning and replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-15: Fan and air filter cleaning and replacement

FAN installation and replacement
PSS-4 procedure pending
Air filter maintenance intervals

Air filters on PSS-4 units should be replaced at 3 month intervals or sooner if necessary.
NOTICE
Potential equipment damage
Before installing or removing the filter, check that the protective adhesive film has been
removed.
Fan filter cleaning and replacement procedure
CAUTION
Possibility of personal injury.
Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades.
Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.
Air filters on PSS-1 units should be replaced at 3 month intervals or sooner if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Completely loosen the air filter retaining screw.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Grasp the removal tab and pull the air filter straight out of the PSS-4 unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Align the new or recently cleaned air filter with the opening in the PSS-1 unit, and slide it
straight into the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Completely tighten the air filter retaining screw, but do not overtighten.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
5
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides information on security administration procedures for the 1830 PSS
system. The security functions determine NE access, command execution, and
administrative control for the 1830 PSS.
Contents
User accounts and privileges 5-2

Configuring user accounts 5-6
Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts 5-10
Login sessions 5-13
System security features 5-15
Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure 5-20
Authentication 5-21
Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures 5-25
Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures 5-27
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration User accounts and privileges
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User accounts and privileges

The purpose of security administration is to manage user accounts (logins, passwords,
authorization levels, external links) and to monitor system security so that only valid
users can perform permitted actions and receive authorized information from the system.
The NE provides the ability to create, modify, delete, and view user profiles and
associated security levels. Each level has distinct privileges for accessing and executing
the commands and performing administrative functions on the NE. The description of
each function or command is listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide and/or 1830 PSS-32 TL1 Command
Guide including the user levels that are able to access and execute each specific command
(see “System access control” (p. 5-18)).
The system does not provide an “unsecure” user external port. To gain access to an NE
you need a user account with login and password. The user account name, privilege level
and password is created and defined by the Admin user, and is unique for each network
element in the network.
Important! The 1830 PSS is delivered with two default users as part of the factory
software load: one Admin user (with administration privilege) and one Service user
(with service privilege).
The login ID and passwords are:
• For Admin user: admin/admin
• For Service user: service/AlcaLu-1830!
Note: The administration of all security functions is only accessible to Admin and
Service users (i.e. the system will only allow access to these security functions to
users with appropriate security administration privileges). The Service user is not
capable of creating/deleting/managing user profiles. The NE does not allow deletion
of the default users.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration User accounts and privileges
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user levels, the privileges assigned to each level, and their intended use are
summarized in Table 5-1, “User privilege levels” (p. 5-3).
Table 5-1 User privilege levels
Level Privileges and use

Observer Observer level restrictions and privileges are as follows:
• An Observer user cannot initialize the database during NE
configuration.
• An Observer user cannot access any Administrative functions.
This includes configuring: database backup/restore, date/time,
IP routes and OSPF areas, NTP, Users, SNMP, software
upgrade, Syslog, user activity logging.
• An Observer can view and modify user preferences.
• An Observer can change his own password.
• An Observer user can view alarms and conditions, but cannot
access the functions under the Fault and Test/Analysis buttons.
These include: alarm configuration, test LED, and loopback.
• An Observer user cannot select Alarm Cutoff on the alarm
display.
• For Connections:
– An Observer user can view all cross-connects and details,
but cannot create, modify or delete cross-connects.
– An Observer user can view the NE Physical Topology, but
cannot create or delete a connection
– An Observer can view the NE Logical Topology with no
restrictions
• The Observer user cannot create, modify or delete any
equipment-related items or perform any action on the NE that
will change its status. If an Observer user tries to submit such
a request, the WebUI will display a message indicating that the
user does not have permission to perform the function.
• There are no restrictions for the Report menu items.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration User accounts and privileges
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1 User privilege levels (continued)

Provisioner The Provisioner has all the “Observer” privileges plus the
following:
• configure IO cards, ports, interfaces and circuits
• run test procedures on any cards that do not contribute to
system-wide outage (e.g. COLD boot of all packs)
This user cannot provision system-wide security access, (e.g. user
profile, add or delete user account), cannot perform a system
reboot, cannot perform a card-level cold reboot, and cannot
modify OPSA A and B port switching attributes. A Provisioner
user cannot access any Administrative functions. This includes
configuring: database backup/restore, date/time, IP routes and
OSPF areas, NTP, Users, SNMP, software upgrade, Syslog, user
activity logging.
A Provisioner can view and modify user preferences. A
Provisioner can change his own password.
Admin The Admin user is the administrator for the NE. The Admin has all
the “Provisioner” privileges and can also do the following:
• add users to the NE
• delete users from the NE, except Service user
• edit the security and privilege information of any user, except
Service user
• retrieve security information about users (not password)
• change the password of other users, including other Admin
users, without entering the old password (cannot change
password of Service user)
• logoff a particular user (including a user with administration
privileges and users who are logged with DEBUG, WebUI and
CLI sessions)
• obtain user info about the users currently logged on to the NE
(including users who are logged with DEBUG, WebUI and
CLI sessions)
• inhibit and allow all users, including Service user
• set system-wide user security attributes
• retrieve security information about authenticated (logged on)
and unauthenticated (not logged on) sessions
PRELIMINARY
• execute software download and database backup and restore

commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration User accounts and privileges
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1 User privilege levels (continued)

Service This is the highest level, and is meant for Alcatel-Lucent
technicians. This user has all the “Admin” privilege (except the
ability to create/delete/manage user profiles), plus the ability to
utilize the debugging and software development tools. The
following applies:
• a maximum of one Service user per NE, created by default, as
part of the SW load. (There is no mechanism to create another
Service user profile or to delete the Service user profile). Only
the Service user can change his/her password
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Configuring user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring user accounts

Introduction
Login security controls access to the NE(s) by individual users. Client Authentication for
logging in and auditing on each NE requires a user ID (UID) and a complex password.
Security administration enables the system to deny a user access to the NE. The NE
authenticates the user ID against the NE's local security database. Based on this, the NE
either accepts or denies login access to the NE. Access may be denied during one of the
following points in time:
• When the user first attempts to log in and the login attempt is denied.
• During an active session and the user is disconnected by the NE.
After the user logs into an NE with a valid user ID and Password, user functions can be
performed based on the assigned User Access Privilege (UAP).
User identification and user password definition

Userids and passwords can contain the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters in the set [a–z, A–Z]
• Numeric characters in the set [0–9]
• Special characters % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (underscore).
User identifier (UID)
User identity is specified using a UID that is a unique identifier used by an NE for
security management. A UID code is a non-confidential, unique, and auditable
representation of a user such as the login name. The NE supports UIDs that are strings of
5 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters where the first character is alphabetic.
The following conditions apply to UIDs:
• Each authorized user (a person, device or a software process having operations related
command inputs access) must have a UID. Each UID must be unique on the NE (i.e.
the system does not support 2 UIDs that are the same).
• At any given instant in time, the NE internally maintains the identity of all UIDs
logged on at that time.
• The NE supports a maximum of 255 unique UIDs.
Password identifier (PID)
A PID is a case sensitive string of 6 to 24 alphabetic [a-z, A-Z], numeric [0-9], or special
PRELIMINARY
characters. A valid password must contain at least 1 alphabetic, 1 numeric, and 1 special
character. The following special characters are accepted as valid: % (percent sign), + (plus
sign), # (pound sign), and _ (underscore). The first character of the PID can be any
alphabetic, numeric, or valid special character.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Configuring user accounts
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following conditions apply to PIDs:
• The PID cannot be the same as the associated UID, nor can it be the reverse of the
associated UID.
• The NE will not prevent a user from choosing an already existing password (more
than one user can have the same password).
Password administration
The NE supports the ability for a user with security administration privileges to specify
the following user password attributes: the password age (in days); the number of days
that the existing password can be continued to be used before a new password becomes
mandatory; the number of times that the existing password can be continued to be used
before a new password becomes mandatory; the password obsolescence interval that must
elapse before an obsolete password can be reused.
A user with security administration privileges can provision a system-wide password
aging interval to encourage users to change passwords periodically. The following
applies:
• The default for system-wide password aging interval is 30 days. The allowed range is
from 1 to 999 days.
• The system allows the ability to disable the system-wide password aging interval, by
assigning a value of 0 (zero) days.
A password grace period and number of logins allowed after password expiration can also
be provisioned. The following applies:
• The default for the password grace period is 7 days.
• The default for the number of logins allowed after password expiration is 3.
A password is expired when one of the following events occurs:
• the password is expired and neither a grace period nor number of logins is permitted
after password expiration
• the password is expired and either a grace period or a number of logins is permitted
after password expiration, but the provisioned value(s) is expired (i.e., the user has no
more days to use the expired password, or no more logins allowed with the expired
password).
Users have the ability to change their own password on demand. To change a password,
the user must enter the current password, the new password, and the confirmed new
password (Note: For an Admin user changing another user’s password, only the new
password value needs to be entered). The NE checks the password for proper length and
PRELIMINARY
syntax in accordance with established password requirements. Before updating the NE's
database, the NE ensures that the current password is different from the new password
and that the new password and confirmed new password are the same. An error message
is generated to notify the user if any of the password requirements are not met.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Configuring user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding a User
A user with appropriate security level privileges (Admin user) can add new users to the
User Security Database and to specify for each user his/her User Access Privilege (UAP).
The UAP specifies the set of commands a user can execute based on the access privilege
of the user and of the command.
Note: A maximum of only 1 Service user is allowed in the NE. Multiple users of the
other user levels are allowed.
The NE provides the ability to specify an initial password pertaining to the new user. The
user is prompted to change the password when one of the following conditions occurs:
• when that user establishes a session for the first time after the initial password is
assigned
• when that user establishes a session for the first time after a user password has been
reset by an administrative action.
The NE denies the session if the user does not comply.
Deleting a user
A user with appropriate security level privileges can delete existing user profiles from the
User Security Database. If the specified user is currently logged on, then the user is also
logged off. Users with security administration privileges can delete any existing user
profile except default users' profiles.
Note: A user with administration or service privileges cannot delete his/her own user
profile. The Admin user cannot delete the Service user, and the Service user cannot
delete himself.
Retrieving and editing user privileges

The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided
to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:
• Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile
database entry for another user.
• Only users with administrator privileges can edit the User Security Level User
attributes that exist for each user's profile. The security level user attributes are: user
privilege level, link timeout, user provided name, and user-id status. It is not possible
to modify the UID or user security level of factory default users.
• Any change to the privilege(s) granted to a user do not apply to the user if the user is
PRELIMINARY
currently logged in. Any such change will take effect after the next login.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Configuring user accounts
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile
entries.
• Only those parameter values that are actually applied for the specified UID are
reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but
still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.
Enabling/disabling a user
A user with appropriate security level privileges can disable existing user profiles in the
User Security Database. If the specified user is logged on, then the user is also logged off.
A user cannot disable himself/herself.
A user with appropriate security level privileges can enable existing and previously
disabled user profiles in the User Security Database for a specified user(s).
Note: The Admin user can disable and enable all users including the Service user.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts

Before you begin
The following procedures are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see Procedure 4-1: “Connect to Network Element
through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI” (p. 4-2)).
View or modify user details

Note: Appropriate privilege level is required to configure user accounts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Users.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the desired user and click Details.

Result: User details are displayed. You can change privilege level or password, or
enable or disable the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify available fields (see “Configuring user accounts” (p. 5-6)) and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Create a user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Create.
Result: Create User screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter appropriate information (see “Configuring user accounts” (p. 5-6)) and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the desired user and click Delete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Change password
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Change Password.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the old password and the new password, and confirm the new password. Then click
Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
View / terminate sessions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Sessions.

Result: All active sessions are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To terminate a session, select the desired session and click Terminate.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
View SNMP v3 users

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > SNMP v3 Users.

PRELIMINARY
Result: All current SNMP v3 users are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create SNMP v3 user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To create an SNMP v3 user, click Create.

Result: The Create SNMP v3 User window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter User ID, Password, and Access Privilege information. and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Modify SNMP v3 user

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To modify an SNMP v3 user, select the user and click Modify.

Result: The Modify SNMP v3 User window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the desired parameters and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
View / modify system security attributes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > System.

Result: The System Security Administration window with current settings is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To modify existing value(s), enter desired value(s) and click Apply.

PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Login sessions
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Login sessions
Overview
There is no limit to the number of simultaneous active sessions per user ID. One user ID
can log into the NE multiple times (via WebUI, TL1, CLI, and SNMP), the maximum of
which is restricted by the number of sessions supported by the NE. The NE notifies the
security administrator when a user logs into the NE indicating the UID and the
established User Session Number.
The ability to authenticate a session (i.e., activate a user session) is established with the
NE by logging in an existing user through a UID and a PID. The NE will deny the
activation of a user session if authentication for the user cannot be established (e.g. the
specified password does not match the user's password on the NE, the user profile does
not exist on the NE, etc.).
The NE allows a user to cancel a current session which was previously authenticated by a
login request by providing a logoff function for the current session.
The following applies to canceling a user session:
• Only users with appropriate administration privileges are able to logoff other users.
Otherwise users can only logoff themselves.
• Users with administration privileges and also the Service user can logoff other users
with administration privileges.
• A command request to cancel a session will terminate a single active user session on
the addressed NE. In addition, any supporting connection that is no longer supporting
other sessions or connections, is also terminated.
Session timeout
The NE supports auto log out and auto disconnect of user sessions based upon user link
inactivity (i.e. an idle user). Inactivity is defined as lack of user input. The inactivity
interval (period which triggers log out) is provisionable on a system basis. The longest
such interval allowed for an idle user is 999 minutes, with a minimum of 1 minute and a
default of 60 minutes. The system allows the ability to disable the User Session Link
Timer attribute, on a system basis, by assigning the zero value. A value of 0 implies no
idle timeout, (i.e. the user can remain idle forever).
When the session timer expires, the NE logs out and disconnects a user's session to the
NE. The session timer is reset/restarted by successful user login and user session link
communication input activity after the login occurs.
PRELIMINARY
Each properly logged-in session will either be logged out by the user or by system
inactivity or by connection interruption. When a session is terminated (e.g., normal
logoff, power failure, a break in the physical or logical connection), the NE ensures that
the port drops immediately and terminates the user processes running at the time of
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Login sessions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
logoff. When the next user attempts to log on to that physical or logical port, the user is
required to go through the entire login procedure including identification and
authentication.
The admin user may configure unique per user session timeout, based on the UID profile.
If provisioned, the timeout value may take on any value up to the system maximum. If
provisioned, the user-defined session timeout takes precedence over the system-wide
session timeout value provisioned.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration System security features
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System security features

Encrypted and normal mode
The system supports the ability to set the NE to function in an encrypted or normal mode.
Encrypted or normal mode should be set during initial commissioning. There is no default
mode. Only the administrative user can invoke the security mode on the NE. Changing
the mode from encrypted to normal, or vice versa, causes a warm reboot of the active
Main EC. All current user sessions will be logged off as a result.
The NE does not allow the encrypted mode setting if there is no SSH key initialized on
the system. Encrypted mode can only be turned on after the NE has already generated an
SSH key. The NE applies the following guidelines when setting the mode to either
encrypted or normal. These settings apply to the OAMP port only.
In encrypted mode:
• SSH is enabled
• telnet is disabled to ports 23, 3082, 3083
• telnet is enabled to port 22 to support SSH
• SNMP ports (161, 162) are allowed to be enabled
• port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other circuit
packs on the local NE
• NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled
• SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests to the
NE are disabled
• SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE
• HTTPS/WEBUI port 443 is allowed to be enabled
• HTTP/WEBUI port 80 is disabled
In normal mode:
• SSH is enabled (SSH can be used in both modes)
• telnet is enabled to all ports TL1 (3082, 3083) and CLI (22, 23) ports
• SNMP ports (161, 163) are allowed to be enabled
• NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled
• HTTP (Web interface available) is enabled for remote management
• The port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other
circuit packs on the local NE
PRELIMINARY
• SNMPv1, SNMPv2c requests are allowed by the NE

• SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests are not allowed by the NE
• SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration System security features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• CLI over the craft serial port is not encrypted
• SSL features shall be enabled (SSL can be used in both modes)
The NE supports the enabling and disabling of the following external ports: OAMP, VoIP,
E1-LAN, E2-LAN, ES1 and ES2 for extension shelves. Only an administrative user has
the ability to enable/disable these interfaces. The serial/console port cannot be disabled.
Note: The two external LAN ports, E1 and E2, connect to externally managed
devices, like RAMAN or EDFA power booster amplifiers. In the current release, one
User Panel is supported on the Master Shelf of an NE. This provides a maximum of 2
LAN ports for external RAMAN or Booster devices per NE.
TFTP, FTP, and SFTP
TFTP, FTP, and SFTP file transfer protocols are supported for both encrypted and normal
mode. Database backup/restore, and PM upload/transfer can use either TFTP or SFTP.
Software download can use either FTP or SFTP.
SFTP (secure FTP) is a program that uses SSH to transfer files. Unlike standard FTP, it
encrypts both commands and data, preventing passwords and sensitive information from
being transmitted in the clear over the network. It is functionally similar to FTP, but
because it uses a different protocol, standard FTP client can't be used to talk to an SFTP
server, nor an FTP server can be connected with a client that supports only SFTP.
• FTP and SFTP passwords are stored in the database using AES encryption.
• No user interface displays the password for the FTP and SFTP server.
• SFTP or TFTP are used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or in normal
mode.
Secure Shell (SSH)

Secure Shell (SSH) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure
channel between two network devices. SSH is designed as a replacement for telnet and
other unsecure remote shells which send information (notably passwords) in plaintext,
leaving them open to interception. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality
and integrity of data over an unsecure network, such as Internet. SSH allows a trusted
path of communication between two ends (e.g., NE and EMS) using encryption of the
data stream.
• The 1830 NE supports SSHv2. This applies to 1830 PSS-32, PSS-16, PSS-4, and
PRELIMINARY
PSS-1 shelves.
• The NE supports the generation of the SSH crypto Key. This crypto key needs to be
generated before the NE is set to encrypted mode. The NE allows the generation of
the crypto key only if the NE mode is normal. If the NE mode is encrypted, the crypto
key generation is denied.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• SSH Keys cannot be zeroized in encrypted mode.
• The NE supports AES encryption. SSH key must be encrypted with AES before
storing in the disk.
Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a
secure channel between the two ends. This is built on the concepts of authentication and
encryption. It is mainly used between a web browser client and the server. Secure
transactions on the web require that information transmitted between the web site and the
client be done in a way that makes it difficult for other people to intercept and read them.
SSL, or Secure Sockets Layer, takes care of this through a combination of
encryption/decryption software on the web-site hosting computer and in the client
browser.
In 1830 PSS NE web server uses certificate-based authentication and public key
cryptography to establish encrypted data communication with NMS clients. In 1830 PSS
R3.0 the NE will issue a self-signed certificate to the client when the client is connected
through port 443 in encrypted mode to 1830 NE. All the parameters including the public
key in the self-signed certificate are fixed/static and cannot be changed through user
interface commands.
Security event log

For security purposes, the system generates a security log to provide an audit trail record
that supports after-the-fact investigation of specific activities (e.g., logins, modification of
critical system resources). The security log provides a means for the Security
Administrator to investigate, audit, detect, and analyze security events in order that proper
remedial actions can be taken. Security logs are protected from unauthorized access and
no modification by any user or process, even debug tools, is allowed.
The system provides the ability to a user with sufficient security level privileges to
retrieve security event log reports that were generated by the system for a given UserID
and between a specified From Date and Time and To Date and Time.
The following applies to the security log:
• The security log has a circular (or equivalent) recording mechanism (i.e., oldest
record overwritten by newest), and an appropriate administrator has the capability to
retrieve, print, copy, and upload the security log for long-term storage.
• When the security log has reached 90% of its maximum size, the NE sends an
PRELIMINARY
appropriate event to the security administrator.

• The security event log file is protected from tampering by any user defined in the user
security database and cannot be deleted by any user defined in the user security
database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration System security features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The security event log file is stored in non-volatile memory and survives system
restarts/resets.
• The security event log file does not survive software generic upgrades and power
reset.
Security log contents
Each NE is able to log the following classes of information in the security log:
• any action that changes the security attributes and services
• any action that changes access controls
• any action that changes configuration parameters of the device
• each login attempt and its result
• each logout or session termination (whether remote or console, whether requested or
due to inactivity timeout)
A security log entry contains the following information:
• the identification, address and security level of the user that initiated the action that is
being logged
• the actual attempted action that is being logged (the echo of the command/response
message)
• an indication of the success or failure of the activity (command completion code)
• the date and the time the action (i.e. the command or the message) occurred
Note: The security event log file does not record actual or attempted passwords that
are entered in as passwords.
System access control

System access control prevents an otherwise authenticated (valid) user from unauthorized
access. Not all system resources are available to every user, and restricting resource
availability is extremely important to securing a safe and trusted network. System access
control allows only authorized users access to the NE. Access control level is associated
with each user and is maintained through the User Security Level attribute.
To execute any command, a user needs a User Security Level (User Access Privilege)
including the Command Security Level (Command Access Privilege) assigned to the
command being executed. If the user is denied the privilege of executing a command due
to an insufficient User Security Level, the system indicates to the user that the command
request is invalid due to insufficient privileges.
PRELIMINARY
All physical ports of the NE exercise system access control. This includes direct access
serial and LAN ports (CIT, external OAMP network access, etc.) and access via an
Embedded Communications Channel (ECC) as in the case of GCC between the 1830-PSS
and the 1830-PSS1 (Edge Device).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Any failed login attempt immediately reports to the user that the login process has failed
or is invalid. Information such as “invalid user ID” or “invalid password” is not reported.
The NE performs the entire user authentication procedure even if the UID that is entered
is not valid. After a failed login attempt, the system delays for 2 seconds prior to
presenting the next login prompt. This applies to human interaction interfaces (e.g. CLI,
TL1, WebUI).
After the maximum number of consecutive invalid login attempts for a session has been
reached, the system records in the security log the IP address of the source along with the
UID and an intrusion transient condition is reported.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure

View security log
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Reports > Logs > Security.

Result: The Security Log is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Authentication
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Authentication
Overview
Authentication is the act of verifying a claimed identity, providing a basis for setting up
private communications with full data integrity and logging management activity. The
system supports the following different methods of authentication.
• RADIUS authentication
• Local NE Authentication
• SNMP
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The
RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the
user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to
have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's privilege level. The RADIUS
client works with Steel-Belted RADIUS, WinRADIUS, and FreeRadius servers. The NE
supports provisioning of up to 2 RADIUS Servers. The administrative privilege user can
add/delete the specific RADIUS server.
• The administrative privilege user can Enable/Disable the RADIUS servers without
deleting their configuration.
• When two servers are configured and enabled, the NE queries the second RADIUS
server (RAD2) only if the first server (RAD1) does not respond after the appropriate
timeout and retries.
• Web users are authenticated from the local stored database regardless of whether
RADIUS is enabled.
• SNMP users are not authenticated by RADIUS.
• RADIUS functionality can be used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or
normal mode.
• A login by the Service user is never authenticated using RADIUS for any user
interfaces (CLI or WebUI). The authentication for the Service user is always local. PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Authentication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RADIUS attributes
The NE supports configuring the following general RADIUS attributes:
• Timeout: This is the timeout (in seconds) for the NE to wait for a response from the
RADIUS server. A failure is declared after the timeout is elapsed. The supported value
range for timeout is 1 to 1000. The default value is 5.
• Retries: This is the number of attempts that the NE will try to contact the specified
RADIUS server that has failed to respond during the previous request(s). If there is no
response from the server after the specified tries, then the NE will try to contact the
second RADIUS server if one is provisioned. The supported value range for retries is
1 to 100. The default value is 3.
The NE supports the following RADIUS server attributes. The RADIUS attributes can be
configured, edited, deleted, and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative
privilege. The "sharedSecret" parameter cannot be retrieved.
• ServerNum: This is the AID for the RADIUS server. The acceptable values are RAD1
and RAD2.
• IPAddr: This is the IP address of the specified RADIUS server.
• Port: This is the authentication port of the RADIUS server. The valid value is from 1
to 65000. The default port value is 1812.
• sharedSecret: This is the shared secret key between the NE and the target RADIUS
server. This key is an ascii string between 5 to 32 characters.
• Status: This is RADIUS server status. The valid values are the following
– Enabled - The RADIUS server is online. This is the default value.
– Disabled - The RADIUS server is offline.
The NE supports configuring the following authentication ordering behavior options that
can be configured and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative privilege.
• LOCAL: Authentication is based on the local NE's security database. This is the
default.
• RADIUS: Authentication is based on the RADIUS server's database.
• RADIUS-THEN-LOCAL: The authentication is attempted first using the RADIUS
server's database. If the RADIUS server is not reachable then authentication is based
on local NE's security database.
Note: If the RADIUS server is reachable and the user profile does not exist in
RADIUS server's database, then the authentication fails and the user is denied access.
PRELIMINARY
Local NE authentication
Local NE Authentication is accomplished via the UID and PID pair created and stored on
the local NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Authentication
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The access to the database (for authentication) of the NE where user profiles
are stored, is allowed only on a local connection. This is for the Service user to access
locally via connection to RS232 or local CIT port.
SNMP authentication
The local NE can authenticate and authorize users based on SNMP. SNMP provides for
both security versions and security levels. A security version is an authentication strategy
that is set up for a user and the group in which the user resides. A security level is the
permitted level of security within a security version. A combination of a security version
and a security level will determine which security mechanism is employed when handling
an SNMP packet. Three security versions are available: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and
SNMPv3.
The following applies to SNMP:
• The NE supports separate DB records for SNMPv3 users. SNMPv3 users are different
from the other users. SNMPv3 users can be provisioned via WebUI.
• The system supports creation of a default SNMP user at initial startup with a known
password. This known password permits 1354RM-PhM to perform auto-discovery of
NEs. The default SNMP user cannot be deleted. It can only be disabled.
• The NE supports changing SNMPv3 users' authentication (auth) and privacy (priv)
passwords.
• The system supports enabling and disabling SNMP users.
• The NE supports sending Authentication Failure traps and supports enabling and
disabling the sending of Authentication Failure Traps.
• The system allows a new SNMP user to be created from an administrator account.
• Even if RADIUS authentication is enabled on the system, login access to the NE via
SNMP is always based on the UID and PID pair resident on the NE.
SNMP trap destinations

The system supports editing and retrieval of SNMP trap destinations. Trap destinations
are SNMP managers provisioned to listen to traps coming from the NE. These SNMP
managers may or may not also be actively managing the NE.
The following SNMP trap server attributes are supported:
• SNMPTrapID - this is the ID of the SNMP trap server. The system supports up to 5
remote trap servers. This value is required to discern which trap server the user is
addressing. Possible values are 1 thru 5.
PRELIMINARY
• IPAddr - this is the IP address of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP address of the
server that serves as the trap destination.
• String - this is the community string sent to the SNMP trap server. It is an ascii string
from 1 to 32 characters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Authentication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• IPaddress Port - this is the (IP address) port of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP
address port of the server that serves as the trap destination.
• Timeout - Specifies the time (round trip), in hundreths of a second, after which the
connection times out if no reply is received. Following a timeout, a retry is attempted,
up to the number of retries specified by the retry variable.
• Retry Count - Specifies an integer value for the number of times the network element
will attempt to retry the connection in the event of a timeout.
• SNMP version - the SNMP version to use when formatting the trap. Valid versions are
v1, v2c, and v3.
• NMS Station Group ID - Specifies an integer value that uniquely identifies the NMS
workstation serving as the trap destination. (Use 0 for all third party SNMP trap
servers).
Note: Traps are sent in SNMPv2 or SNMPv3 format, depending on the security level
of the NE. If the NE is encrypted, then all traps are encrypted, so the traps will be in
v3 format. All SNMPv3 traps are sent with the SNMPv3 default user. In normal
mode, the version can be v2 or v3.
SNMP community strings

The system supports creation, editing, deletion, and retrieval of SNMP community
strings. Community strings are necessary for authentication (e.g. if the manager comes
into the NE via SNMPv2). Provisioning of these tasks is accomplished via CLI, WebUI,
and SNMP.
Note: If the NE is in encrypted mode, the user can still configure these community
strings, but the remote SNMP manager will connect via SNMPv3.
The following SNMP community attributes are supported:
• SNMPComID – this is the ID of the SNMP community. The system supports up to 5
pre-configured communities, one for each of the user privilege classes. Possible
values are: admin, provisioner, observer, nms, and 3rdpnms. This parameter requires a
value.
• String – this is the community string sent from the SNMP manager to the NE. It is an
ascii string from 1 to 32 characters. Based on the string and the privilege level
inherited from the SNMPComID, the NE will either process or deny the SNMP
request. The string must be unique (there cannot be duplicate strings) and the string
cannot start or end with a blank space.
The SNMP string is checked every time an SNMP request is processed by the NE. If
there is a match, then the NE will further check the privilege level of that string to
PRELIMINARY
ensure that the request can be granted given the command privilege level. If the string
does not match any string defined in the NE, the request fails and the NE returns a
failure message. If the privilege level is inadequate for the request being asked, then
the NE returns a failure message, otherwise, the request is processed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures

Create RADIUS server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Servers

Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Create.
Result: The Create RADIUS Server screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter parameters and click Apply.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Delete RADIUS server

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the RADIUS server and click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
View RADIUS server

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the RADIUS server and click Details.

PRELIMINARY
Result: The RADIUS server details are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision RADIUS properties
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Properties

Result: The RADIUS Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Security administration Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures

Create trap destinations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Trap Destinations

Result: The SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Create.
Result: The Create SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Delete trap destinations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Trap Destination and click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
View trap destinations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the trap destination and click Details.

PRELIMINARY
Result: The Trap Destination details are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Security administration Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View / modify community strings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Community Strings

Result: The SNMP Community Strings are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To modify Community Strings, enter appropriate values in the respective fields and click
Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
6 Alarm List
6
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains the alarm list and alarm descriptions for Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4. Procedures for clearing these alarms are detailed in Chapter 7, “Alarm Clearing
Procedures”.
The following information is provided for each condition:
• a description of the condition that includes the possible root cause
• the condition severity
• whether or not the condition is service-affecting
• the cards or systems to which the condition applies
Contents
ALLCHANMISS 6-7
ALLCHANMISSOUT 6-8
AMPDISABLED 6-9
APRNODE 6-10
APROSC 6-11
APRTOPO 6-12
APRUNAVAIL 6-13
APRUNAVAILOSC 6-14
APSB 6-15
PRELIMINARY
APSCM 6-16
APSMM 6-17
AUTHFAIL 6-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTORESET 6-19
B1SD 6-20
BASELINE 6-21
BDI 6-22
BDIODU 6-23
CARDINIT 6-24
CONFIGFAIL 6-25
CONTCOM 6-26
CONTEQPT 6-27
CONTR 6-28
CONTR-OUT 6-29
CRDINIT 6-30
DATAERR 6-31
DATAFLT 6-32
DBBKUP-IP 6-33
DBFL 6-34
DBFT 6-35
DBINVALID 6-36
DBMEMTRF 6-37
DBRSTR-IP 6-38
DEG 6-39
DISCOVERMOD 6-40
DORMANTUSER 6-41
EBER 6-42
EQPT 6-43
EQPTBOOT 6-44
EQPTDGR 6-45
EQPTDGROCH 6-46
EQPTDGROCH-OUT 6-47
PRELIMINARY
EQPTPORT 6-48
EXCESSLOAD 6-49
FACTERM-DEV 6-50
FANSPEEDHIGH 6-51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List Overview
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDLOW 6-52
FANSPEEDMAN 6-53
FECDEG 6-54
FELANLFI 6-55
FELANLOS 6-56
FELANLSS 6-57
FELANRFI 6-58
FELOS 6-59
FEPORTMISMATCH 6-60
FEPRLF 6-61
FPGAFAIL 6-62
FPGAINIT 6-63
FPGATIMEOUT 6-64
FRCDWKSWBK 6-65
FRCDWKSWPR 6-66
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE 6-67
FWUPGRADEPENDING 6-68
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT 6-69
HIBER 6-70
HIGAIN 6-71
INSERTMOD 6-72
INTTEMP [over] 6-73
INTTEMP [under] 6-74
INTRUSION 6-75
LANLFI 6-76
LANLOS 6-77
LANLSS 6-78
LANRFI 6-79
LCK 6-80
PRELIMINARY
LFD 6-81
LFIEGR 6-82
LINKDOWN 6-83
LOCKOUTOFPR 6-84
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF 6-85
LOFEGR 6-86
LOF-O 6-87
LOGAIN 6-88
LOM 6-89
LOS 6-90
LOSDCM 6-91
LOSLDSIG 6-92
LOS-O 6-93
LOS-OUT 6-94
LOS-P 6-95
LPBKLINE 6-96
LPBKTERM 6-97
LSSEGR 6-98
MAN 6-99
MANRESET 6-101
MANWKSWBK 6-102
MANWKSWPR 6-103
MISMATCH 6-104
MISMATCHMOD 6-105
MOD 6-106
MODOUTOOR 6-107
MTCESURV 6-108
MTCESURVDGR 6-109
NET 6-110
NOTALLOWED 6-111
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH 6-112
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH 6-113
OCHCOLLISION 6-114
PRELIMINARY
OCHCOLLISION-OUT 6-115
OCHKEYDUP 6-116
OCHKEYOVERLAP 6-117
OCHFDI 6-118
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List Overview
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHPDI 6-119
OCHTRAILDUP 6-120
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN 6-121
OCHUNKNOWN 6-122
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT 6-123
OCI 6-124
OPR 6-125
OPRPWRHIGH 6-126
OPRPWRLOW 6-127
OPRLOSSHIGH 6-128
OPRLOSSLOW 6-129
OPR-OUT 6-130
OPRTX 6-131
OPRUNACHIEVE 6-132
OSCSSF 6-133
PLM 6-134
PRCDRERR-TOPO 6-135
PWR 6-136
PWRADJFAIL 6-137
PWRADJREQ 6-138
PWRMARGIN 6-139
PWRMAXGAIN 6-140
PWRSUSP 6-141
PWRTILTSUSP 6-142
REMOVEMOD 6-143
REPLUNITMISS 6-144
REPLUNITMISSMOD 6-146
RFIEGR 6-147
SDBER 6-148
PRELIMINARY
SDEG-O 6-149
SSF 6-150
SSFODU 6-151
SWFTDWN 6-152
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGCOMMIT 6-153
SWUPGFAIL 6-154
SYSBOOT 6-155
TIM 6-156
TIMODU 6-157
TRMTMOD 6-158
UNKNOWNMOD 6-159
UNKNOWN 6-160
UPM 6-161
URU-OTS 6-162
URU-OTU 6-163
URU-S 6-164
USALS 6-165
USLOS 6-166
USOCHCOLLISION 6-167
VOLTAGE[high] 6-168
VOLTAGE[low] 6-169
VTS{1-10}LOCKOUTOFPR 6-170
VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWPR 6-171
VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWBK 6-172
VTS{1-10}MANWKSWPR 6-173
VTS{1-10}MANWKSWBK 6-174
VTS{1-10}WKSWPR 6-175
VTSFDI 6-176
VTSOCI 6-177
WKSWBK 6-178
WKSWPR 6-179
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List ALLCHANMISS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS
Alarm Data Value/Meaning

Severity Levels CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-line
AHPHG-shelf-slot-line
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OTS
Description All Channels Missing
Corrective Action Proceed to “ALLCHANMISS
(C-Band Loss of signal)” (p. 7-7).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List ALLCHANMISSOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISSOUT

Severity Levels NA
AID Type A2325-shelf-slot-Line
Effect on Service NSA
Description All Outgoing Channels Missing
Corrective Action Proceed to “ALLCHANMISS-OUT
(C-Band Loss of signal)” (p. 7-8).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List AMPDISABLED
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMPDISABLED

Severity Levels CR
AID Type
Description Amplifier Disabled
Corrective Action Proceed to “AMPDISABLED
(Amplifier Disabled)” (p. 7-11).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List APRNODE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRNODE

Severity Levels MJ
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-sig
AHPHG-shelf-slot-sig
Description APR Active - Node
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRNODE (APR Active
- Node)” (p. 7-13).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List APROSC
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APROSC

Severity Levels MJ
Description APR Limited - OSC SFP failure
condition
Corrective Action Proceed to “APROSC (APR Limited
- OSC SFP failure condition)”
(p. 7-14).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List APRTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRTOPO

Severity Levels MJ
Description APR Active - invalid topology
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRTOPO (APR Active
- invalid topology)” (p. 7-15).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List APRUNAVAIL
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAIL

Severity Levels MJ
Description APR unavailable - monitoring card
booting
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRUNAVAIL (APR
unavailable - monitoring card
booting)” (p. 7-16).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List APRUNAVAILOSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAILOSC

Severity Levels MJ
Description APR Limited - OSC SFP failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “APRUNAVAILOSC
(APR Limited - OSC SFP failure)”
(p. 7-17).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List APSB
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSB

Severity Levels Not alarmed
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C{1-4}}
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: FC1200, OC192/STM64
Description APS protection switching byte
failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “APSB (APS protection
switching byte failure)” (p. 7-18).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSCM

Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: 10GBE, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
Description APS channel mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “APSCM (APS Channel
Mismatch)” (p. 7-20).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List APSMM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSMM

Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: 10GBE, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
Description APS mode mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “APSMM (APS Mode
Mismatch)” (p. 7-23).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List AUTHFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTHFAIL

Severity Levels TC
AID Type SYSTEM
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description Authentication Failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “AUTHFAIL
(Authentication Failure)” (p. 7-25).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List AUTORESET
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTORESET

AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card Autonomous Reset
Corrective Action Proceed to “AUTORESET (Card
Autonomous Reset)” (p. 7-26).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List B1SD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B1SD

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: OC192/STM64
Description B1 Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “B1SD” (p. 7-27)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List BASELINE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BASELINE

Severity Levels NR
AID Type 4DPA4-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}
A2325A-shelf-slot-OSC
AHPHG-shelf-slot-OSC
Description PM Baseline: {OPT, OPR} Value:
value, Reason: value
Corrective Action Proceed to “BASELINE” (p. 7-28)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDI
Description

Severity Level Not reported
AID 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
4DPA4-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}, C{1-4}}
Alarm Entity Type OTU1/OTU2
Description Backward Defect Indication - OTU
Action Proceed to “BDI” (p. 7-29)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List BDIODU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIODU
Description

Severity Level Not reported
AID 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
Alarm Entity Type ODU1/ODU2
Description Backward Defect Indication - ODU
Action Proceed to “BDIODU” (p. 7-30)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID 4DPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Equipment Controller-{1-8}-{1,18}
Description Card initializing
Action Proceed to “CARDINIT” (p. 7-31)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List CONFIGFAIL
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONFIGFAIL
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description Line card configuration failed
Action Proceed to “CONFIGFAIL (Line Card
Configuration Failed)” (p. 7-32)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Equipment Controller-{1-8}-1
Description Card failure - communication
Action Proceed to “CONTCOM” (p. 7-33)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List CONTEQPT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTEQPT
Description

Severity Levels MJ
AID Equipment Controller-{1-8}-{1,18}
Description Card failure - device
Action Proceed to “CONTEQPT (Card
Failure - Device)” (p. 7-35)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List CONTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID A2325A-shelf-slot-line
Description Port degrade - wavelength tracker
detection failure
Action Proceed to “CONTR (Port degrade -
wavelength tracker failure)” (p. 7-37)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List CONTR-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR-OUT
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID A2325A-shelf-slot-line
detection failure
Action Proceed to “CONTR-OUT (Port
degrade - wavelength tracker
detection failure)” (p. 7-39)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CRDINIT
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
Description Card identification event
Action Proceed to “CRDINIT (Card
Identification Event)” (p. 7-41)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List DATAERR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAERR
Description

Severity Levels MJ
AHPHG-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
Description Data error or timeout
Action Proceed to “CONTEQPT (Card
Failure - Device)” (p. 7-35)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAFLT
Description

Severity Levels MJ
AHPHG-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
Description Card provisioning failure
Action Proceed to “DATAFLT” (p. 7-43)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List DBBKUP-IP
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBBKUP-IP
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID System
Description Database Backup In-Progress
Action Proceed to “DBBKUP-IP (Database
Backup In-Progress)” (p. 7-42)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List DBFL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFL
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID System
Description DB Failure Local - copy creation of
processing failure
Action Proceed to “DBFL” (p. 7-45)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List DBFT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFT
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID System
Description DB Failure Transport - file transport
failure
Action Proceed to “DBFT” (p. 7-46)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBINVALID
Description

Severity Levels MJ
AID EC, System
Description Database invalid
Action Proceed to “DBINVALID” (p. 7-47)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List DBMEMTRF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBMEMTRF

Severity Levels MJ
AID Type EC, SYSTEM
Description Database Sychronization Failed
Corrective Action Proceed to “DBMEMTRF (Database
synchronization failure)” (p. 7-49).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List DBRSTR-IP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBRSTR-IP
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID System
Description Database Restore In-Progress
Action Proceed to “DBRSTR-IP (Database
Restore In-Progress)” (p. 7-50).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List DEG
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEG
Description

Severity Levels MJ
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type ODU2
Description Signal Degrade - ODU
Action Proceed to “DEG” (p. 7-51).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List DISCOVERMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DISCOVERMOD
Description

Severity Levels TC
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description Pluggable Module Discovered
Action Proceed to “DISCOVERMOD
(Pluggable Module Discovered)”
(p. 7-53)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List DORMANTUSER
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DORMANTUSER
Description

Severity Levels Not Alarmed
AID System
Description User inactive
Action Proceed to “DORMANTUSER (User
inactive)” (p. 7-54)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBER
Description

Severity Levels CR
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: OC192/STM64 (client side
only)
Description Excessive BER
Action Proceed to “EBER (Excessive BER)”
(p. 7-55)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List EQPT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
SFD-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
Description Card-Failure Device
Action Proceed to “EQPT” (p. 7-56)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTBOOT

Severity Levels CR
AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description Card failure - boot failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTBOOT (Card
failure - boot failure)” (p. 7-59)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List EQPTDGR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR
Port Degrade: Communications with the Wavelength Tracker on this card are unreliable
and any Wavelength Tracker information sent or generated may be incorrect.

Severity Levels MN
AID Type AHPHG-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
communication failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGR (Card
Degrade - device)” (p. 7-61).
Card Degrade: A fault on the card has caused the system to declare a hardware failure.

Severity Levels MN
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description Card degrade - device
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGR (Card
Degrade - device)” (p. 7-61).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List EQPTDGROCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH

Severity Levels MN
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-line
Alarm Entity Type OCH
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGROCH (Port
Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
Communication Failure) ” (p. 7-63)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List EQPTDGROCH-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH-OUT

Severity Levels MN
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-{SIG, LINE}
AHPHG-shelf-slot-{SIG, LINE}
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTDGROCH-OUT
(Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
Communication Failure)” (p. 7-65)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTPORT
Port Failure - Device

Severity Levels CR
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4},C{1-4},
VA{1-4}}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},C{1-
12}, VA{1-2}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4},
VA{1-2}}
Description Port failure - device
Corrective Action Proceed to “EQPTPORT (Port Failure
- Device)” (p. 7-67)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List EXCESSLOAD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOAD

Severity Levels CR
AHPHG-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Equipment Controller-shelf-slot
Description Card would exceed Shelf Amperage
limit
Action Proceed to “EXCESSLOAD
(Excessive Current Load)” (p. 7-69)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV
Description

Severity Levels MJ
AID 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},C{1-
12}}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{VA{1-2}}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4},C{1-4}}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{VA{1-4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4},
VA{1-2}}
Description Pluggable module SEEP failure
Action Proceed to “FACTERM-DEV”
(p. 7-70)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FANSPEEDHIGH
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDHIGH

Severity Levels MN
AID Type FAN-shelf-slot
Description Fan speed is too high
Corrective Action Proceed to “FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan
Speed is too high)” (p. 7-72)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FANSPEEDLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDLOW

Severity Levels MN
Description Fan speed is too low
Corrective Action Proceed to “FANSPEEDLOW (Fan
speed is too low)” (p. 7-73)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FANSPEEDMAN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDMAN

Severity Levels MN
Description Fan speed manually set to maximum
Corrective Action Proceed to “FANSPEEDMAN (Fan
speed manually set to maximum)”
(p. 7-74)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FECDEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECDEG

Severity Levels MN
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}, C{1-4}}
Description Indicated bits error before FEC
correction degraded
Corrective Action Proceed to “FECDEG (Errored bits
before FEC degrade)” (p. 7-75)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FELANLFI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLFI

Severity Levels NA
Alarm Entity Type 10GBE
Description Far end local fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “FELANLFI (Far End
Local Fault)” (p. 7-76)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLOS
Description

AID 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}, C{1-4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4}
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, 10GbE
Description Far End Loss of Signal
Action Proceed to “FELANLOS” (p. 7-77)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FELANLSS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLSS
Description

AID 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4}
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200
Description Far End Loss of Synchronization.
Action Proceed to “FELANLSS” (p. 7-78)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FELANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANRFI

Alarm Entity Type 1GBE, 10GBE
Description Far End Remote Fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “FELANRFI (Far End
Remote Fault)” (p. 7-79)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FELOS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELOS
Description

Alarm Entity Type CBRAR
Description Far End Loss of Signal
Action Proceed to “FELOS” (p. 7-80)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FEPORTMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPORTMISMATCH
Description

Severity Levels CR
Alarm Entity Type 1GBE, CBRAR, FC100, FC200,
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description Far End Port Mapping Mismatch
Action Proceed to “FEPORTMISMATCH”
(p. 7-81)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FEPRLF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPRLF

Severity Levels NA
Alarm Entity Type FC1200, OC192/STM64
Description Far End Protection Line Failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “FEPRLF (Far End
Protection Line Failure)” (p. 7-82)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FPGAFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAFAIL
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID Type 4DPA4-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Description FPGA download or programming
failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “FPGAFAIL (FPGA
Download or Programming Failure)”
(p. 7-83)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FPGAINIT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAINIT
Description

Severity Levels CR (when in service and not a
scheduled firmware upgrade;
otherwise MN)
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Description FPGA initializing
Corrective Action Proceed to “FPGAINIT (FPGA
Initializing)” (p. 7-84)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGATIMEOUT

Severity Levels MN
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Description FPGA timeout
Corrective Action Proceed to “FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA
Timeout)” (p. 7-85)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FRCDWKSWBK
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK
Description

Severity Levels NA
AID 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{C1-C12}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C{1-4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4}
Alarm Entity Type 11DPE12: 1GBE
11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
4DPA4: 1GBE, CBRAR, FC100,
FC200, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description Forced switch to working
Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWBK”
(p. 7-86).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWPR
Description

Severity Levels NA
11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16
Description Forced switch to protection
Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWPR”
(p. 7-87).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE

Severity Levels NA
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Description Firmware on this pack is about to
become obsolete with the software
release upgrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “FWPENDINGOBSO-
LETE (Firmware on this pack is
about to become obsolete with the
software release upgrade)” (p. 7-88)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWUPGRADEPENDING

Severity Levels NA
AID Type 4DPA4 (FlexMux and DualTran)
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Description Firmware upgrade pending
Corrective Action Proceed to “FWUPGRADEPEND-
ING (Firmware upgrade pending)”
(p. 7-89)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT

Severity Levels NA
AID Type 4DPA4 (FlexMux and DualTran)
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
Description Firmware version on this pack is not
the default version for this software
release
Corrective Action Proceed to “FWVERSIONNOTDE-
FAULT (Firmware version on this
pack is not the default version for this
software release)” (p. 7-91)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List HIBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIBER
Description

Severity Levels MJ
AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200
Description High BER
Corrective Action Proceed to “HIBER (High BER)”
(p. 7-93).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List HIGAIN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIGAIN

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Sig
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Sig
Description Amplifier out of operational range -
amplifier gain too high
Corrective Action Proceed to “HIGAIN (Amplifier Out
of Operational Range: Gain too
High)” (p. 7-94)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List INSERTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INSERTMOD

Severity Levels TC
AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},C{1-
12}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4}}
Description Card incompatible with shelf fan
Corrective Action Proceed to “INSERTMOD
(Pluggable Module Inserted)”
(p. 7-95)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List INTTEMP [over]
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMP [over]
Description

Severity Levels MN
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
Description Card over temperature
Action Proceed to “INTEMP [over]” (p. 7-96)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List INTTEMP [under]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMP [under]
Description

Severity Levels MN
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
Description Card under temperature
Action Proceed to “INTEMP [under]”
(p. 7-98)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List INTRUSION
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSION

AID Type SYSTEM
Description Excessive Invalid Login Attempts
Corrective Action Proceed to “INTRUSION (Excessive
Invalid Login Attempts)” (p. 7-99)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLFI

Severity Levels MJ
Description LAN Local Fault Indicator
Corrective Action Proceed to “LANLFI (Local Fault)”
(p. 7-100)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LANLOS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLOS
Description

Severity Levels CR
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; 10GbE; FE; FC100; FC200;
FC400; CBRAR
Description LAN Loss of Signal
Action Proceed to “LANLOS” (p. 7-102)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS
Description

Severity Levels CR
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; 10GbE; FE; FC100; FC200;
Fc400
Description Loss of Synchronization
Action Proceed to “LANLSS” (p. 7-103)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LANRFI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANRFI
Description

Severity Levels NA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; 10GbE; FE
Description LAN Remote Fault Indicator
Action Proceed to “LANRFI ” (p. 7-104).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCK
Description

Severity Levels CR
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L1, L2}
Description Locked - ODU
Action Proceed to “LCK” (p. 7-106).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LFD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFD
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C{1-4}}
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200
4DPA4: 1GBE
Description GFP Loss of Frame Delineation
Action Proceed to “LFD” (p. 7-107).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LFIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFIEGR

Description Remote Client Local Fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “LFIEGR (Remote Client
Local Fault)” (p. 7-108)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LINKDOWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKDOWN
Description

Severity Levels CR
EC-1-{1}-CIT"
EC: PLK
Description Link Down
Action Proceed to “LINKDOWN” (p. 7-109)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFPR
Description

11DPE12-shelf-slot-{C{1-12}}
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16
Description Lockout of protection
Action Proceed to “LOCKOUTOFPR”
(p. 7-112).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LOF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF
Description
1 of 2

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1,2}
Alarm Entity Type OTU2
Description Loss of Frame - OTU
Action Proceed to “LOF” (p. 7-114)
2 of 2

Severity Levels CR
Alarm Entity Type OC3; OC12; OC48; OC192; STM1;
STM4; STM16; STM64
Description Loss of Frame
Action Proceed to “LOF” (p. 7-114)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFEGR
Description

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192; STM1,
STM4, STM16, STM64
Description Loss of Frame Egress
Action Proceed to “LOFEGR” (p. 7-119).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LOF-O
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF-O

Severity Levels MJ
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-OSC
Description Incoming SUPVY LOF
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOF-O (Incoming
SUPVY LOF)” (p. 7-120).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LOGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOGAIN

Severity Levels MN
Description Amplifier out of operational range
- amplifier gain too low
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOGAIN (Amplifier
out of operational range -
amplifier gain too low)”
(p. 7-123).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LOM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOM
Description

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type OTU2
Description Loss of Multiframe - OTU
Action Proceed to “LOM” (p. 7-125).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-4;{VA 1-4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4; VA1,
VA2}
SFC[1,2,4,8]-shelf-slot-OMD
SFD[4,8]-shelf-slot-OMD
A2325A-shelf-slot-Line
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Line
only), OCH
4DPA4: OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
SFC, AHPHG, A2325A: OTS
Description Loss of Signal
SFC: OMD input los of signal
Action Proceed to “LOS (Loss of signal)”
(p. 7-127)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LOSDCM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSDCM
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID A2325A-shelf-slot-DCM
AHPHG-shelf-slot-DCM
Description Loss of Signal from DCM Input
Action Proceed to “LOSDCM” (p. 7-134)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LOSLDSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSLDSIG

Severity Levels CR
Description LD SIG Input LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOSLDSIG (LD SIG
Input LOS)” (p. 7-136).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LOS-O
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-O

Severity Levels MN
Description Incoming SUPVY LOS
Corrective Action Proceed to “LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)” (p. 7-138).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LOS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-OUT
Description (outgoing LOS)

Severity Levels CR
AID A2325A-shelf-slot-Line
Description Outgoing Loss of Signal
Action Proceed to “LOS-OUT” (p. 7-141)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LOS-P
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-P
Description

Severity Levels CR
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}}
Alarm Entity Type OTU1, OTU2
Description 4DPA4: OTU1
AHPHG, A2325A: OTS
All other AIDs: OTU2
Action Proceed to “LOS-P” (p. 7-144)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LPBKLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKLINE
Description

Severity Levels NA
12}}
Description Facility loop active
Action Proceed to “LPBKLINE” (p. 7-146)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List LPBKTERM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKTERM
Description

Severity Levels NA
12}}
Description Terminal loop active
Action Proceed to “LPBKTERM” (p. 7-147)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List LSSEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSSEGR

Description Remote Client Loss of
Synchronization
Corrective Action Proceed to “LSSEGR (Remote Client
Loss of Synchronization)” (p. 7-148).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List MAN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN
Description (card)

Severity Levels N/A
AID 11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
Effect on Service N/A
Description Manually caused abnormal condition
- card in maintenance
Action Proceed to “MAN (Manually caused
abnormal condition - card in
maintenance)” (p. 7-149)
Description (port)

Severity Levels N/A
AID 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4},
VA{1-2}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4, L1, L2,
VA1, VA2}
SFC-shelf-slot-OMD
PRELIMINARY
SFD-shelf-slot-OMD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description Manually caused abnormal condition

- port in maintenance
Action Proceed to “MAN (Manually caused
abnormal condition - port in
maintenance)” (p. 7-150)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List MANRESET
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANRESET

11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-{1}
Description Card Manual Reset
Corrective Action Proceed to “MANRESET (Card
Manual Reset)” (p. 7-152)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWBK
Description

Alarm Entity Type 1GBE, CBRAR, FC100, FC200,
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16
Description Manual switch to working
Action Proceed to “MANWKSWBK”
(p. 7-153).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List MANWKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWPR
Description

11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16
Description Manual switch to protection
Action Proceed to “MANWKSWPR”
(p. 7-154).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH
Description - card mismatch

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
Description Card mismatch
Action Proceed to “Card mismatch”
(p. 7-155)
Description - power filter mismatch

Severity Levels CR
AID Type PF-shelf-{2,3}
Description Power filter mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “Power filter mismatch”
(p. 7-157)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List MISMATCHMOD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCHMOD

Severity Levels MN
AID Type 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4},
VA{1-2}}
12}}
Description SFP or XFP mismatch
Corrective Action Proceed to “MISMATCHMOD”
(p. 7-159).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List MOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MOD

Severity Levels MN
AID Type 4DPA4-shelf-slot- {VA1, VA2}
Description Card degrade - wavelength tracker
channel id insertion
Corrective Action Proceed to “MOD (Card degrade -
Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
Insertion)” (p. 7-161)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List MODOUTOOR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MODOUTOOR

Severity Levels MN
Alarm Entity Type
Description Modulator output power out of range
Corrective Action Proceed to “MODOUTOOR
(Modulator output power out of
range)” (p. 7-163)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List MTCESURV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURV

Severity Levels CR
Description Add power control failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “MTCESURV (Add
power control failure)” (p. 7-164).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List MTCESURVDGR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURVDGR

Severity Levels MJ
encode degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “MTCESURVDGR (Port
degrade - wavelength tracker encode
degrade)” (p. 7-166)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4},C{1-4}}
EC-shelf-slot-{OAMP,ES1,ES2}
Alarm Entity Type 11DPE12 and 11QPA4: OTU2
4DPA4: OTU1
EC, FAN, and USRPNL: PLK
AHPHG, A2325A: OTS
Description Link down
Action Proceed to “NET” (p. 7-167).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List NOTALLOWED
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTALLOWED

Severity Levels CR
AID Type SLOT
Description Card not allowed
Corrective Action Proceed to “NOTALLOWED (Card
not allowed)” (p. 7-169)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH

Severity Levels MJ
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Alarm Entity Type Card
Description OA pump laser bias current high
Corrective Action Proceed to “OAPUMPBIASCUR-
RHIGH” (p. 7-170).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH

Severity Levels MJ
AID Type A2325A
AHPHG
Alarm Entity Type Card
Description OA pump laser tem-perature high
Corrective Action Proceed to “OAPUMPTEMPHIGH”
(p. 7-171).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Line-freq
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Line-freq
Description Channel collision
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHCOLLISION
(Channel collision)” (p. 7-172)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OCHCOLLISION-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION-OUT

Severity Levels CR
AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-{SIG,
LINE}-freq
AHPHG-shelf-slot-{SIG,
LINE}-freq
Description Channel collision Output Direction
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHCOLLISION-OUT
(Channel collision Output
Direction)” (p. 7-174)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYDUP

Severity Levels MN
Description Duplicate Wave Key
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHKEYDUP
(Duplicate Wave Key)” (p. 7-176)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OCHKEYOVERLAP
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYOVERLAP

Severity Levels MN
Description Wave Key overlap
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key
overlap)” (p. 7-178)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OCHFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHFDI

Severity Levels NR
Description Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward
Defect Indication)” (p. 7-179)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OCHPDI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHPDI

Severity Levels NR
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{VA1,VA2}
Description Optical Channel Payload Defect
Indication
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHPDI (Channel
Payload Defect Indicator)” (p. 7-181)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILDUP

Severity Levels MN
Description Duplicate OCH Trail name
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH
Trail name)” (p. 7-183)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN

Severity Levels MN
Description Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHTRAILUN-
KNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for
x-connect)” (p. 7-185)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN

Severity Levels MN
Description Channel unexpected
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHUNKNOWN
(Channel Unexpected)” (p. 7-187)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT

Severity Levels MN
LINE}-freq
LINE}-freq
Description Channel unexpected
Corrective Action Proceed to “OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
(Channel Unexpected)” (p. 7-189)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCI
Description

Severity Levels CR
Description Open Connection Indication - ODU
Action Proceed to “OCI” (p. 7-191).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR
Description

Severity Levels MN
Description Channel optical power out of range
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPR (Channel Power
Unstable)” (p. 7-192)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OPRPWRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRHIGH

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Line
Description Out of Operational Range - Loss Too
High
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRPWRHIGH (Out of
Operational Range - Input Power Too
High)” (p. 7-194).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OPRPWRLOW
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRLOW

Severity Levels MN
Description Out of Operational Range - Loss Too
Low
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRPWRLOW (Out of
Operational Range - Input Power
Too Low)” (p. 7-196)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OPRLOSSHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSHIGH
Description

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Dcm
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Dcm
Description out of operational range - loss too
high
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRPWRHIGH (Out of
Operational Range - Input Power Too
High)” (p. 7-194)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OPRLOSSLOW
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSLOW

AID Type A2325A-shelf-slot-Dcm
AHPHG-shelf-slot-Dcm
Description Out Of Operational Range - Loss Too
Low
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRLOSSLOW (Out of
Operational Range - Loss Too Low)”
(p. 7-198)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OPR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-OUT
Description

Severity Levels MN
LINE}-freq
LINE}-freq
Description Outgoing Channel Optical Power
Out of Range
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPR-OUT (Outgoing
Channel Optical Power Out of
Range)” (p. 7-200)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OPRTX
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRTX
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID Type A2325A
AHPHG
Description Channel power unstable
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRTX (Channel optical
power out of range)” (p. 7-201)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRUNACHIEVE
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{VA1-4}
4DPA4-shelf-slot- {VA1, VA2}
11DPE12-shelf-slot- {VA1, VA2}
Description Channel power unachievable
Corrective Action Proceed to “OPRUNACHIEVE
(Channel Power Unachievable)”
(p. 7-203)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List OSCSSF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSCSSF
Description

Severity Levels NR
AID A2325A-shelf-slot-OSC
Description Server signal failure - OSC
Action Proceed to “OSCSSF” (p. 7-206).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM
Description

Severity Levels CR
Description Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU
Action Proceed to “PLM” (p. 7-207)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List PRCDRERR-TOPO
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO
Description
1 of 2

Severity Levels MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Invalid topology
Corrective Action Proceed to “PRCDRERR-TOPO”
(p. 7-208)
2 of 2

Severity Levels MN
Description Power management topology invalid
Corrective Action Proceed to “PRCDRERR-TOPO
(Power management topology
invalid)” (p. 7-210)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWR
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID PF-shelf-{2,3}
Description Battery off or power filter off
Action Proceed to “PWR” (p. 7-212)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List PWRADJFAIL
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID A2325A-shelf-slot-{SIG, LINE}
Description Power Adjustment Failure
Action Proceed to “PWRADJFAIL”
(p. 7-214)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJREQ
Description

Severity Levels MN
Description Power Adjustment Required
Action Proceed to “PWRADJREQ”
(p. 7-217)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List PWRMARGIN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMARGIN
Description

Severity Levels MN
Description Power Adjustment Margin Exceeded
Action Proceed to “PWRMARGIN”
(p. 7-219)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMAXGAIN
Description

Severity Levels MN
Description Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max
Value
Action Proceed to “PWRMAXGAIN”
(p. 7-221)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List PWRSUSP
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP
Description

Severity Levels MN
Description Power management suspended
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRSUSP (Power
management suspended)” (p. 7-223)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRTILTSUSP
Description

Severity Levels MN
AID Type A2325A-bay-shelf-slot-Line
AHPHG-bay-shelf-slot-Line
Description Amplifier gain tilt adjustments
suspended
Corrective Action Proceed to “PWRTILTSUSP
(Amplifier gain tilt adjustments
suspended)” (p. 7-224)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List REMOVEMOD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REMOVEMOD

Severity Levels TC
AID Type 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4},C{1-4}}
12}}
Description Pluggable module removed
Corrective Action Proceed to “REMOVEMOD
(Pluggable Module Removed)”
(p. 7-225)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
Description Card missing
Action Proceed to “REPLUNTMISS”
(p. 7-226)
Description
Card removal/unseat event

Severity Levels CR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List REPLUNITMISS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-1
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
USRPNL-shelf
Description Card removal/unseat event
Corrective Action Proceed to “REPLUNTMISS”
(p. 7-226)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISSMOD
Description

Severity Levels CR
AID 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4},
VA{1-2}}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},
C{1-12}, VA1}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}-C{1-4,
VA{1-2}}
Description SFP or XFP missing
Action Proceed to “REPLUNITMISS”
(p. 7-228)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List RFIEGR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIEGR
Description

Description Remote Client Remote Fault
Corrective Action Proceed to “RFIEGR (Remote Client
Remote Fault)” (p. 7-230)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type OC192/STM64 (client side only)
Description Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “SDBER (Signal
Degrade)” (p. 7-231)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List SDEG-O
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEG-O

Description SUPVY Signal Degrade
Corrective Action Proceed to “SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal
Degrade)” (p. 7-232)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSF
Description

Severity Levels NR
Alarm Entity Type OTU1/OTU2
Description Server Signal Failure - OTU
Action Proceed to “SSF” (p. 7-235).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List SSFODU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODU
Description

Severity Levels NR
Description Server Signal Failure - ODU
Action Proceed to “SSFODU” (p. 7-237).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWFTDWN
Description
Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the NE. This alarm is active
if the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to
commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.

Severity Levels MN
AID SYSTEM
Alarm Entity Type For SYSTEM: COM
For EC: EQPT
Description Software Upgrade in Progress
Action Proceed to “SWFTDWN” (p. 7-239)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List SWUPGCOMMIT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGCOMMIT

Severity Levels MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description No committed software load
(Autoinstall disabled)
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWUPGCOMMIT (No
committed software load (Autoinstall
disabled))” (p. 7-240)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGFAIL
Description
1 of 2

Severity Levels MN
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Software Upgrade Failed
Corrective Action Proceed to “SWUPGFAIL”
(p. 7-241)
2 of 2

Severity Levels MN
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description Software Upgrade Failed
Action Proceed to “SWUPGFAIL” (p. 7-241)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List SYSBOOT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSBOOT

Severity Levels CR
AID Type SYSTEM
Description Cold Start
Warm Start
Corrective Action Proceed to “SYSBOOT (Cold
Start/Warm Start)” (p. 7-246)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIM
Description

Severity Levels MN
11DPE12-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}
only)
OTU1/OTU2
Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU
Action Proceed to “TIM” (p. 7-247).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List TIMODU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot- {L1,L2}
Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
Action Proceed to “TIMODU” (p. 7-250).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMTMOD

Severity Levels CR
12}}
Description SFP or XFP transmit failure
Corrective Action Proceed to “TRMTMOD (Pluggable
Module Transmit Failure)” (p. 7-252)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List UNKNOWNMOD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWNMOD

Severity Levels CR
12}}
Description SFP or XFP unknown
Corrective Action Proceed to “UNKNOWNMOD
(Pluggable Module Unknown)”
(p. 7-254)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWN

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-{1-8}-{2,3}
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
SFD-{25-48}-{1}
Description Card unknown
Corrective Action Proceed to “UNKNOWN (Card
Unknown)” (p. 7-255).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List UPM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM
Description

Severity Levels CR
4DPA4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Alarm Entity Type 11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200
4DPA4: 1GBE
Description GFP User Payload Mismatch
Action Proceed to “UPM” (p. 7-259).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List URU-OTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTS

Severity Levels MJ
Description Underlying resource unavailable
Corrective Action Proceed to “URU-OTS (Underlying
Resource Unavailable)” (p. 7-260)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List URU-OTU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTU

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type 4DPA4: OTU1
Corrective Action Proceed to “URU-OTU (Underlying
resource unavailable)” (p. 7-260)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List URU-S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-S

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type 4DPA4: OTU1
AHPHG, A2325A: OTS
Corrective Action Proceed to “URU-S (Underlying
Resource Unavailable)” (p. 7-261)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List USALS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USALS
Description

Severity Levels NA
4DPA4-shelf-slot- {C{1-4}}
11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64, OTU2
4DPA4: 1GBE, FC100, FC200,
OC48/STM16, CBRAR
Description Auto laser off (client port) due to
upstream condition
Action Proceed to “USALS” (p. 7-262).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USLOS

Description Upstream Channel Absent
Corrective Action Proceed to “USLOS (Upstream
Channel Absent)” (p. 7-264)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List USOCHCOLLISION
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USOCHCOLLISION

Description Upstream Channel Collision Input
Direction
Corrective Action Proceed to “USOCHCOLLISION
(Upstream Channel Collision Input
Direction)” (p. 7-266)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List VOLTAGE[high]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[high]
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description High Input Voltage Defect
Action Proceed to “VOLTAGE[high]”
(p. 7-268).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List VOLTAGE[low]
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[low]
Description

Severity Levels CR
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Description Low Input Voltage Defect
Action Proceed to “VOLTAGE[low]”
(p. 7-269).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List VTS{1-10}LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS{1-10}LOCKOUTOFPR
Description

AID 11DPE12-shelf-slot-C{1-12}
Description VTS {1-10} lockout of protection
Action Proceed to “LOCKOUTOFPR”
(p. 7-112).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWPR
Description

Severity Levels NA
Description VTS {1-10} force switch to
protection
Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWPR”
(p. 7-87).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS{1-10}FRCDWKSWBK
Description

Severity Levels NA
Description VTS {1-10} force switch to working
Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWBK”
(p. 7-86).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List VTS{1-10}MANWKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS{1-10}MANWKSWPR
Description

Description VTS {1-10} manual switch to
protection
Action Proceed to “MANWKSWPR”
(p. 7-154).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List VTS{1-10}MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS{1-10}MANWKSWBK
Description

Description VTS{1-10} manual switch to working
Action Proceed to “MANWKSWBK”
(p. 7-153).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List VTS{1-10}WKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS{1-10}WKSWPR
Description

Description VTS{1-10} Automatic switch to
protection
Action Proceed to “WKSWPR” (p. 7-276).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List VTSFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSFDI
Description

Severity Levels NA
Alarm Entity Type 10GbE
Description VTS Forward Defect Indication
Action Proceed to “VTSFDI” (p. 7-271).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List VTSOCI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSOCI
Description

Severity Levels MJ
Alarm Entity Type 10GbE
Description TS Open Connection Indication
Action Proceed to “VTSOCI” (p. 7-272).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWBK

AID Type 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{C1-C12}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-C{1- 4}
11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16
Description Automatic switch to working
Corrective Action Proceed to “WKSWBK (Automatic
switch to working)” (p. 7-273)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm List WKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR
Description

4DPA4-shelf-slot-C{1- 4}
11QPA4: 10GBE, FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64
OC48/STM16
Description Automatic switch to protection
Action Proceed to “WKSWPR” (p. 7-276).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm List WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
7 Alarm Clearing Procedures
7
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains the trouble-clearing procedures required to clear the conditions for
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
Before you begin
Disconnecting cables and/or replacing circuit packs may disrupt service.

Before taking action, determine the extent of service disruption caused by disconnecting
cables or replacing a circuit pack. Then, perform the action(s) deemed appropriate in
light of the traffic being carried and the nature of the failure.
Many trouble-clearing procedures require actions that are service affecting. These actions
are indicated by a caution message indicating the extent of the service disruption as
shown above.
Contents
PRELIMINARY
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal) 7-7

ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal) 7-8
AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled) 7-11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRNODE (APR Active - Node) 7-13

APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition) 7-14
APRTOPO (APR Active - invalid topology) 7-15
APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting) 7-16
APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure) 7-17
APSB (APS protection switching byte failure) 7-18
APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch) 7-20
APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch) 7-23
AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure) 7-25
AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset) 7-26
B1SD 7-27
BASELINE 7-28
BDI 7-29
BDIODU 7-30
CARDINIT 7-31
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed) 7-32
CONTCOM 7-33
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) 7-35
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure) 7-37
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure) 7-39
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event) 7-41
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress) 7-42
DATAFLT 7-43
DBFL 7-45
DBFT 7-46
DBINVALID 7-47
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure) 7-49
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In-Progress) 7-50
DEG 7-51
PRELIMINARY
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered) 7-53

DORMANTUSER (User inactive) 7-54
EBER (Excessive BER) 7-55
EQPT 7-56
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure) 7-59

EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device) 7-61
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 7-63
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication 7-65
Failure)
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device) 7-67
EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load) 7-69
FACTERM-DEV 7-70
FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high) 7-72
FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low) 7-73
FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum) 7-74
FECDEG (Errored bits before FEC degrade) 7-75
FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault) 7-76
FELANLOS 7-77
FELANLSS 7-78
FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault) 7-79
FELOS 7-80
FEPORTMISMATCH 7-81
FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure) 7-82
FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure) 7-83
FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing) 7-84
FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout) 7-85
FRCDWKSWBK 7-86
FRCDWKSWPR 7-87
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to become obsolete 7-88
with the software release upgrade)
FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending) 7-89
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not the default 7-91
version for this software release)
HIBER (High BER) 7-93
PRELIMINARY
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High) 7-94

INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted) 7-95
INTEMP [over] 7-96
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTEMP [under] 7-98

INTRUSION (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts) 7-99
LANLFI (Local Fault) 7-100
LANLOS 7-102
LANLSS 7-103
LANRFI 7-104
LCK 7-106
LFD 7-107
LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault) 7-108
LINKDOWN 7-109
LOCKOUTOFPR 7-112
LOF 7-114
LOFEGR 7-119
LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF) 7-120
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low) 7-123
LOM 7-125
LOS 7-127
LOSDCM 7-134
LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS) 7-136
LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS) 7-138
LOS-OUT 7-141
LOS-P 7-144
LPBKLINE 7-146
LPBKTERM 7-147
LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization) 7-148
MAN 7-149
MANRESET (Card Manual Reset) 7-152
MANWKSWBK 7-153
MANWKSWPR 7-154
PRELIMINARY
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch) 7-155

MISMATCHMOD 7-159
MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion) 7-161
MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range) 7-163
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURV (Add power control failure) 7-164

MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade) 7-166
NET 7-167
NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed) 7-169
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH 7-170
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH 7-171
OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision) 7-172
OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction) 7-174
OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key) 7-176
OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap) 7-178
OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication) 7-179
OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator) 7-181
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name) 7-183
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect) 7-185
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected) 7-187
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected) 7-189
OCI 7-191
OPR (Channel Power Unstable) 7-192
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High) 7-194
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too Low) 7-196
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low) 7-198
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range) 7-200
OPRTX (Channel optical power out of range) 7-201
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable) 7-203
OSCSSF 7-206
PLM 7-207
PRCDRERR-TOPO 7-208
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid) 7-210
PWR 7-212
PRELIMINARY
PWRADJFAIL 7-214
PWRADJREQ 7-217
PWRMARGIN 7-219
PWRMAXGAIN 7-221
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP (Power management suspended) 7-223

PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended) 7-224
REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed) 7-225
REPLUNTMISS 7-226
REPLUNITMISS 7-228
RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault) 7-230
SDBER (Signal Degrade) 7-231
SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade) 7-232
SSF 7-235
SSFODU 7-237
SWFTDWN 7-239
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)) 7-240
SWUPGFAIL 7-241
SYSBOOT (Cold Start/Warm Start) 7-246
TIM 7-247
TIMODU 7-250
TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure) 7-252
UNKNOWN 7-254
UPM 7-259
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) 7-260
USALS 7-262
USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent) 7-264
USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction) 7-266
VOLTAGE[high] 7-268
VOLTAGE[low] 7-269
VTSFDI 7-271
VTSOCI 7-272
WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working) 7-273
WKSWPR 7-276
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal)

No C-band channels are detected at the LD Line or Sig port, but the NE has at least one
service successfully launched and the LD link has been successfully received.
ALLCHANMISS is reported if no C-Band channels are detected coming into (received
by) the amplifier Line or Sig port.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AHPHG, A2325A
Corrective action
This alarm is the result of a problem at an upstream NE or upstream span.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) to identify the probable network
trouble point for the lightpath and resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. This may
involve performing the steps in “ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)”
(p. 7-8) at the NE containing the trouble point(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the problem persists, attempt an egress adjust on the egress amplifier on the NE
identified in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate
the unexpected change in loss in the network. Refer the problem to network planning.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)

No C-Band channels are detected leaving from (transmitted by) the amplifier SIG port,
but the NE has at least one service successfully launched and the amplifier link has been
successfully received.
Severity Critical
Corrective action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure “Reseating a card” (p. 8-32).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This alarm is the result of a problem internal to this NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble point for the lightpath. This will identify the cards and ports on this NE to look at
first during this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the cards that are in the NE through path and confirm that all ports and cards on
the through path are administratively up
1. To examine the card state, enter the following command. Observe the admin state and
operational state of each of the cards along the THRU path:
CLI show slot *

PRELIMINARY
2. Set any of the cards that are administratively down to up. To bring a card Admin Up:
CLI config slot shelf slot state up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. To examine the port state, enter the following command. Observe the administrative
state and operational state of each of the ports along the THRU path:
CLI show interface brief

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port.
4. Set any of the ports that are administratively down to up. To bring a port Admin Up:
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> state up
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the status of the cross-connects that pass through the port
1. List the cross-connects:
CLI show xc brief

WEBUI Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Confirm that all cross-connects are administratively up. To bring a cross-connect

Admin Up:
CLI config xc a-end shelf slot port z-end shelf slot port
band channelstate up
3. Check for any channel alarms and resolve.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the cards and ports upstream of the LD's DCM or Line In port (that is, within
the NE for Egress amp, line port faces external to the NE for Ingress amp) are alarm free.
Resolve any alarms on cards/ports that are upstream of the LD pack, using the
information gathered in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the LD's DCM or Line In port, that the
fiber is the correct type, and that the other end of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the input power to the alarmed port is within limits:
PRELIMINARY
CLI show interface card <shelf slot port>

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the power is too low, verify that the fiber is not damaged or dirty, and clean or replace if
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem is not resolved, then replace the card. Refer to “Replacing system
components” (p. 8-2).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)

The amplifier was disabled because of a temperature problem.
Severity Critical
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there are any temperature alarms on the shelf. If so, check the airflow of the
shelf, filler card presence, and ambient air temperature. Resolve any air flow obstructions
or air-conditioner issues.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset of the card.
CLI config card card type shelf slot reset warm

WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Perform a cold reset of the card.

Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the card. Refer to “Reseating a card” (p. 8-32).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the card. Refer to “Replacing system components” (p. 8-2). Follow the return and
repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures APRNODE (APR Active - Node)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRNODE (APR Active - Node)

When an LD is used that contains a high-power optical amplifier (>20 dBm), if there is an
LOS condition within the node that could carry high power from the LD, then the output
power from the LD is reduced to a safe level. The condition will automatically clear up to
100 seconds after the LOS condition within the node has cleared. APRNODE can also
occur briefly after some other APR conditions clear.
After a condition that leads to the complete shutdown of a high-power optical amplifier
has cleared, the amplifier will be turned to a low-power setting, and the software will
check whether all monitored connections are receiving power. APRNODE will be active
during this time. Once the checks have been completed, APRNODE will clear
automatically.
Severity Major
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Proceed to “LOS” (p. 7-127) to clear the LOS condition.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APROSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition)

An LD with a high-power optical amplifier (> 20 dBm) is either at an ILA or at the egress
position at an add/drop node, and launches into a span that has either (1) OSC disabled or
(2) OSC provisioned to 100base-FX.
Severity Major
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OSC provisioning at both ends of the span by looking at the connected ingress
LD for the AHPHG/A2325A, and also at the ingress LD at the far end of the span.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set both OSCs to OC3. The condition will automatically clear within 100 seconds.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures APRTOPO (APR Active - invalid topology)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRTOPO (APR Active - invalid topology)

When an LD is used that contains a high-power optical amplifier (>20 dBm), certain ports
within the add/drop node or ILA must be monitored for possible fiber breaks. These
monitored ports check for LOS, and upon detecting LOS, cause an APRNODE condition.
Software checks that a valid topology is in place (including all necessary monitoring
ports) before allowing the LD to turn on. When a topology has been provisioned and
validated by software, the alarm will clear and the optical amplifier in the LD will be
allowed to turn on. When a topology is first being entered, the alarm will be present until
all topological connections that must be monitored have been entered. If the optical
amplifier is on, but a monitored topological connection is deleted, the optical amplifier
will shut down. It will remain off until after a new topology is created and validated by
software.
Severity Major
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a new topology.
CLI config interface topology

WEBUI Select Connections > Physical Topology > Create.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting)

A card that is monitored for APRLINE or APRNODE undergoes a soft reboot. For
APRLINE, this means the line-terminating LD card, and only applies to ILAs or add/drop
nodes with egress LDs. For APRNODE, this means any card within a node that could
receive high power from an LD equipped with a high-power optical amplifier. The optical
amplifiers will remain turned on during this condition. Transmission is not affected, but
APR is not available until the reboot has been completed.
Severity Major
Corrective action
The alarm clears automatically after the reboot has been completed. No corrective action
is required.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure)

The OSC SFP fails or is removed from a line terminating card. When this failure occurs,
APR will not function in all cases for span cuts, and recovery will not be possible. The
optical amplifiers will remain turned on during this condition. The alarm will clear when
the SFP is replaced.
Severity Major
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Replace the affected SFP.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)

An APS Protection Switching Byte Failure can occur only when the protection group is
configured for bi-directional switching. This condition indicates that the protection
switching bytes received on the protection channel contain an invalid or inconsistent
value.
Severity Not alarmed

Service affecting? No
Applicability 11QPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSB condition. Note the protection
group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a
service” (p. 8-25) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card
reporting the APSB alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
CLI config aps group <group_id> detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the directionality of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.
CLI show interface topology *

WEBUI Select Connections > Physical Topology.
2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
CLI show slot slot number
Log out of the far end NE if this solves the problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem persists, warm reset both protection cards:
CLI config cardcard_type shelf slot reset warm


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)

The expected channel has not bridged onto the protection channel at the far end as per the
switch request from the near end.
The APS channel mismatch alarm applies only to protection groups configured to perform
bidirectional switching. This alarm indicates that the far end is not responding to near-end
switch requests as expected. This can occur under any the following situations:
• the protection group is not fully configured at the far end.
• the working and protected fibers are misconnected.
• there is a service mismatch.
• the far end is currently performing a software upgrade.

Applicability 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C{1-4}}
Corrective action
NOTICE
Replacing and reconnecting optical patch cords may be service affecting. It is
recommended to replace and reconnect optical patch cords during a maintenance
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSCM condition. Note the
protection group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
reporting the APSCM alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
CLI config aps group <group_id> detail
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the direction of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.

2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
CLI show slot slot number
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Determine whether the card on the far-end NE is currently being upgraded.
CLI show software upgrade status brief

WEBUI Select Administration > Software > Upgrade and view the Status field.
PRELIMINARY
If the card is in the upgrade state then wait for upgrade to complete. The upgrade is
complete when the action progress is 100% and the action status is complete. The near
end alarm should clear after the upgrade is complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the problem persists, invoke a manual switch onto the currently active line.
1. Determine the currently active line:
CLI config aps group [x] detail
2. Perform a manual switch to the active line. For example, if the working path is
currently active then the following commands would be used.
CLI config aps group [x] manualSwitchtoworking
If the protection path is currently active then the following commands would be used.
CLI config aps group [x] manualSwitchtoprotection
3. Clear the manual switch:
CLI config aps group [x] clear

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem persists, perform a warm reset on both protection cards:
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)

An APS Mode Mismatch failure occurs when there is a mismatch of the protection
switching settings at the two ends of the span. The alarm is raised if one end is configured
for bi-directional switching while the other end is configured for unidirectional switching.
The system behavior in the alarmed state is as follows:
• The NE configured for bi-directional switching raises the APS Mode Mismatch alarm.
• The protection group operates in uni-directional switching mode until the alarm is
cleared.
The NEs must be provisioned to be either both uni-directional switching or both
bi-directional switching in order to remove the alarm.

Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the port that is reporting the APSMM alarm. This is the port at the end of the
protection group currently configured for bidirectional switching.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port that is raising the Mode
Mismatch alarm:
CLI config aps group [x] detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the network plan to determine the desired directionality for the protection group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
4 If the desired directionality for the protection group is unidirectional, change the
protection mode at the near end to uni-directional:
CLI config aps group [x] direction uni
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the desired directionality for the protection group is bi-directional, change the
protection mode at the far end to bi-directional:
1. Determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card reporting the
APSMM alarm. Perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a service”
(p. 8-25).
2. Login to the far-end NE.
3. Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port on the far end NE, as
determined in item1 above. This is the port at the end of the protection group
currently configured for uni-directional switching.
CLI config aps group [y] detail
4. Change the protection mode to bi-directional.
CLI config aps group [y] direction bi
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure)

The AUTHFAIL autonomous message is issued after an invalid login attempt is detected.
Severity TC
Applicability SYSTEM
No corrective action is required. This is a normal report caused by an invalid login

attempt.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset)

The addressed card or slot is performing an autonomous reset.
The AUTORESET condition is issued as a transient condition to inform you that a reset
of a pack has started. There is no corrective action to perform. Any failures on the pack
will be reported after the reset completes.
Severity NA
Applicability 11QPA4, 11DPE12, 4DPA4, AHPHG, A2325A, EC
Corrective Action
No corrective action is required for AUTORESET. However, if repeated AUTORESET
events are reported against a single card, reseat the card. If the condition persists, replace
the card.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures B1SD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B1SD
The OT port has detected Excessive BER on the OC-192/STM-64 port of the 11QPA4
card. This defect indicates that a local OC-192/STM-64 port has detected a BER that
exceeds selected threshold. The default value is 10-6 for STM-64.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Damaged or dirty receiver inside pluggable module
Severity Major
This procedure details the corrective action for an B1SD against the OT port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure, “SDBER (Signal Degrade)” (p. 7-231) to clear this
alarm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures BASELINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BASELINE
The BASELINE autonomous message is a transient condition issued after a analog PM
baseline operation is executed.
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range
• The data rate may be inconsistent
Severity TC
No corrective action is required. This is a normal report caused by an analog PM baseline

operation.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures BDI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDI
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the OTUk Section layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF or LOM would contribute to SSF)
• An improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk
port transmitter and the far end receiver
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Severity Not reported

Applicability 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the alarms/conditions along the OCh trail.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU1/OTU2), request corrective action by client
operators.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures BDIODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIODU
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI or
ODU-LCK would contribute to SSF).
port transmitter and the far end receiver

Applicability 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU1/OTU2), request corrective action by client
operators.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures CARDINIT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT
CARDINIT (Card Initializing)
The card is in the process of initializing:
Severity CR
Applicability 4DPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by another card alarm.

No corrective action is required.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed)
Severity TC
Applicability All OTs and amplifier cards
No corrective action is required. This is a message caused by a card boot failure.

Troubleshoot the equipment alarms detected.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTCOM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM
CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication)
The NE has detected the presence of a card, but is unable to establish internal
communications with it. Possible causes for this alarm are:
• a faulty card
• a problem with the backplane
• a cable has been cut or disconnected from one end or the other
• the sub-tended shelf has been turned off
• the alarm panel on the sub-tended shelf has been extracted
• Fan, PPS: card not communicating with the controller hardware
• loss of power to 1/2 the shelf
This condition may be accompanied by system timing-related or card sanity conditions.
Severity Critical (Minor if inactive protected card)

11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Refer to “CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)” (p. 2-51). Note: If this alarm
is present on a card when the master shelf Equipment Controller undergoes a reset or a
switch of activity, this alarm re-appears as a Card missing alarm. Refer to
“REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)” (p. 2-291).
Corrective Action
Refer to “CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)” (p. 7-34).
Note: If this alarm is present on a card when the master shelf controller hardware
undergoes a reset or a switch of activity, this alarm reappears as a Card missing alarm.
Refer to “REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)” .
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)
The active master shelf Equipment Controller has determined that the communications
link to a provisioned subtended shelf is down. This alarm may be raised for any of the
following reasons: • Failure of the intershelf timing and control cable • Disconnected or
missing intershelf timing and control cable • Subtended shelf loss of power • Both
subtended shelf Equipment Controllers are either failed or missing
The active master shelf Equipment Controller has determined that the communications
link to a provisioned subtended shelf is down. This alarm may be raised for any of the
following reasons:
• Failure of the intershelf timing and control cable
• Disconnected or missing intershelf timing and control cable
• Subtended shelf loss of power
• Both subtended shelf Equipment Controllers are either failed or missing
Severity Critical
Applicability SHELF-{2-8}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the intershelf timing and control cable on the active master shelf controller and
observe the link status LED on the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the cable is connected and the link status LED is off, verify that the cable is properly
connected at both ends and reconnect it if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the link status LED remains off when the cable is reconnected, verify that the
subtended shelf is powered on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the subtended shelf is powered on and the cable is connected but the link status LED
remains off, ensure that there is at least one working Equipment Controller in the
subtended shelf (both Activity and Status LEDs should be green). Do not proceed until
PRELIMINARY
there is a working Equipment Controller in the subtended shelf. Once there is at least one
working Equipment Controller in the subtended shelf, replace the intershelf
communications and timing cable and see if the link comes back up.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)

The CONTEQPT condition indicates a fault on the Equipment Controller that has caused
the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared due to a failure
in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures. This is a major non-service affecting
alarm for the Equipment Controller and causes a redundancy switch to the mate.
Severity Major
Applicability Equipment Controller
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)

The Wavelength Tracker on this card has detected an internal fault. The Wavelength
Tracker information generated may be inaccurate. Channels may be declared absent
and/or detected channels powers for this channel instance may not accurately represent
the actual channel power.
Severity Minor
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker information for the detect points
on-card are invalid.
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
PRELIMINARY
failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection

failure)
The Wavelength Tracker on this card has detected an internal DSP fault. The Wavelength
Tracker information generated may be inaccurate. Channels may be declared absent
and/or detected channel powers for this channel instance may not accurately represent the
actual channel power.
Severity Minor
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, wavelength tracking information for the detect
points on the card are invalid.
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures CRDINIT (Card Identification Event)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event)

The CRDINIT transient condition indicates that a new card has been inserted in the 1830
PSS-4. It will be followed by the CARDINIT standing condition as the card begins
initialization.
Severity TC
Applicability All cards
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress)

The database backup is in-progress. The NE will raise the DBBKUP-IP standing
condition during database backup, at the start of the file transfer
Severity NA
Corrective action
The NE will clear the DBBKUP-IP standing condition when the database backup file
transfer has completed successfully, failed, or been cancelled.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures DATAFLT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAFLT
DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)
The Card Provisioning Failure may be raised if a card rejects the provisioning parameters
given to it by the integrated control hardware upon a reset or due to a user provisioning
action. This may indicate a discrepancy on the database of the control hardware or may
indicate a problem with the software.
The card, against which the DATAFLT condition is raised, may not be able to provide
services since some or all of the provisioning parameters were rejected.
Severity Major
Applicability A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there is a software mismatch on the NE. If so, resolve the software issue
first. The NE should be running with a committed software load.
PRELIMINARY
CLI show software upgrade status alm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAFLT condition raised against it:
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBFL
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFL
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure)
A download of a database backup from the remote file server (part of the database restore
process) will fail if there is not enough free space on the Active Main Equipment
Controller’s flash memory, and a database failure condition-local will be raised (DBFL).
If the temporary database cannot be read (meaning that the database cannot be transported
to the RFS), a database failure condition-local is set.
Severity Minor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retry the database backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Contact your next level of support.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFT
DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure)
If the file transfer of the database to the remote file server does not succeed, a database
failure condition-transport is set.
Severity Minor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retry the database backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBINVALID
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBINVALID
DBINVALID (Database invalid)
When the DBINVALID condition is raised, the NE is not in a normal operating mode. As
a result, the NE does not boot normally and not all commands are allowed.
The DBINVALID condition may be raised as a result of the following:
• During initial installation, if the NE is not properly commissioned.
• The serial number in the database does not match that of the NE either because the
controller was replaced or the alarm card was replaced.
• A downgrade of NE software has occurred.
• The database audit failed indicating some type of corruption of the database.
Severity Major
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this is a result of a downgrade, then follow the appropriate procedure to restore the
pre-upgrade database to the Equipment Controller.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If this is the result of a user panel replacement, a database backup (previously saved for
this NE) must be restored to the NE from a remote database backup and restore server,
with the special keyword "force".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The steps are as follows:
1. Re-provision the user panel OADM port details for this NE.
2. Re-provision the static routing and gateway information for this NE.
3. Re-provision the database server information, refer to the for the database backup and
restore procedure.
4. Enter the CLI command config database restore force to bring the database
from a remote server to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the DBINVALID condition is present as a result of the replacement of a Equipment

Controller, and there is no protection Equipment Controller, then follow then follow the
appropriate procedure to restore the database to the Equipment Controller.
Note: It is crucial to have the backup database be a duplicate of the one running on
the NE prior to replacing the Equipment Controller. Any data not backed up will be
lost and may result in lost services and interruption in traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Review of the NE logs may provide an indication of the corruption of the database by
way of a failed audit function resulting in CRC errors. If the DBINVALID condition is
present due to a corruption of the database, then follow the appropriate procedure to
restore the database to the Equipment Controller from a valid database backup file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure)

The Active Equipment Controller is unable to synchronize its database with the inactive
Equipment Controller. This alarm may be raised under the following conditions:
• An incorrectly seated Equipment Controller
• The software loads on the active and inactive Equipment Controllers are not
compatible
• A hardware problem with one or both controllers
Severity Major
Applicability Equipment Controller, System
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the software load on each of the two Equipment Controllers and verify that they
match. If the loads are different, force the Equipment Controller with the incorrect load to
upgrade to the correct running load.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the Equipment Controller with the condition and examine the connector on the
back of the card for damage, including bent or broken pins.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the connector on the backplane for damage. If there is damage to the backplane
of the shelf, contact your service representative.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-insert the Equipment Controller into its original slot and allow the card to initialize.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for the second Equipment Controller.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the Equipment Controller with the DBMEMTRF condition with a new unit. If
PRELIMINARY
the condition is not cleared, replace the second Equipment Controller with a new unit.
Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In-Progress)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In-Progress)
Severity Minor
Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures DEG
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEG
DEG (Signal Degrade - ODU)
The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Path layer. This defect indicates that local
OTUk port has detected Path layer BER which exceeds 10-6.
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail
Severity Major
11DPE12-shelf-slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
PRELIMINARY
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects DEG condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of the OT, and the power level is within the
operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the pluggable module.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered)
Severity Major
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures DORMANTUSER (User inactive)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DORMANTUSER (User inactive)

The DORMANTUSER condition is a user login inactivity timeout (maximum interval
that the user is inactive, without logging into the NE, before the userID is disabled).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 This user may be deleted from the NE by using one of the following commands:
CLI config admin users delete

WEBUI Select Administration > Security> Users, select the user, and click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EBER (Excessive BER)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBER (Excessive BER)

The OT port has detected Excessive BER on the OC-192/STM-64 port of the 11QPA4
card. This defect indicates that local port has detected a BER that exceeds selected
threshold (default 10-3).
Severity Critical
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for an EBER condition against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT
EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
The Card Failure - Device alarm text for the EQPT condition indicates a fault on the card
that has caused the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared
due to a failure in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on the card
type the alarm is raised against. This is a critical service affecting alarm for cards carrying
traffic and affects the traffic currently flowing through the failed device.
Severity Control card - Major. All other cards - Critical

Service affecting? Control card - No. All other cards - Yes
11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
SFD-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If this
condition is raised against the alarm panel or a fan tray, then after each step perform a
warm reset of the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset

warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a card cold reset.

CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the alarm is against:

• A replaceable card — Replace the card. Follow the return and repair process to return
the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement. Go to Step 7.
• PSS1GBE, PSS1MD4, or PSS1AHP card types —
Failure may be caused by a defective SFP or XFP, remove the SFP and XFP modules
and go to Step 2 to reset the shelf. If the removal and reset clears the EQPT condition
replace the defective SFP or XFP. Go to Step 7.
If removing the SFP or XFP modules and reseting does not clear the condition
replacement of the entire Edge Device is required. Proceed to the following steps for
the Unit Replacement procedure.
• EC card types — Replacement of the entire Edge Device is required. Proceed to the
following steps for the Unit Replacement procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Complete Procedure 3-6: “Verify installation and seat packs” (p. 3-20) through Procedure
3-13: “Set the network element date and time” (p. 3-35) in Chapter 3, “Stand-alone node
set-up” in this document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure and fiber the edge device to the original configuration.

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Follow the database restore procedure in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User
Provisioning Guide document using the FORCE option.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Stop. You have completed this procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
Severity Critical
Applicability 11DPE12-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
Corrective action
NOTICE
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If this
condition is raised against the user panel or a fan tray, then after each step warm reset the
active Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device)

The Card Degrade-Device alarm text for the EQPTDGR condition indicates a fault on the
card that has caused the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be
declared due to a failure in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on
the card type the alarm is raised against.
The Card Degrade-Device alarm text indicates a lower priority fault on the card that does
not directly affect the traffic currently flowing through the device.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - device)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
PRELIMINARY
Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker

Communications with the Wavelength Tracker feature on this card are unreliable. This
means that any Wavelength Tracker information sent (for example, configuration
changes) or generated may be incorrect.
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker provisioning and information
on the card are invalid.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker

Communications with the Wavelength Tracker feature on this card are unreliable. This
means that any Wavelength Tracker information sent (for example, configuration
changes) or generated may be incorrect.
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker provisioning and information
on the card are invalid.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device)

The Port Failure - Device alarm text indicates a port initialization failure on the network
ports (10G ports).
Severity Critical
11DPE12
4DPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to “Replacing an SFP module” (p. 8-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load)

The EXCESSLOAD condition indicates the last card inserted draws an additional current
load on the shelf that exceeds the current limit of the equipped power filters. The pack in
the affected slot will not initialize and operate.
Severity Critical
Applicability 4DPA4,
A2325A,
AHPHG
Equipment Controller
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the pack that is reporting the alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Do one of the following:

• Remove load to a level below the capacity of the provisioned power entry cards, or
• Upgrade the power filters to a higher current capacity (if the supply wiring is
sufficiently rated for the current).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Reprovision the shelf capacity attribute (EXPECTED_AMPS) with the new value.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV
FACTERM-DEV (SFP SEEP Failure)
The SFP SEEP Failure condition is raised when the system cannot communicate with the
SFP to determine such information as power level and laser types. This condition is
equivalent to a port degrade, and service is not impacted until/unless a subsequent reset
occurs.
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2},C{1-12}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4}, VA{1-2}}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Carefully remove and re-seat the SFP that is reporting the FACTERM-DEV condition.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap the fiber jumpers connected to the SFP unit and replace the SFP with
another unit of the same type. Reconnect the fiber jumpers as they were before.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FACTERM-DEV
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high)

This alarm indicates when the fan speed is too high based upon the current shelf cooling
requirements.
Severity Minor
Applicability FAN
Corrective action
Fan Speed is Too High

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for fan obstruction, and clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reseat the fan tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If no problems are found, replace the fan tray.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low)

This alarm indicates when the fan speed is either too low based upon the current shelf
cooling requirements.
Severity Minor
Applicability FAN
Corrective action
Fan Speed is Too Low

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for airflow blockage or a dirty filter, and clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If no problems are found, replace the fan tray.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum)
Severity Minor
Applicability FAN
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FECDEG (Errored bits before FEC degrade)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECDEG (Errored bits before FEC degrade)
Severity Minor
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault)

The Far End OT port has detected a LAN Local Fault Indication ordered set at its input.
This condition typically indicates Ethernet link down condition on the client equipment
connected to the far-end port.
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end client equipment receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end
• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT

Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for FELANLFI against the OT port. At the
end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the Far end client OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Proceed with the procedure for clearing LANLFI (see “LANLFI (Local Fault)”
(p. 7-100)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLOS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLOS
FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal)
The Far End OT port has detected LAN LOS at its input.
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input
Severity Not Alarmed

Applicability 11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}, C{1-4}}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELALOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end client OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 7-102).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLSS
FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)
Far End OT port has detected LA Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization at its input.

Applicability 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLSS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLSS” (p. 7-103).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault)

The Far End OT port has detected a LAN Remote Fault Indication ordered set at its input.
This condition typically indicates Ethernet link down condition on the client equipment
connected to the far-end port.

Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANRFI ” (p. 7-104).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FELOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELOS
FELOS (Far End Loss of Signal)
The Far End OT port has detected a CBRAR signal (e.g. FE or HD-DSI LOS) at a client
port input.

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 7-102).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FEPORTMISMATCH
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPORTMISMATCH
FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch)
The Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm text for the FEPORTMISMATCH condition
indicates two client ports assigned to a protection group are not provisioned the same.
Time slot assignments are wrong, such that a service does not appear on the same client
ports at the two ends of a point-to-point link. Or corresponding ports at the two ends are
not provisioned for the same signal rate and format. The condition is listed against the
near end port.
Severity Critical
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the two ports in the protection group at the near end, and the two ports at the far
end.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Provision the near end and far end ports with the same signal rate and format. When client
signals are not GBE, the ODU0INTERWK parameter must be set to DISABLE. ODU0
interworking is only valid for GbE traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the timeslot assignments so that the same ports are used at both ends. For
example, the near end port C3 must be connected to far end port C3.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure)

The FEPRLF condition is far end protection failure in Y-cable switching. The far end
node detects a problem on the protection side of a Y-cable protection group, and
communicates this fact to the near end node. The near end node raises the FEPRLF
condition. Troubleshooting should be done on the far end node.
Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. Do all
steps at the far end node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
CLI show aps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for faults on the protection side line port, or the protection side card.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List >Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
no faults are present, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure)

The FPGAFAIL alarm is raised when a corrupted firmware file is downloaded to the card
or the FPGA fails to program correctly.
Severity CR
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the FPGAFAIL condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing)

The FPGAINIT condition occurs when firmware for each programmable device on a card
is downloaded and FPGA programming is in progress.
Severity NA
Service affecting? No (However, a cold reset of the card issued to initiate FPGA
programming is service affecting if the card is currently
carrying services.)
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 No steps are required to clear the FPGAINIT alarm. Some FPGA programming steps can
take as long as 45 minutes. Monitor progress using one of the following commands:
CLI show firmware upgrade

WEBUI Select Reports > Firmware.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout)

The FPGATIMEOUT alarm is raised when the card fails to download firmware and
complete FPGA programming in a period of time (about 45 minutes).
Severity MN
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the FPGATIMEOUT condition is raised.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK
FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working)
This is a standing condition indicating that a forced switch back to the working is active.
The forced switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
forced switch to work request within a protection group. A forced switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail state.
Clearing the manual switch clears the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared forced switch back to work leaves the switch position on work.

Applicability 11DPE12-shelf-slot-{C1-C12}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI show aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the forced switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FRCDWKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWPR
FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection)
This is a standing condition indicating a forced switch to protect is active.
The forced switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a forced switch to protect request within a protection group. A forced switch
to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect facility is in
the signal fail state. A forced switch to protect also prevents reversion to the working path
from occurring. Clearing the forced switch clears the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch occurs to the work facility immediately after the forced
switch has cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the forced switch.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to
become obsolete with the software release upgrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to

become obsolete with the software release upgrade)
The FWPENDINGOBSOLETE condition is raised against any pack which would be
running an obsolete firmware bundle version after the software release upgrade.
Severity NA
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Provision a firmware bundle that will be valid after software upgrade or provision the
default firmware bundle for the card (see “Corrective action” (p. 7-91)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)

A pack will have a FWUPGRADEPENDING active if the pack's firmware has been
provisioned, but not loaded. Thus, the provisioned firmware bundle is not the same as the
version currently in the FPGA.
The two 4DPA4 cardmodes (FlexMux and DualTran) each have their own separate
firmware lines. When cardmode is provisioned, the default version of the appropriate
firmware line is loaded automatically. Thus, FWUPGRADEPENDING may also apply to
a mismatch between the provisioned 4DPA4 cardmode value and the current FPGA
contents.
Severity NA
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To initiate a cold reset to download the recommended firmware version for the affected
pack, perform a cold reset of the card.

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is
PRELIMINARY
not the default version for this software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not

the default version for this software release)
The pack will have a FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT active if any firmware bundle it is
running is not the latest default bundle version listed for that pack in the active (running)
software release. This alarm condition occurs when the firmware loaded on the pack is
not the default firmware bundle for this pack in this software release and also if the
software release is upgraded but the firmware has not been upgraded.
The two 4DPA4 cardmodes (FlexMux and DualTran) each have their own separate
firmware lines. When cardmode is provisioned, the default version of the appropriate
firmware line is loaded automatically. Thus, FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT may also
apply to firmware that is not the default for the current cardmode value of the 4DPA4
pack.
This alarm condition clears when the default firmware bundle for the active software
release is loaded on the programmable devices.
Severity NA
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the default firmware bundle is provisioned for the card.
PRELIMINARY
CLI show firmware card card_type shelf slot detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is
not the default version for this software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the default firmware bundle is not provisioned in the previous step, then provision the
default firmware bundle for the card.
CLI config firmware card card_type shelf slot config firmware card
card_type shelf slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures HIBER (High BER)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIBER (High BER)

The OT port has detected a High BER on 10GbE LAN facility. This defect indicates that
local 10GbE LAN port has detected BER > 10-4 (high BER defect is triggered when
more than 16 invalid 64B/66B sync headers get detected within 125us).
Severity Critical
Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a HIBER condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High)

An amplifier is operating outside of the normal operating range. The ingress power to the
amplifier plus the programmed gain (both in dB's) has exceeded the maximum allowable
output power supported by the amplifier. This can occur only if the amplifier output
power limiting function and the output overload function have both failed.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
None. This is a transitory alarm that is raised for a maximum of 30 seconds while the
amplifier attempts to limit the output power. If after 30 seconds the output power cannot
be limited, a “CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)” (p. 7-35) alarm is raised.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted)
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [over]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTEMP [over]
INTEMP (Card over temperature)
A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,
fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed
sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature
(measured by temperature sensors on the card).
Severity Minor
Applicability 12325A-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
Note: It may take many minutes for any corrective actions to lower the temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that no fan alarms. Correct any faults found.
CLI show fan * alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the 1354RM-PhM or web interface to verify the speed of each of the fans in the shelf.
Normal fan speed is between 3000 and 3500 RPM; in the event of a temperature fault or
fan failure the remaining fan speeds will automatically increase to over 4000 RPM. If the
fan speed is in the normal range while the high temperature alarm is active, contact your
service representative.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Visually inspect the shelf to confirm that all filler cards are installed in all empty slots in
PRELIMINARY
the unit. This helps ensure proper airflow.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check for a dirty air filter. Replace it as necessary. Do not clean or wash the filter; use a
new one. Contact your service representative for replacement filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [over]
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use a thermometer to measure the ambient air temperature at the intake of the fans. Verify
that the ambient temperature is not abnormally high. If the ambient temperature is too
high, the NE may require additional cooling to bring it back to an acceptable operating
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their upper limit (within 10°C).
CLI show card <sh/sl>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the alarm cannot be cleared, replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [under]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTEMP [under]
INTEMP (Card under temperature)
The card temperature is below operational limits. There may be a climate control or
sensor failure. This alarm is raised when the card is under the specified operating
temperature (measured by temperature sensors on the card). The network element
requires additional heating to bring it back to an acceptable operating temperature.
Severity Minor
Applicability 12325A-shelf-slot
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that no environmental issues are present where the network element resides.
Resolve any existing issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their lower limit (within 10° C).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the alarm cannot be cleared, replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures INTRUSION (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSION (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts)

The INTRUSION condition occurs when the maximum number of consecutive invalid
login attempts has been reached.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disable the user in the User Security Database by using one of the following commands:
CLI config admin users edit

TL1 INH- USER-SECU
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLFI (Local Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLFI (Local Fault)

A Local Fault (LANLFI) condition may be raised on a client or network port of an
Ethernet card and is attributed to a fault detected between the far-end transmitter and
near-end receiver. When an LANLFI is raised at the receive port, this serves to notify the
user of a fault somewhere upstream of the port where the LANLFI condition has been
raised.

Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4, SFP, XFP
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the LANLFI condition has been raised on a client port, verify that the source is
correctly transmitting the Ethernet signal. Refer to its manufacturer's documentation for
any corrective actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the LANLFI condition has been raised on a Network port, retrieve the alarm
information from the upstream path to determine if any failure is present. If there is an
indication of failure upstream of the port where the LANLFI is raised, fix this problem
first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LANLFI condition is raised.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLFI (Local Fault)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LANLFI condition is raised.
CLI config card card type shelf slot reset cold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to “Replacing system components” (p. 8-2).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLOS
LANLOS (LAN port LOS)
OT port has detected LOS on Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel facility. This defect
indicates loss of optical power at the input of the local LAN port.
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module
Severity Critical
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLOS condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine fiber and connector to the local port input.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If fiber is damaged or cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for
detected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLSS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS
LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization)
LAN LSS is caused by dirty fiber or wrong signal feed into the GbE port (e.g., OC192).
Severity Critical
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To clear it, one should clean the fiber or correct the signal sent from upstream equipment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANRFI
LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication)
An LANRFI condition may be raised on a client or network port of a transponder card
and may be attributed to a fault on the remote device (the equipment connected to the
client or network port). The remote device is either detecting a problem on its receive link
or has some sort of local fault and is generating an LANRFI in the downstream direction.

NOTICE
A cold reset or replacement of a unit is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying
services.
If there are services currently carried over the unit, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or re-seating it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve alarms and conditions for the local node that has the RFI condition on its receive
port. Examine them and identify faults on the services supporting the devices that have
the RFI condition. Resolve any issues with respect to these faults first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 for the far end device. Examine the devices associated with the same
services as in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the local card where the LANRFI condition is raised.
CLI
PRELIMINARY
config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LANRFI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset on the upstream device that is sending the LANRFI condition. (See
caution at the beginning of this procedure.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset on the local card where the LANRFI condition is raised. (See caution
at the beginning of this procedure.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset on the upstream device that is sending the LANRFI condition. (See
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Re-seat the local card. If this does not fix the problem, re-seat the far-end card. (See
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the alarmed card. Follow the return and repair process to return the card to an
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCK
LCK (Locked - OTU)
OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that
network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has locked the ODUk
payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has caused insertion
of LCK maintenance signal.
Severity Critical
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
11STAR1 client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LFD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFD
LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation)
An OT port has detected a Loss of GFP frame Delineation. This defect indicates that the
bit stream in the payload area used for GFP transport has degraded to the point where the
boundaries of GFP frames can no longer be reliably detected.
• A failure in the OCh trail used for transporting GFP layer
• A malfunction of the source or sync. GFP function
Severity SA
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Inspect the OCh trail which is used as a server transport layer for GFP stream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any alarms are detected on OCh trail, locate the farthest upstream point and follow the
procedure for clearing this alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Locate the far end OT that sources the GFP stream.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a soft reset of both local and far-end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If Step 4 does not clear the problem replace far-end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If Step 5 does not clear the problem replace the local OT.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault)

OT port has detected LFI ordered set on 10GBE LAN service transported over OTUk in
transmit direction.
This may be caused if the remote client equipment is generating LFI ordered set.
Severity NA
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LFIEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLFI (Local Fault)” (p. 7-100) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKDOWN
LINKDOWN (Link down)
The Ethernet link between devices is out of service. This alarm is raised in the following
conditions:
• On Ethernet ports with auto-negotiation enabled when the Ethernet link is down.
Severity Control card (integrated): Not alarmed

10GigE: Critical
Service affecting? Control card (integrated): No
10GigE: Yes
EC-1-{1,18}-CIT
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the source of the LINKDOWN condition to the associated card and port upstream.
Verify that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state
is Up, then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.
EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card’s

PRELIMINARY
client receive port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber from the port where the LINKDOWN condition is raised and clean the
fiber and the bulkhead connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 2 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the fiber jumper with a new one.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Re-seat the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Re-seat the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Replace the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Tips to perform the Corrective action

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the source is operational up.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the cable/fibre is plugged in correctly.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the other end is plugged into a matching Ethernet source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that cable/fibre is the correct type for the Ethernet port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If a cable/fibre tester is available check that the cable/fibre is correct, otherwise try
another cable/fibre.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFPR
LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)
The Lockout Of Protection condition occurs when a user initiates a lockout switch request
within a protection group.
A lockout forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment and prevents protection
switching from occurring. Clearing the lockout will again allow protection switching to
take place and will result in the lockout condition being cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location of the protection group member that
has the active condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
reporting the LOCKOUTOFPR alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to determine the
identity of the protection group involved in the active condition.
CLI show aps group *
Note the APS group ID / AIDs of the APS group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the following command on both the near-end and far-end NEs and verify that the
PRELIMINARY
protection path is alarm free. Use the group ID/AID identified in Step 4.
CLI show aps group <x>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOCKOUTOFPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Determine if there are any outstanding alarms on the system pertaining to the service.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clear all of the active alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Clear the lockout request.
CLI config aps group [x] clear
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
A receive port on one of the optical cards has detected a Loss Of Frame. The LOF alarm
is raised if:
• the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2 overhead bytes as per the
SONET specification
• the OTN framer detects corruption in the Framing Alignment Signal (FAS) bytes.
• an improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber
• the received power may not be within the acceptable range
• the data rate may be inconsistent
Severity Critical
NOTICE
Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the optical receive power on the port where the LOF condition is present.
CLI show interface shelf slot port

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port that it is connected to. Check that the
source is a compatible type with the same line rate as expected at the receive port. Also
verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (refer to the source
equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical
power meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the
output power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the
instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
CLI config interface OT_pack shelf slot port state
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOF is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the required using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
threshold, procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
the optical power is within the required clean the receive connector on the card.
limits,
If the LOF condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card warm reset of the OT exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the client port has an SFP or XFP installed, verify the SFP or XFP (this includes
checking the SFP or XFP and replacing if necessary; do this before cold reset or re-seat as
it does not affect other client signals).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold resetOT exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble-point for the light-path. The procedure guides the user through the investigation
and resolution of the problem tracing back through to the source of the light path.
If the problem is the head end of the path (the transponder card at the source) then:
1. Check the add E for conditions against the OT port and resolve any issues.
2. Verify that the source card network-facing port is administratively UP and
transmitting.
3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,
verify that the light source is compatible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the
same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the
encapsulation mode is the same for both).
CLI show interface shelf slot port (perform at both the near and far ends)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If encapsulation does not match, then configure the incorrect side to match up.
CLI config interface 11DPE12 shelf slot

shelf slot/C1 tengige encmode [ cbrlan11.049 | cbrlan11.096 | gfp-f | gfp-p ]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that there are no channel alarms or conditions for this channel on the near-end E.
If there are, clear them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Query for the optical receive power on the network port where the LOF condition is
present.
CLI sh int shelf slot port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Confirm that the drop path is fibered correctly:

1. Confirm that the network port of the transponder is fibered to the appropriate port on
the appropriate OT.
2. Confirm that the mux port of the OT is fibered to the appropriate port on the
appropriate CWR8.
3. Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the alarmed port.
4. Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other
end of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a line loopback on the far end network port. If this resolves the local (near-end)
alarm then the problem is associated with the far end card.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a card warm reset of the transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a card cold reset of the transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOFEGR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFEGR
LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress)
An OT port has detected Loss of Frame on CBR2G5 (transparent OC48/STM16) or
CBR10G (transparent STM64) service transported over OTUk in transmit direction.
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input.
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end.
Severity NA
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LOFEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LOF” (p. 7-114) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)

The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Frame.
The LOF-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2
overhead bytes as per the SONET specification
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range
Severity Major
Corrective action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOF-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the LOF-O condition is present.
CLI show interface <shelf slot port>

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired
port.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the adjacent node is provisioned for OC3 format of the OSC signal. Also
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the receive port where
the LOF-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
threshold for the type of pluggable module procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
installed power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOF-O condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Frame.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the OSC SFP located inside the amplifier. See “Replacing an SFP module”
(p. 8-4). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
PRELIMINARY
to return the faulty pluggable module to an authorized repair center for replacement.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain
PRELIMINARY
too low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain

too low)
The ingress power to the amplifier added to the programmed gain (both in dB's) is lower
than the minimum allowable power supported by the amplifier.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) and locate the likely point that is the
cause of the LOGAIN alarm. This may be on the upstream NE or the local one. Retrieve
alarms and conditions and, using the appropriate corrective actions, resolve these issues
first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an egress or ingress amplifier adjust, depending on the type of amplifier that is
raising this alarm. If any adjust fails, there may be other optical power related alarms that
are raised as a result. Resolve these issues by following the appropriate procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It is possible that the gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient
to accommodate the unexpected change in loss in the network. Capture the current
PRELIMINARY
operating state of the network, using the 1354RM-PhM XML network export feature.
Refer the problem to network planning for analysis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain
too low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If this does not resolve the issue, then the problem may be with the card itself. Perform a
warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOM
LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)
This alarm is raised at an OT port when the OT receiver cannot synchronize to a
multiframe indicator of an incoming OTUk bit stream.
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on OT port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the OT
• Problem at the upstream OT
Severity Major
NOTICE
A cold reset is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying services.
maintenance window before resetting or replacing the unit.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOM declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOM condition is present.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/port>
If the power is below a minimum threshold, the problem may be upstream from that port.
PRELIMINARY
Visually inspect the OT port connection. Ensure that there are no loose fibers. If so,
connect the fiber properly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the immediate upstream OT for any alarm conditions. If there are any, clear the
failures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a card warm reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the OT. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS
LOS (Loss of signal)
The corrective actions for the loss of signal condition are dependent upon the AID where
the condition is raised. The procedure addresses each of these.
The LOS can be against a client or network port. The following procedures address both
possibilities.
• LOS against a Network Port
• LOS against a Client Port
• LD input LOS
Severity Critical
Applicability EC-1-1
SFC-shelf-slot-OMD
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-4;{VA 1-4}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1-C4; VA1, VA2}
LOS against a Client Port:

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the optical receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
CLI show int<shelf/slot/port>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the power is below the minimum threshold, the problem is upstream from that port.
the power is within acceptable limits, the problem is with the card itself. Proceed to
Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port and that it is on. Check that the source
is a compatible type (for example, if you are expecting a single-mode fiber signal (either
1310 or 155x nm), check that the source is not a multi-mode fiber signal (typically 850
nm).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note: Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to
source equipment manufacturer’s procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove
the fiber from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using
an optical power meter.
If... Then...
the output power is within continue with Step 5.
acceptable limits,
the output power is not within the problem is with the source. Follow the instructions on
acceptable limits, debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is admin up. If it is up, then toggle the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Note: Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure
the optical power.
PRELIMINARY
If... Then...
power again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the unit.
If the LOS condition is still present, the problem may be with the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a warm reset of the unit exhibiting the Loss of Signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove the SFP from the port on the unit in which it is inserted. Examine the connector
on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the unit where the SFP plugs into for any
damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Remove and replace the SFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with the
connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Perform a cold reset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS against a Network Port:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) procedure to identify the probable network
trouble-point for the light-path. If after investigating, the source of the problem is the
head end of the path (the transponder at the source) then:
1. Check the Add NE for conditions against the SFC-OMD port and resolve any issues.
2. Verify that the source network-facing port is administratively UP and transmitting.
3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,
verify that the light source is compatible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the
same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the
encapsulation mode is the same for both).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to source
equipment manufacturer’s procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source and verify the output power using an optical power
meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the output
power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the
instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is admin up. If it is up, then toggle the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power. If the optical power is below the required threshold, clean the fiber, and measure
the power again. If the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive
connector on the unit. If the LOS condition is still present, the problem is in the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset of the head end transponder and source exhibiting the Loss of
Signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Remove the SFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the connector
on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP plugs into for any
damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove and replace the SFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with the
connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: Refer to the caution at the beginning of the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD input LOS:
The LINE port on an amplifier card has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm is
raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify if there is a DCM module connected between the DCM OUT and DCM IN ports
and replace the module, if present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If... Then...
the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold for the type of SFP installed: LINE cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
Normal Range: -32.0 dBm (LINE Normal measure the power again.
Range)
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the unit. If the
LOS condition is still present, the problem
may be with the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset of the unit exhibiting the Loss of Signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a cold reset of the unit exhibiting the Loss of Signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSDCM
LOSDCM
The From DCM port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The
LOS alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity Critical
Applicability A2325A-shelf-slot-dcm
AHPHG-shelf-slot-dcm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI show interface shelf slot port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on remove the fiber from the port where the LOS is raised and
the system measure the optical power.
the optical power is more than using the standard optical fiber jumper cleaning procedure,
15 dB below the level coming clean the fiber, and measure the power again.
PRELIMINARY
out of the amplifier DCM port

the optical power is within the clean the receive connector on the card. If the LOS condition
required limits is still present, the problem may be with the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOSDCM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a card warm reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card cold reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)

The SIG port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm
is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
Severity Critical
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the SIG port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical power.
If... Then...
PRELIMINARY
the optical power is below the threshold of using the standard optical fiber jumper
-3.0 dBm cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
measure the power again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
LOS condition is still present, the problem
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card exhibiting the Loss of Signal.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)

The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal.
The LOS-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2
overhead bytes as per the SONET specification
On a fiber span, the OSC mode should match on both ends. If the rates do not match,
LOS-O is raised on one end, and Data Link Down (see “NET” (p. 7-167) is raised on the
other end.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the LOS-O condition is present.

PRELIMINARY
port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the adjacent node is provisioned for OC3 format of the OSC signal. Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the LOS-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed measure the power again.
LOS-O condition is still present, the problem
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-OUT
LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel Absent)
The provisioned channel could not be detected at a Wavelength Tracker detect point. The
channel is either missing, operating at a power that is outside the detectable range, or
wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT/SVAC. Assuming that the
Wavelength Tracker information is correctly provisioned, this alarm may be raised if:
• the channel is not launched
• the received channel power is outside of the detectable power sensitivity range.
• the intra-node fiber connections do not match the physical topology
• the fiber is damaged.
This alarm can also be raised in the following circumstances:
• the OT or SVAC fails to encode the correct wavekeys
• a card capable of wavekey decoding is faulty
Severity Critical
Applicability A2325A-shelf-slot-LINE
A2325A-shelf-slot-{SIG, LINE}-freq
AHPHG-shelf-slot-LINE
AHPHG-shelf-slot-{SIG, LINE}-freq
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
trouble point for the service. Resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. If the alarm
originates on the NE where the service enters the network, ensure that the OT or SVAC is
fibered to the correct port on the OMD or CWR8. The OT or SVAC may be connected
directly to the OMD or CWR8 or through another OT or SVAC card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If resolving upstream alarms does not clear the alarm on the local NE, then the problem
may be with this NE. Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the add
cross connect is administratively up and that there are noWavelength Tracker or channel
alarms/conditions for the associated OT or SVAC. If there are, clear those
alarms/conditions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the service's ingress point
into the E. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there are numerous instances of this condition occurring on a particular card, check to
see if these alarms are also occurring on the next downstream card. If they are, then
continue with Step 5. If they are not occurring at the next downstream card, then there
may be a problem with the indicated card. Reset the card, and wait for one minute. If the
alarms do not clear, continue with Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the loss in the fiber feeding the port is not higher than expected by comparing
the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than expected, clean the
fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
Note: Refer to the Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-OUT
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-P
LOS-P (Loss of Signal - OTU)
The OT port has detected an Optical Channel Loss of Signal Failure.
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk receive
port and the far end transmitter
Note: When a cross-connect is added, the LOS-P alarm is raised for ports A and B,
and then clears after a few seconds.
Severity Critical
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOS-P declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-P
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LPBKLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKLINE
LPBKLINE (Line (Facility) Loopback Active)
A line loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may only
be cleared by manually removing them from the port.

EC-1-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the loopback from the port.
CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] loopback line disabled
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures LPBKTERM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKTERM
LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active)
A terminal loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may
only be cleared by manually removing them from the port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the loopback from the port.
CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] loopback

terminal disabled
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization)

OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization on 10GbE facility in
transmit direction.

Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LSSEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLSS” (p. 7-103) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance)
The MAN (card in maintenance) condition is raised on a card when the user has
purposefully placed the card into the maintenance state. Entities in maintenance still
provide service but don’t report alarms. They monitor for faults and raise non-reported
conditions. The maintenance state provides access to service affecting commands like
port loopbacks.

11DPE12
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Manually place the card in service using the following command:
CLI config slot<shelf/slot> state up
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in maintenance)

The MAN (port in maintenance) condition is raised on a specific port on a card when the
user has purposefully placed the port into the maintenance state.

Applicability 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4}, VA{1-2}}
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{C1- C4, L1, L2, VA1, VA2}
SFC-shelf-slot-OMD
SFD-shelf-slot-OMD
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Manually place the port in service using the following command:
CLI config interface <shelf/slot/port> state up

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MANRESET (Card Manual Reset)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANRESET (Card Manual Reset)

The addressed card or slot is performing a manual reset.
The MANRESET condition is issued as a transient condition to inform you that a reset of
a pack has started. There is no corrective action to perform. Any failures on the pack will
be reported after the reset completes.

Service affecting? Yes, if card is carrying service
11DPE12
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
EC-shelf-{1,18}
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MANWKSWBK
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWBK
MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working)
This is a standing condition indicating that a manual switch back to the working is active.
The manual switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
manual switch to work request within a protection group. A manual switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail or Signal-Degrade state.
Clearing the manual switch will clear the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared manual switch back to work will leave the switch position on work.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the manual switch.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWPR
MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection)
This is a standing condition indicating a manual switch to protect is active.
The manual switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a manual switch to protect request within a protection group. A manual
switch to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect
facility is in the signal fail or signal degrade state. A manual switch to protect also
prevents reversion to the working path from occurring. Clearing the manual switch will
clear the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch will occur to the work facility immediately after the
manual switch has cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch)

Card mismatch
The Card Mismatch alarm indicates that the card inserted into the affected slot is of a
different type than that which was provisioned. This could occur when there is a card type
mismatch.
Severity Critical
Applicability 11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the provisioned card type:
CLI show slot shelf slot

PRELIMINARY
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the desired card slot.

On the Details tab, view the value in the Present/Provisioned field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify from the network plan what type of card is supposed to be in that slot.
If... Then...
it is a frequency dependent card (SFC or SFD) ensure the correct frequency.
it is a DCM card, ensure that it is the correct compensation
distance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the inserted card is the incorrect type, remove the card and insert one that matches the
provisioned type for the slot.
If the provisioning is incorrect, then reconfigure to make the provisioning match the card:
CLI 1. config slot <shelf slot port> state down(Enter this
command for all client ports on the card and then the network port.)
2. config slot <shelf slot> state down
3. config slot <shelf slot> type empty
4. config slot <shelf slot> type <correct type>
WEBUI 1. Select the slot of the desired card, and on the Card Properties window,
select Out of Service in the Primary State field, and click Submit.
2. Click the Delete tab, select Delete this card, and click Submit.
3. On the Provision Card window, select the desired card type in the
Provisioned Type field, and click Submit.
If the provisioning is correct and the card is of a matching type, then there is an issue with
the card itself. Continue with Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Power filter mismatch

The Power Filter Mismatch alarm indicates that the two power filters do not have
matching current carrying capacity or do not match the preprovisioned filter type. The
Power Filter Mismatch alarm could also indicate that power filter Wavelength Tracker
function does not match the shelf Wavelength Tracker mode.
Severity Minor
Applicability PF
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the power filter model engineered for the installation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Equip the correct matching power filters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify whether the PF Wavelength Tracker function matches shelf Wavelength Tracker
mode. (For example, PFDCA does not support Wavelength Tracker.)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Set the Wavelength Tracker mode of the shelf to the correct mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch, Power Filter Mismatch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Provision the shelf EXPECTED_AMPS parameter with the correct value: 30, 50, or 70
amps.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCHMOD
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCHMOD
MISMATCH (SFP/XFP Mismatch)
The SFP/XFP mismatch alarm is raised when the SFP/XFP unit inserted into a
transponder card is of a different type that is not a match for the card.
Severity Critical
4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4}, VA{1-2}}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Verify the type of SFP/XFP that is currently inserted into the alarmed card.
If... Then...
the inserted SFP/XFP module is the incorrect remove the module and insert one that matches
type, the card type.
the inserted SFP/XFP module is the correct remove the module and re-seat it back into the
type, card.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the SFP/XFP and replace it with another SFP/XFP of the same type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
repair
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
PRELIMINARY
Insertion)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID

Insertion)
The Wavelength Tracker encoder on the OT or SVAC card has detected an internal fault
on the Wavelength Tracker encoder and notifies the user that the Wavelength Tracker
information is suspect and not reliable as a monitoring tool. Symptoms of this behavior
maybe that channels are incorrectly declared absent and/or detected channels powers for
this channel instance may not accurately represent the actual channel power.
Note: Other Wavelength Tracker points downstream may generate alarms.
Severity Minor
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the MOD condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
Insertion)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range)

The OT port has detected Modulator output power out of range.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for an MODOUTOOR against the OT port. At
the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the port is pluggable module, remove and reinsert the same module. If the alarm does
not clear, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MTCESURV (Add power control failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURV (Add power control failure)

A card has detected a power control-related equipment failure.
Severity Major
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 There are two possible causes of this condition:

• The alarmed card has detected an equipment problem and this means that the
Wavelength Tracker encode power control is compromised. If this occurs during
steady state operation, there is a high probability that the services carried by this card
are unaffected.
• There is a misfibering problem such that a light-emitting fiber has been plugged into
the Tx port of a Wavelength Tracker encoder-equipped transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine what type of card is reporting the condition.
If... Then...
the card is a transponder card that is equipped check to see that the fibering for that card is
with a Wavelength Tracker encoder, correct. Remove the fiber from the Tx port on
the transponder card. If the condition clears
after 20 seconds, then this is a misfibering
problem.
the card is an SVAC, or if there is no fibering continue with Step 3.
problem on the transponder card,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Confirm that replacement card supports the same band as the alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Label all fibers connected to the alarmed card.

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed card and cap the ends to protect them from dirt and
damage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures MTCESURV (Add power control failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean and connect all fibers to the replacement card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Once the software on the card is successfully upgraded (this happens automatically), the
alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode
degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode

degrade)
An OT or SVAC card has detected a DSP failure.
Severity Critical
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
The OT or SVAC card has detected a DSP failure and this means that the wavelength
tracker encode power control is compromised. If this occurs during steady state operation,
there is a high probability that the services carried by this OT or SVAC are unaffected. To
clear this alarm, replace the card. The card replacement procedure is service affecting and
should be conducted during a maintenance window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that replacement OT or SVAC card supports the same band as the alarmed OT or
SVAC card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Label all fibers connected to the alarmed OT or SVAC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed OT or SVAC card and cap the ends to protect them
from dirt and damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Clean and connect all fibers to the replacement OT or SVAC card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Once the software on the OT or SVAC card is successfully upgraded (this happens
automatically), the alarm should clear.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures NET
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
NET (Link Down)
The 1830 Edge Device reports this condition against the FAN port, LAN1. The NET
condition is raised when the Ethernet port has been administratively enabled and Ethernet
Link connectivity is lost.
Severity MN
EC-shelf-slot-{ES1, ES2}
FAN-shelf-slot-LAN1
USRPNL-shelf-slot-{OAMP, VOIP, E1, E2}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify provisioned servers are valid and reachable. If not, consult network engineering for
correct server addresses.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the unit.


PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the equipment controller in the unit that is raising the NTPOOSYNC condition.
Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized repair center for
replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed)

The NOTALLOWED alarm indicates that the card is not allowed in the shelf or system.
• NE band type does not match the applicable band of the card.
• A card needing WT support is present in the shelf with Wavelength Tracker mode
disabled.
Severity Critical
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify that the Wavelength Tracker mode of the shelf is set correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the Wavelength Tracker mode is disabled, remove the affected card.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH (OA pump laser bias current high)
The OT port has detected Modulator output power out of range.
Severity Major
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for an OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH against

the PSS-1 AHP LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another failure is reported on the unit, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
The LD pack has detected pump laser temperature high.
Severity Major
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for an OAPUMPTEMPHIGH against the
PSS-1 AHP LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure, “High temperature troubleshooting” (p. 8-30).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)

Wavelength Tracker has detected more than one instance of the same channel at this port.
This is likely due to a fibering problem or equipment failure upstream from the alarmed
port.
Note: The alarmed port indicates the first occurrence of the collision along the path.
All downstream occurrences are flagged as conditions.
An OCHCOLLISION gets raised when a channel is present but the tones are
unexpected or, a channel is not present but there are more than 2 unexpected tones in
the upper or lower range for this channel.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes. No at ALPHG ingress.
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) to identify the network path the
particular alarmed channel is traversing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine if there is a NE where an OCHCOLLISION-OUT condition is present.
CLI alm
PRELIMINARY
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Alarm List > Total
Reports > Condition List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Resolve the OCHCOLLISION-OUT alarm if present by following the steps in the

procedure, “OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)” (p. 7-174). If
this does not correct the problem, warm reset the alarmed card.
CLI show condition

config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
WEBUI Select Reports > Condition List.
Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Cold reset the alarmed card.
CLI alm
show condition
config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
WEBUI 1. Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
2. Select Reports > Condition List.
3. Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)

port.
Note: The alarmed port indicates the first occurrence of the collision along the path.
All downstream occurrences are flagged as conditions.
Severity Critical. Not alarmed at ALPHG ingress.

Service affecting? Yes. No at ALPHG ingress.
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The trouble point for the alarm is directly upstream of the alarmed point. Retrieve a list of
active alarms on the NE and resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. Of particular
interest are card or wavelength tracker failures.
CLI alm
show condition
PRELIMINARY
WEBUI Reports > Condition List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured fiber topology on the NE:

Ensure that the physical fiber topology in the upstream direction from the alarmed port to
the ingress point into the NE matches the configured topology. Caution A changing the
physical fiber topology of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services. It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing
the physical fiber topology of the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Observe on the downstream NE if this is the only card reporting the collision. If so, warm
reset the only alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)

The NE has detected that another NE in the network is sourcing (heading) an OCh trail
which is using the same wavekeys as one of its own sourced (headed) trails.
The system is designed to prevent this under all normal operating conditions, however,
this situation can happen if the control network was segmented when the OCh trails were
created. If the control network is rejoined and any duplicates are discovered, this alarm
raised. The control network is segmented if the one or more amplifier CN links are down
such that a number of NEs cannot communicate to the remainder of the NEs in the
network.
Having two different OCh trails with the same wavekeys in the same optical network
prevents the ability to distinguish the two OCh trails from each-other with respect to
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capabilities.
Severity Minor
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
The alarm lists the IP address and shelf/slot/port for the other NE sourcing the same OCH
trail name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Choose one of the connections to be rekeyed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Log into the NE that sources the connection to be rekeyed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 List the cross connects that currently exist on-NE.
CLI show xc brief

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
4 Search the list for the OCh trail in question and record the A-end, Z-end, band and
channel for that connection (you will use this in Step 5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Rekey the associated connection.
CLI config xc <a-end shelf slot port><z-end <shelf slot

port>band channel rekey
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap)

This NE has detected that the service which is raising this condition has experienced a
provisioning problem. The Wavelength Tracker wavekeys which are configured during
service creation need to be rekeyed. This is a non-service impacting event. Potential
transient Wavelength Tracker wavekey conditions may be created and then cleared as a
result of the rekey operation.
Severity Minor
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) to identify the endpoints of the
service for the particular alarmed channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 List the cross connects that currently exist on the endpoint NEs and identify the cross
connects involved with the alarmed power trace.
CLI show xc brief

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Rekey the associated connections identified in Step 2.
CLI config xc <a-end shelf slot port><z-end shelf slot

port>band channel rekey
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)

During the creation of a wavelength cross connect, the source node of the optical channel
will raise this non reported condition when the output wavelength is not launching at the
correct power or when the optical channel is missing. This condition clears when the
power of the wavelength is launching with the correct power. As the wavelength traverses
the network, subsequent NEs have the Channel FDI present on the amplifier cards until
the power level of the wavelength reaches the target power. When the target power is
reached, the Channel FDI clears automatically within 5 minutes.
Note: This not-reported condition masks other reported optical channel alarms to
effectively suppress alarms and transient alarms during cross connect setup.

Corrective action
NOTICE
Cleaning the fiber connector of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services.
It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing the physical fiber
topology of the NE.
If the OCHFDI condition is exists on a NE for longer than 5 minutes, this means that the
wavelength cannot reach the required target power. This may impact the service in terms
of potential signal quality. In this case, perform the following procedure.
At the end of each step wait to see if the condition clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location and specifications of the condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the listing of cross connects on the NE and determine the service launch points.
PRELIMINARY
CLI show xc brief

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the NEs identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show the path power trace on the two endpoint of the wavelength service. Determine if
the wavelength has achieved the target output power from the LD pack. Enter the
following commands on both end points to determine if the launch power has been
achieved.
CLI show xc <ID> trace atoz

show xc <ID> trace ztoa
WEBUI 1. Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Select the desired Cross-Connect.
3. Click A-Z Trace or Z-A Trace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the transponder can provide the required power. If the transponder can
provide enough power, clean fiber connectors from the transponder to the OT or SVAC
port to ensure the connections are clean.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)

During the creation of a wavelength add cross connect, the source node of the optical
channel will raise this non reported condition when the output wavelength is not
launching at the correct power or when the optical channel is missing. This condition
clears when the power of the wavelength is launching with the correct power. As the
wavelength traverses the network, subsequent network elements have the Channel FDI
present on the amplifier cards until the power level of the wavelength reaches the target
power. When the target power is reached, the Channel PDI clears automatically within 5
minutes.
Note: This not-reported condition masks other reported optical channel alarms to
effectively suppress alarms and transient alarms during cross connect setup.
Severity Minor
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
Cleaning the fiber connector of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services.
It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing the physical fiber
topology of the NE.
If the OCHPDI condition is exists on a NE for longer than 5 minutes, this means that the
wavelength cannot reach the required target power. This may impact the service in terms
of potential signal quality. In this case, perform the following procedure.
At the end of each step wait to see if the condition clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location and specifications of the condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
2 Retrieve the listing of cross connects on the NE and determine the service launch points.
CLI show xc brief
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the desired Cross-Connect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the NEs identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show the path power trace on the two endpoints of the wavelength service. Determine if
the wavelength has achieved the target output power from the transponder. Enter the
following commands on both end points to determine if the launch power has been
achieved.
CLI show xc <ID> trace atoz

show xc <ID> trace ztoa
WEBUI 1. Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Select the desired Cross-Connect.
3. Click A-Z Trace or Z-A Trace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the transponder can provide the required power. If the transponder can
provide enough power, clean fiber connectors from the transponder to the OMD or
CWR8 port to ensure the connections are clean.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name)

The NE has detected that another NE in the network is sourcing an OCh trail which is
using the same OCh trail name as one of its own sourced (headed) trails.
This can happen if the loopback IP address of the sourcing NE was recently changed. In
the case of a loopback IP address change, the condition resolves itself after one hour.
This situation can also happen if one of the following situations occur:
• if the control network was segmented when the OCH trails were created. If the control
network is rejoined then any duplicates are discovered and this alarm is raised. The
control network is segmented if the one or more ALPHG CN links are down such that
a number of NEs cannot communicate to the remainder of the NEs in the network.
• if a database with a duplicate Och-trail is restored on a NE
• if two Och Trails with the identical name are created at the same time within the
network
Having two different OCh-trails with the same name in the same optical network prevents
the ability to distinguish the two OCh-trails from each-other (with respect to Wavelength
Tracker monitoring capabilities).
Severity Minor
Applicability 4DPA4
Corrective action
The alarm will list the IP address and shelf, slot, port for the other NE sourcing the same
OCh Trail name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that there is a NE with the IP address that is alledgedly sourcing the duplicate
OCh Trail. If the IP address of the sourcing NE was recently changed then this alarm
resolves itself within one hour.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Step 1 did not resolve the problem, then choose which connection should have a new
name.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Recreate the connection (across the network) for the path. This involves deleting that trail
and recreating it with a different name.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)

The NE has not received the OCh trail information for this Cross-Connect from the trail's
head NE. While this condition is asserted, Wavelength Tracker monitoring for this
channel is not active on this NE. This alarm may be raised for the following reasons:
• The head NE X-Connect for this OCh trail may not have been created.
• There may not be proper CN/OSPF connectivity between the NEs to allow for the
distribution of trail information.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Record the exact name used to identify the OCh trail.List the cross connects that currently
exist on-NE:
CLI show xc brief

Search the list for the OCh trail in question. Record the exact name used for the OCh trail
(wreache spaces and case are relevant for a match).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the OCh trail name as specified on this NE exactly matches the OCh trail
name as specified on the head NE.List the cross connects that currently exist in the
network.
CLI show ochtrail network PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Search the list for the OCh trail in question. Compare any names for the exact name
recorded in the Step 1.
If... Then...
the name is misspelled, recreate the appropriate connection with the
appropriate name.
there is no match, continue with Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that there is CN/OSPF connectivity at the head end NE. Log into the head end NE.
Check for alarms on any ALPHG links. Resolve any outstanding alarms on the head-end
NE CN links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the OCh trail's head NE cross-connect has been created. Log into the head end
NE for that connection. List the cross-connects that currently exist on this head-end NE:
CLI show xc brief
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Search the list for the OCh trail in question.
If... Then...
a match is not found, create the add connection.
a match is found, continue with Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that there is CN/OSPF connectivity at the NE raising the condition. Log into the
NE raising the condition. Check for alarms on any ALPHG links. Resolve any
outstanding alarms on the NE CN links.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)

Wavelength Tracker has detected an instance of a channel that was not provisioned at an
input port. The provisioning of a service is not yet complete, or there has been a
misfibering. This alarm may be the result of misdirected traffic or it may be a transient
during service creation.
An OCHUNKNOWN is raised when a channel is detected but no keys have been
provisioned.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check to ensure that service provisioning is complete for the channel in question.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the fiber feeding the detect point is correctly configured in the NE's topology
table and that the physical connection is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fiber is external to the NE, ensure that it is the correct one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
other Wavelength Tracker alarms exist on the clear the alarms.
same channel on this or any upstream NE,
the unexpected channel has been launched and clear the alarm.
the Channel absent alarm is present,
any amplifier alarms exist on the NE or any clear the alarms.
upstream NE,
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A connected fiber may have resulted in the local channel unexpected and the other
channel missing alarms. Examine the network for any channel absent alarms.
CLI show ring alarms [east | west] | <NE Name | NE IP

Address>
Resolve the channel absent alarms first.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)

Wavelength Tracker has detected an instance of a channel that was not provisioned at the
output of a port. The provisioning of a service is not yet complete, or there has been a
mis-fibering. This alarm may be the result of misdirected traffic or it may be a transient
during service creation.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check to ensure that service provisioning is complete for the channel in question.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the fiber feeding the detect point is correctly configured in the NE's topology
table and that the physical connection is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fiber is external to the NE, ensure that it is the correct one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
other Wavelength Tracker alarms exist on the clear the alarms.
same channel on this or any upstream NE,
the unexpected channel has been launched and clear the alarm.
the Channel absent alarm is present,
any amplifier alarms exist on the NE or any clear the alarms.
upstream NE,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A connected fiber may have resulted in the local channel unexpected and the other
channel missing alarms. Examine the network for any channel absent alarms.
PRELIMINARY
CLI show ring alarms [east | west] | <NE Name | NE IP

Address>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resolve the channel absent alarms first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset the alarmed card.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCI
Open Connection Indication - ODU
OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has not
provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OTN switched network. OCI
maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has deleted or not
yet provisioned a connection in OTN switched network.
Severity Critical
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCI condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
11STAR1 client port to clear the OCI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPR (Channel Power Unstable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR (Channel Power Unstable)

The OPR Channel power unstable alarm is raised when the OT or SVAC cannot
successfully maintain the output channel power at the provisioned value. This may be due
to a hardware issue on the OT or SVAC card.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this service has no transponders, troubleshoot the equipment that is connected to the
OT or SVAC card's input port to determine and resolve any issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the OT or SVAC card where the
alarm is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
PRELIMINARY
the power levels are within the acceptable the problem may be with the card itself.
limits, Proceed to Step 6.
the power levels are not within acceptable continue with Step 4.
limits,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPR (Channel Power Unstable)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the receive port of the OT or SVAC card
raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the receive port of the OT or SVAC
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too

High)
The OPR Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High alarm is raised when the
signal power into the LINE or SIG port of a amplifier is too high.
Severity NA
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the LINE or SIG port of the LD card where the alarm
is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
PRELIMINARY
limits,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
PRELIMINARY
High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too

Low)
The OPR Out of Operational Range - Loss Too High Low is raised when the loss between
the DCM in and out ports of a amplifier is too low.
Severity NA
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the LINE or SIG port of the LD card where the alarm
is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
PRELIMINARY
limits,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
PRELIMINARY
Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)

The OPR Out of Operational Range - Loss Too High Low is raised when the loss between
the DCM in and out ports of a amplifier is too low.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the DCM port of the amplifier card where the alarm is
raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range)

The OPR-OUT condition is raised on cards with a Wavelength Tracker detect point when
the power of the outgoing channel is outside of the provisioned power range. This alarm
may be caused by the introduction of more or less attenuation in the fiber, or by an
amplifier adjust that may have occurred elsewhere in the network, due to fiber repair
activity or network adjustments such as adding or deleting a node.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
Refer to “OPRTX (Channel optical power out of range)” (p. 7-201).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRTX (Channel optical power out of range)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRTX (Channel optical power out of range)

The OPR Channel optical power out of range alarm is raised on cards with a Wavelength
Tracker detect point when the power is outside of the provisioned power range.
This alarm may be caused by one of the following:
• Introducing more or less attenuation in the fiber
• Adjusting the amplifier, which may have occurred elsewhere in the network, due to
fiber repair activity or network adjustments such as adding or deleting a node
• In the case of FOADM (running in manual mode) when channel power is not adjusted
to the expected power levels
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) to determine the power levels
upstream of the alarmed card. Troubleshoot, isolate and identify other alarms or
conditions that would cause the OPR alarm to be raised. Using the appropriate corrective
actions resolve these issues first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the card where the alarm is raised.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRTX (Channel optical power out of range)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the receive port of the OT or SVAC card
raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the receive port of the OT or SVAC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)

This condition is raised if the present network output power at the OT or SVAC port is
less that the programmed network output power. When this alarm is present there is a
high probability that this service is not being impacted. Therefore, immediate action is not
required.
Severity Major
Applicability 11QPA4, 4DPA4
Corrective action
NOTICE
This procedure is service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the transponder that is connected to OT or SVAC port.
CLI show interface topology<shelf slot port>

show interface <shelf slot port>
This indicates the expected power, actual power, and what each OT or SVAC port is
connected to.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Visually inspect the fiber connecting the transponder and OT or SVAC port. Check that
the fiber is not being pinched or bent tightly. Ensure that the fiber connectors are properly
seated at the OT or SVAC in port, transponder out port, and any bulk-head connectors (if
any) between the transponder and OT or SVAC.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using an optical power meter, measure the optical output power of the transponder to
ensure that the output power is within specification. Make this measurement as close as
possible to the output port of the transponder.
If... Then...
the output power is within the acceptable continue with Step 5.
limits,
the output power is not within acceptable the transponder port may be dirty. Clean and
limits, inspect port, and measure the optical output
power of the transponder. Continue with Step
4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the output power is with acceptable limits, clean and reconnect the transponder and OT
or SVAC and check the alarm status of the shelf. If the output power remains below
specification:
1. Reseat the transponder card. Refer to “Reseating a card” (p. 8-32).
2. Measure the optical output power of the transponder. If the output power remains
below specification, Replace the card. Refer to “Replacing system components”
(p. 8-2). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support
guide to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using an optical power meter, measure the optical power being received at the OT or
SVAC input port.
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder continue with Step 7.
and OT or SVAC is reasonable,
the loss over the fiber between the transponder clean, inspect and connect the fiber between
and OT or SVAC is higher than expected, the transponder and OT or SVAC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Measure the optical power being received at the OT or SVAC input port.
PRELIMINARY
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder clean and reconnect the transponder and OT or
and OT or SVAC is reasonable, SVAC and check the alarm status of the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder replace the fiber.
and OT or SVAC is higher than expected,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the OT or SVAC In port. Clean and reconnect the fiber between the transponder
and OT or SVAC. Check the alarm status of the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Measure the optical power being received at the OT or SVAC input port. If the alarm has
not cleared, Replace the OT or SVAC card. Refer to “Replacing system components”
to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures OSCSSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSCSSF
Indication
The LD has detected a Loss Of Signal. The OSCSSF conditon is raised against the OSC
or OSCSFP port when the LOS alarm is raised against LINE port, when the power
measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range
Severity NSA
Service affecting? NO
Applicability A2325A-shelf-slot-OSC
No corrective action is required. Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS
alarm (see, “LD Input LOS” under “LOS (Loss of signal)” (p. 7-127)).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PLM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM
PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)
PLM(ODU) won't happen within 1830-to-1830 NE connections (PSS-1, PSS-4, and/or
PSS-32). However, it could happen when a non-1830 NE's 10G LAN signal is connected
to an 1830 NE, and is not configured correctly.
Severity Critical
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To correct this, make sure the other NE sends out a signal with the PSI byte set to 0x83
(10G LAN) or 0x80 (OTU-1).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO
PRCDRERR (Invalid topology)
The system enforces a rule that a valid cross connect must terminate on one of the
following endpoints:
• a port marked as “External”
• a port marked as “No-connect”
• a transponder network port
In prior releases, there were no checks in place to prevent cross connects that do not
adhere to these rules. Therefore, if there are any cross connects already in place from a
previous release that do not adhere to the rules, this condition is raised on the NE in this
release after an upgrade from a previous release.
Services that are running over invalid cross connects may continue to operate, in which
case it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before performing this procedure,
or they may be interrupted, in which case a loss of service alarm is raised.
Severity Minor
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the cross connects on the NE, and look for cross connects that do not conform to
the rules. These cross connects are considered invalid.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the invalid connections. Any service that is running over an invalid cross connect
that is deleted is interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Recreate valid cross connects for the interrupted services.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)

The NE contains an invalid physical topology that prevents automatic power management
from operating. Since physical topology links cannot be changed if a service
(cross-connect) is provisioned across them, and services cannot be provisioned if
topology links are incorrect, this can occur in the following ways:
• This error occurs upon the upgrade of the software to this release. One or more
services were provisioned in a previous software release across a topology that was
valid in that release, but which is invalid in this release due to rule changes for power
management topology.
• A physical topology link on the NE's through-path was changed or deleted when there
were no through services provisioned, but add/drop services were present. The next
time an attempt was made to provision a service, the service provisioning failed (or
the next time a warm restart occurred, an alarm was raised against each of the existing
services).
Severity Minor
Corrective action
Referring to the network plan for this NE in this release, review the NE's physical
topology link information and verify that the proper cards are installed and all physical
topology links are correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the NE's physical topology link information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Make changes as required to fix all incorrect internal physical topology links.
CLI config interface topology <sh/sl/pt> internal <sh/sl/pt>

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If services were provisioned in a previous software release across an invalid
physical topology (for example, no ingress amplifier in an auto-power managed
CWR8 NE), these services have to be deleted before the physical topology can be
corrected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Alternatively, you can set the ports involved to operate under manual power management,
but this is not recommended. Contact your service representative before setting any ports
to manual power management.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWR
PWR (Battery off or power filter off)
Severity Critical
Applicability PF-shelf-{2,3}
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Plug in the power filter in the appropriate slot and turn on the power.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL
PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjust Failed)
Severity Minor
Applicability A2325A-shelf-slot-{SIG, LINE}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the reason for the failure at the ingress Amplifier card or the PSS-1 AHP that has
raised the PWRADJFAIL alarm.
CLI config powermgmt ingress|egress shelf slot detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the reason is a lack of communication to the upstream NE, resolve the communication
issue prior to resolving the PWRADJFAIL alarm. Ensure the NE with the PWRADJFAIL
alarm can communicate with the upstream NE.
PRELIMINARY
CLI telnet IP address of upstream NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRADJFAIL
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the PSS-1 AHP or Amplifier card
where the alarm is raised.
CLI sh int wave in, out shelf slot port wave in, out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable perform a power adjust operation at the ingress
limits then Amplifier card or the ALPHG card that has
raised the PWRADJFAIL alarm (continue with
Step 5).
the power levels are not within the acceptable check for kinking of the fiber at various points
limits upstream of the receive connector on the
alarmed card. Proceed to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
CLI config powermgmt config powermgmt adjust
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Using the standard optical fiber jumper cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and measure
the power again. Clean the receive bulkhead connector on the card. If the cleaning/fiber
un-kinking resolves the power levels to the acceptable limits, then go back to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify that the fiber length and type used in the span immediately upstream of the
alarmed card still match the original specifications according to the network plan. Any
deviation from the specifications, as a result of work done on the span, may require new
network parameters and/or a rebalancing of the network to compensate. Follow the
appropriate procedures in the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to validate the new
parameters of the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform the procedure, “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) to determine other possible causes of
the PWRADJFAIL alarm and fix these first
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a warm reset on the card where the alarm is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Perform a cold reset on the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the alarmed PSS-1 AHP. Follow the return and repair process in the Customer
and Product Support guide to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair center for
replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRADJREQ
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJREQ
PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required)
A PWRADJREQ condition is raised when:
• Adding a channel on a non-commissioned network: For example, a ring network can
be commissioned with ASE power adjusts, which require no services to be added to
power balance the network. When a service is added after this type of commissioning
is done, the PWRADJREQ alarm will not be raised.
• Adding a service after an ingress or egress adjust failed because no service was
present or configured at the time. Once the service has been provisioned, this alarm is
raised and an adjustment of the power is required.
• Reinserting a pack when services are present across the affected topology
• Changing the network EPT parameter values and breaking the line fiber into the
ingress LD
• Clearing a LOS condition on the LD
Severity Minor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a power adjust operation at the ingress Amplifier card or the ALPHG card that
has raised the PWRADJREQ alarm.
CLI config powermgmt ingress|egress shelf slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the adjustment is successful, the PWRADJREQ alarm will be cleared.
the adjustment fails, the PWRADJFAIL alarm will appear. Proceed
PRELIMINARY
to the procedure, “PWRADJFAIL” (p. 7-214).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the appropriate procedures in the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to

validate the set parameters of the network per the etwork Plan.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRMARGIN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMARGIN
PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded)
This condition is raised as a result of the gain, required to increase the power level at the
ingress port of a Amplifier or ALPHG card, being close to the maximum value as set by
the Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT).Without the ability to increase the gain any
further, the repair margin has been compromised and any additional loss would result in
power-adjust alarms.
Severity Minor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure, “Path power trace” (p. 8-28) to determine if there are any
anomalies upstream of the alarmed card that would cause PWRMARGIN condition to be
raised. Look for excessive losses in fiber jumpers or connectors or signal degrade
conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber jumper from the point just before the anomaly and clean the fiber and
the bulkhead connector. Insert the fiber back into the bulkhead connector from which it
was removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for the path going upstream until all the excessive losses are
resolved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the fiber length and type used in the span immediately upstream of the
alarmed card still match the original specifications according to the network plan. This
may require a validation by performing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
test from the customer patch panel into the fiber plant. Any anomalies detected at this
stage require external intervention by personnel responsible for the maintenance of the
PRELIMINARY
fiber plant.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRMARGIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the path is within all acceptable power ranges, then it is possible that the gain range
provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate the unexpected
change in loss in the network. Capture the current operating state of the network, using
the EMS XML network export feature and refer the problem to network planning for
analysis.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRMAXGAIN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMAXGAIN
PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
This condition occurs at Line Out of the Egress LD or Sig Out of the Ingress LD.
A power management adjustment set the ingress LD (ingress adjustment) or egress LD
(egress LD) gain above GMax, however the gain setting is allowed by the planning tool
temporarily. Too many amplifiers in this state will result in BER performance degradation
to services. To correct this alarm the user should find the source of excess loss in the
network and correct it.
Severity Minor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the fiber connecting the alarmed LD Line or SIG port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber ends connecting the alarmed LD Line or SIG port to the next pack
preceding the LD.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the preceding steps did not clear the alarm, clean the Line or SIG port that the channel
passes through.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the fiber connecting the alarmed Line or SIG port to the next pack preceding the
LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace PSS-1 AHP.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRSUSP (Power management suspended)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP (Power management suspended)

Power management operations are suspended for the alarmed channel. The main purpose
of this condition is to help debug other problems. For example, if an alarm is present
indicating the power leaving a NE is too low, retrieve all conditions for the NE and check
if the PWRSUSP condition is present.
The measured loss from the input port to the egress LD is different from the theoretical
loss by 4dB or more. The alarm is raised when the power control loop for the card
attempts to change its power (to get the egress LD channel power to the correct value)
and reaches the 4dB clamp.

Applicability 4DPA4
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)
Severity Minor
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed)
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11QPA4, 11DPE12, 4DPA, A2325A,
AHPHG
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNTMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNTMISS
REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
The card missing condition is raised when a provisioned slot, that has both a programmed
card-type and an Admin state of In-Service, does not have a card in it. The slot has been
provisioned as such and no card has been inserted, or an inserted In-Service card has been
physically removed from that slot.
Severity Critical
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-shelf-{2,3}
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
USRPNL-shelf
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNTMISS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that there is a card in the slot against which the alarm is raised. If no card is
present, insert a card of the provisioned type into the slot. To verify which card type has
been provisioned for the slot:
CLI show int<shelf/slot>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
a card is present, remove the card and check for damage to the shelf’s backplane
pins and to the card’s backplane connector.
damage is found on the arrange for repair to the backplane. Do not attempt to reinsert
shelf’s backplane, the card.
damage is found on the card, send the card for repair. Replace the damaged card with another
but not on the backplane, one of the same type, into the same slot.
no damage is found on either replace the card with another one of the same type into the
the backplane or the card, same slot. If the Card Missing alarm clears, send the original
card for repair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the Card Missing alarm does not clear, remove the alarmed card and arrange for repair
to the backplane. Follow the return and repair process to return the damaged card or shelf
to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
REPLUNITMISS (SFP/XFP Missing)
The optics module SFP/XFP for the port is missing or the card is not able to successfully
detect the presence of the module. The problem could be with the SFP/XFP or the card.
Typically, this alarm is raised if the SFP/XFP module is not installed or not properly
seated.
Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)

Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)
Applicability 4DPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-4}, VA{1-2}}
11DPE12-shelf-slot-{L{1-2}, C{1-12}, VA1}
11QPA4-shelf-slot-{L{1-4}-C{1-4, VA{1-2}}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If there is no SFP/XFP in the port where the SFP/XFP missing condition is raised, then
insert one that is appropriate for that transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNITMISS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the SFP/XFP from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the connector
on the SFP/XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP/XFP plugs into
for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP/XFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and replace the SFP/XFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with
the connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP/XFP failure is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault)

The OT port has detected a Remote Fault Identifier (RFI) ordered set on the 10GbE LAN
service transported over the OTUk in the transmit direction.
This may be caused if the remote client equipment is generating RFI ordered sets.
Severity NA
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing RFIEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANRFI ” (p. 7-104) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures SDBER (Signal Degrade)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER (Signal Degrade)

The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate (SDBER) on the
OC-192/STM-64 port of the applicable card. This defect indicates that local
OC-192M/STM-64 port has detected a BER that exceeds selected threshold (default 10-6).
Severity Major
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SDBER against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)

The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a signal degrade.
The SDEG-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects errors in the as per the SONET
specification
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
This procedure details the corrective action for a SDEG-O against the OSC port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the SDEG-O condition is present.

port.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the SDEG-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed measure the power again.
SDEG-O condition is still present, the problem
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures SSF
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSF
SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)
The OT port has detected an Optical Channel (Och) Server Signal Failure. A condition
that is treated as a Server Signal Failure (i.e., a Loss of Signal, LOS) was detected. Each
of the following conditions is treated as a Server Signal Failure:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)
receive port and the far end transmitter

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSF declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on a pluggable client port, and the power level is within the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures SSFODU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODU
SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)
The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level. Conditions that can
cause an SSFODU are:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)
• ODU-AIS
receive port and the far end transmitter

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODU declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODU condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of the OT, and the power level is within the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWFTDWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWFTDWN
SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress)
Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the NE. This alarm is active
if the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to
commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.
Severity Minor
Corrective Action
The corrective action depends on whether you want to commit the software upgrade, or
back out of the software upgrade. The alarm clears when a commit or a back out is issued
after the software upgrade is complete.
For more details on the upgrade process, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User
Provisioning Guide .
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall
disabled))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall

disabled))
The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised after the database has been manually cleared or
restored.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To upgrade to a new release or clear the alarm, the current software load must be
committed. Enter the following command to commit the software:
CLI config software upgrade commit
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGFAIL
SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
The SWUPGFAIL alarm is applicable at the NE-level and/or the card-Level. This alarm is
raised when the NE or card fails to upgrade to the designated load.
Severity Minor
11QPA4-shelf-slot
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the reason why the NE or card failed to upgrade.
CLI config software upgrade status

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Based on the information provided by the status, as listed in the following table,
determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first.
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions
Upgrade status Action

Transfer failed This is an internal error indicating a failure between the
CC and another card. Retry the upgrade process.
File access failed Problem accessing the load file on the CC disk. Retry the
upgrade process.
File corruption detected during Retry the upgrade process.
transfer
Timeout The upgrade timed out. Retry the upgrade process.
Operation in progress No action required.
Install in progress No action required.
Transfer in progress Attempted to do an upgrade while SWL was busy.
1. Wait for the action to complete, or abort the current
action (config software abort).
2. Retry the upgrade process.
Card not found A card was removed while an upgrade was in progress.
Retry again (with or without the missing card).
Card type not found in catalog The software release does not contain a software load for
the card.
1. Check that you are upgrading to the correct software
load. Retry with the correct load.
2. If you are upgrading to the correct load, determine if
the card in question is required for normal operations.
3. If the card is not required, remove the card from the
system.
4. If the card is required for normal operation, contact
your service representative.
Lost communication with target The card experienced a temporary communications
problem. Retry the upgrade process.
Flash read failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash
PRELIMINARY
banks.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Flash write failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash
banks.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question
Flash erase failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash
banks.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question.
DB erase failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB read failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB write failed Database access failure.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the CC card in question.
TFTP server ip address not set Set the IP address of the TFTP server.
Failed to access catalog Retry the upgrade process.
TFTP server error Ensure that the server is up and running correctly.
TFTP network error There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
TFTP timeout There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
No upgrade path There was an attempt to upgrade to a release which is not
backwards compatible with the current release.
1. Upgrade to an intermediate release first.
2. Once the intermediate load is accomplished, retry the
upgrade process to the final upgrade release.
Operation aborted The upgrade was manually aborted. Retry the upgrade
process.
PRELIMINARY
Invalid script The audit was unable to produce a valid upgrade script.
Retry the upgrade process.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Load and bank are incompatible An attempt was made to load a boot load in an
application bank, or vice versa. This is an invalid
operation. Application loads can only be loaded into
application banks; boot loads can only be loaded into
boot banks. Perform the upgrade but this time specify the
correct bank.
Backup and restore host IP not set Set the backup and restore host IP address.
Database backup failed Retry the upgrade process.
Database restore failed Retry the upgrade process.
Couldn’t find database to restore There is a problem with the database backup server, or
the connectivity to the server or the database server
configuration.
1. Check and correct the database backup server
configuration.
2. Check and correct DCN network connectivity.
Confirm that the TFTP server can accept ping
commands (config tools ping <TFTP server>)
3. Check and correct the status of database server.
4. Retry the upgrade process once the previous steps are
complete.
Attempted activate before load Retry the upgrade process.
Bank is empty Retry the upgrade process.
Load not found on card An attempt was made to activate a bank with an incorrect
or missing software load.
1. Reload the software.
2. Activate the load.
Load file not found A software load file could not be found on the disk.
Repeat the upgrade to transfer the file from FTP to the
disk.
Load could not be activated The correct load could not be activated.
Retry the upgrade process.
Operation interrupted by reset Card was reset while upgrade was underway.
1. Wait for the reset of card to complete.
PRELIMINARY
2. Log into NE (if required).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software version mismatch A commit failed because not all cards were running the
same software release. This error is not the cause of an
upgrade failure alarm.
Repeat the upgrade process.
Activity switch failed The CCs failed to switch activity, so the upgrade cannot
continue.
1. Resolve redundancy issues.
Mate CC unable to take activity The inactive CC was unable to take activity, so the
upgrade cannot continue.
1. Resolve redundancy issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a card warm reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade
procedure again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure
again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Follow the
return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair center for
replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Contact your service representative.

PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures SYSBOOT (Cold Start/Warm Start)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSBOOT (Cold Start/Warm Start)
Severity TC
None. This is a normal report caused by user actions.

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIM
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
The TIM condition is typically raised when the received section trace does not match the
expected section trace. This may be caused by either an error in the provisioning of the
section trace, or an error in the fibering. For the Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch condition
(Network Ports) the cause would be an error in the fibering at the near end or the far end.
This alarm is raised if:
• There is an error in the configuration of the trace at the transmit or receive end (TIM)
• There is an error in the fibering of compatible SONET sources (TIM or TTI
Mismatch)
• The trace is not being generated (TIM or TTI Mismatch)
TIM (Client Ports)
Severity Minor
NOTICE
A cold reset or replacement of a the unit is service impacting if the unit is currently
carrying services.
maintenance window before resetting or replacing it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the section trace configuration of the client port is correct:
CLI show interface <card> <shelf/slot/port>

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If there are errors in the provisioned section trace correct them.
CLI config interface <card> <shelf/slot/port> sectTrace

expectedTrace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the SONET device generating the section trace, connected to the client port that is
raising the TIMS alarm, and verify its configuration. If there are errors in the provisioning
of the section trace transmit state, mode or message, correct them. Refer to that device's
user manual.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the physical fibering between the client port and the SONET device is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a card warm reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card cold reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
Severity Minor
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
services.
maintenance window before resetting or replacing it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the physical fibering between the network receive port of the transponder and
the output port of the SFD5 or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a service” (p. 8-25) to determine the
NE and location of the transponder at the other end of this service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that the physical fibering between the network transmit port of the transponder and
the input port of the SFD5 or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset on the local unit where the TIM condition is raised. If the problem
does not clear then perform a warm reset on the far-end card associated with the local unit
raising the TIM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset on the local unit where the TIM condition is raised. If the problem
does not clear then perform a cold reset on the far-end card associated with the local unit
raising the TIM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Replace the alarmed unit. If the problem does not clear then replace the associated far-end
card. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU
TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
This alarm is raised when the incoming optical channel trail trace message does not match
the expected incoming optical channel trail trace message.
• Mis-fibering
• Improper provisioning
Severity Critical
NOTICE
Failure to follow instructions in this step could result in SERVICE INTERRUPTION.
Notify the person in charge of the optical line so that traffic can be re-routed.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the TIMODU alarm declared on
an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the NE alarm list. Determine the AID of the OT reporting this alarm condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the local office records. Determine if the correct expected ODU trail trace message
for this signal matches the data in the expected incoming ODU trail trace message listed
for the report.
If... Then...
the correct expected ODU trail trace message Continue with Step 3.
PRELIMINARY
for this signal matches the data in the expected

incoming ODU trail trace message listed for
the report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIMODU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the correct expected ODU trail trace message Proceed to Step 6.
for this signal does not match the data in the
expected incoming ODU trail trace message
listed for the report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 At the user interface, obtain an updated alarm report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Trace the fiber jumper connected to the line port of the OT identified in the AID, back to
the source OT. If the jumper fiber is connected to the correct source, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use local procedures to connect the fiber jumper to the correct source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the alarm is still listed in the NE alarm list, then at the user interface, enter the correct
expected incoming ODU trail trace message. The TIMODU alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)

The Pluggable Module Transmit Failure condition is raised at the pluggable module
equipment and indicates a fault on the transmit port of the pluggable module. This is
usually a laser failure where light is not detected at the transmit port.
Severity Critical.
Service affecting? Yes.
Applicability 11QPA4, 11DPE12, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to “Replacing an SFP module” (p. 8-4).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module failure is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown)
The optics module (pluggable module) inserted in the port is of a type that is not
recognized and the system cannot obtain manufacturing information on the unit. There is
a possibility that the pluggable module is damaged and the card is not able to correctly
identify the module or that there is damage on the card preventing correct identification of
the pluggable module.

Applicability 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG
Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To clear the pack while it is still in service, do one of the following:

• Change the notification from a standing alarm to a transient condition, or
• Change the MODULETYPE provisioning (from "auto" to "user" for unsupported
pluggable modules).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage exists, reinsert the pluggable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type. Refer to
“Replacing an SFP module” (p. 8-4). Take special care when handling the connected fiber
jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module defect is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 . If there is no transmission, check that the provisioned signal rate is supported by the
pluggable module that is present. If not, use a different pluggable module, or change the
signal rate provisioning to a value supported by the pluggable module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)

The system does not recognize the inserted card. An unsupported card type, or faulty card
is present. This alarm is raised when a card has been inserted but never establishes
communications with the controller.
Severity Critical
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
DCM-shelf-slot
FAN-shelf-slot
PF-{1-8}-{2,3}
SFC-shelf-slot
SFD-shelf-slot
SFD-{25-48}-{1}
USRPNL-{1-8}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify if the inserted card is supported for the current running release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the card is not yet supported in this release and the card is a required type for the NE,
verify that the correct release is running on the NE. Upgrade the NE to the correct release
if it is not to support this card type.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the NE is running the correct release but the card is not yet supported in that release,
remove the card and replace it with one that is supported by the software running on the
NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the card is supported and the NE is running the correct release, the problem may be
with the card itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
repair
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
UNKNOWN (SFP/XFP Unknown)

The optics module SFP/XFP inserted in the port is of a type that is not recognized and the
system cannot obtain manufacturing information on the unit. There is a possibility that the
SFP/XFP is damaged and the card is not able to correctly identify the module or that there
is damage on the card preventing correct identification of the SFP/XFP.

11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the SFP/XFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the
connector on the SFP/XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP/XFP
plugs into for any damage. If no damage exists, reinsert the SFP/XFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the SFP/XFP with another unit of the same type. Take special care
when handling the connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP/XFP defect is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
5 Replace the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures UPM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM
UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch)
The OT has detected a GFP User Payload Mismatch. This condition is raised when the
encapsulation mode provisioning for the two OTs on opposite ends of an optical link do
not match.
Severity Critical
4DPA4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the GFP User Payload Mismatch
on an OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the OT with the UPM defect. Verify the encapsulation mode value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the OT at the opposite end of the link. Ensure that the provisioning for the
encapsulation mode parameter is the same for each OT.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

The Underlying Resource Unavailable (URU) condition allows the north bound
monitoring system to detect that a service affecting condition other than LOS-P is present,
including transmission and equipment defects within the OTS or OTU layer. The 1830
PSS-32 will report LOS-P and URU (URU-OTS and URU-OTU) at their line facing
ports. For OTS, the 1830 PSS-32 correlates the defects within the LD cards to report the
URU-OTS condition against the external facing Line port. The LD card Line port is an
OTS port type. For the simulated OTU facility this means correlating the defects on the
OT port to report the URU-OTU condition against the OTU type OT port.
URU-OTS (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Severity Major
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
URU-OTU (Underlying resource unavailable)
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 4DPA4
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-S (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Severity Major
Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USALS
USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff due to Upstream Fault)
USALS is raised when the client port laser is turned off either because the network port of
this card has an optical LOS, or the corresponding client port at the far end of the service
has a fault.

4DPA4-shelf-slot- {C{1-4}}
NOTICE
services.
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or re-seating it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which network port on the near-end card is associated with the client port that
has raised the USALS condition. Network ports for this product are usually port 1. Look
for LOS, LOC or LOF at the network port or Out of Service type alarms at the associated
client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 1, clear the fault.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the desired behavior at the near end client port is to inject an Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS), idle frames, or an invalid signal and not to shut the laser off in reaction to the
PRELIMINARY
upstream fault, issue the following command at the near end to change the LOSProp
(LOS Propagation) setting.
CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] losprop [injectAISL

| idleFrames | invalidSig]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures USALS
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the procedure “Determining the far end of a service” (p. 8-25), determine the
nature of the fault at the far end. Look for LOS or Out of Service type alarms at the
associated client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 4, clear the fault.
If the condition does not clear, perform the following steps on the near end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Repeat Step 6 to Step 8 for the associated card at the far-end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)

Wavelength Tracker could not detect the provisioned channel going through the amplifier
and is raising a non-alarmed condition to indicate that that an upstream failure exists.
Possible reasons for this condition may be:
• the channel is missing
• the channel is outside the detectable range
• the Wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT or SVAC
If the channel is missing it could be a provisioning error or fibering error.
Severity Minor
Corrective action
NOTICE
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. It may
take several seconds for channel power out of range and channel absent alarms to clear
after each step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the add cross connect is
PRELIMINARY
administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or channel

alarms/conditions for the associated transponder or SVAC upstream. If there are, clear
those alarms/conditions first before continuing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the service's ingress point to
the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the loss in the fiber that is feeding the port is not higher than expected by
comparing the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than
expected, clean the fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber. If
this still does not solve the condition on the amplifier, the problem may be with the card
itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card on the alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input
Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input Direction)

port.

Corrective action
NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine if there is a NE where an OCHCOLLISION-OUT condition is present.
CLI alm
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Alarm List > Total
Reports > Condition List
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Resolve the OCHCOLLISION-OUT condition (if present) by following the procedure

“OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)” (p. 7-174).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input
PRELIMINARY
Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset of the card on the alarmed card.

v
...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[high]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[high]
VOLTAGE[high] (high input voltage defect)
The voltage level of the external DC supply is high. This alarm is raised if there is too
much voltage going to the breaker feed or the voltage is above the threshold. This could
be due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Critical
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
USRPNL-{1-8}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (see “Power filter input” (p. 2-133)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
4 Replace the unit that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return and repair process to
return the unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[low]
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[low]
VOLTAGE [low] (low input voltage defect)
Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been
turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the
voltage is below the threshold. This could be due to the breaker being shut off, or due to a
problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Critical
11DPE12-shelf-slot
4DPA4-shelf-slot
A2325A-shelf-slot
AHPHG-shelf-slot
USRPNL-{1-8}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[low]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return and repair process to
return the unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures VTSFDI
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSFDI
VTSFDI (VTS Forward Defect Indication)
The OT has detected a VTS Forward Defect Indication. This condition is raised when a
problem has occurred upstream that causes an APS/PCC failure indication on the Virtual
Time Slot [n] received by the card.
Severity NA
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the VTSFDI[n] alarm associated
with an OT port. At the end of each step, wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the
next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the procedure for clearing identified alarm/condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the time slot information on the 11DPE line port and ODU1 are correctly
provisioned on each end of the optical link. If not use the following commands to ensure
time slots are provisioned the same:
• Config interface 11DPE12 shelf/slot/C{1-10} 1gbe timeslot
line <1-4>
• Config interface 11DPE12 shelf/slot/C{1-10} 1gbe timeslot vts
<0 or 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40,
43, 46>
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures VTSOCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSOCI
VTSOCI (VTS Open Connection Indication)
The OT has detected a Virtual Time Slot Open Connection Indication on an associated
VTS[n]. This condition is raised when the downstream 11DPE12 receives an APS/PCC
message indicating an OCI from the upstream OT. The VTSOCI[n] alarm is raised at the
downstream OT on the Virtual Time Slot [n] which has an established connection.
Severity Major
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the VTOCI[n] alarm associated
with a 11DPE12 port. At the end of each step, wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to
the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the upstream 11DPE12 for any alarms/conditions on any VTS[n] with electrical
connections. This will cause the PSS1GBE to send an OCI message for the relevant
VTS[n] to the downstream OT. An electrical connection is a provisioned connection from
the VTS[n] to a GbE client port or another line VTS. If such an alarm is present, go to the
procedure for clearing OCI alarms to clear the VTSOCI[n] alarm at the downstream
11DPE12.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)

WKSWBK indicates an automatic protection switch from the “protection side” to the
“working side”. As a result, the working side becomes the active side. This can occur
when a fault is detected on the protection side, or when the user provisions the protection
side to Admin Down. It applies to all protection schemes (Y-cable, OPS, ESNCP) when
the protection group is non-revertive. (Y-cable can be provisioned to either revertive or
non-revertive. OPS and ESNCP are always non-revertive.)

Applicability 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 4DPA4
Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.If there are
no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
CLI show aps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config aps group group detail

WEBUI Select the port of the card, and click the Port tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the administrative state on the protection side client/line ports.
CLI show interface

PRELIMINARY
If the state is down, the switch may have been caused by user administrative provisioning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check for faults on the protection side card, or the protection side client/line ports.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
no faults are present, the switch may have occurred due to a
transient defect that has since cleared. The
action required to clear this condition depends
on whether or not there are outstanding
problems against the working
facility/equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Initiate a manual switch to working.
CLI config aps group group manualSwitchtoWorking
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config aps group group clearSwitch
If there are faults against protection facility/equipment:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Resolve the fault(s) against protection facility/equipment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
CLI config aps group group detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Initiate a lockout of protect.
CLI config aps group <group> lockout
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR
WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)
This is a standing condition indicating that the protection facility/equipment is active.
This condition is raised only when reversion is enabled.
If the working facility/equipment is error-free then the condition automatically clears
once the wait-to-restore timer has expired.

4DPA4-1-{7, 8}-C{1- 4}
The action required to clear this condition depends on whether or not there are
outstanding problems against the working facility/equipment.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If there
are no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Initiate a manual switch to work.
CLI config aps group <group> manualSwitchtoWorking
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
If there are faults against working facility/equipment:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Resolve the fault(s) against working facility/equipment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Initiate a lockout of protect.
CLI config aps group <group> lockout
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
8 Supporting Procedures
8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists the following troubleshooting procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 that are used in more than one trouble-clearing procedure.
Contents
Replacing system components 8-2

Database Backup and Restore 8-23
Determining the far end of a service 8-25
Checking for services on a port 8-26
Performing loopbacks 8-27
Path power trace 8-28
High temperature troubleshooting 8-30
Reseating a card 8-32
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures Replacing system components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing system components

Slot equipage requirement
Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow. All slots in the shelf
must be occupied with circuit packs or blanks, and all packs must be fully inserted into
the shelf to maintain proper air flow. The shelf must not have an empty slot. Empty slots
or partially inserted cards will decrease air flow across installed circuit packs and will
decrease their cooling. Circuit packs could potentially be subject to failure as their
temperatures increases.
Replacing a card (general)
NOTICE
A card reseat is service impacting if the card is currently carrying services. To discover if
any services are currently carried over a card, perform the procedure “Checking for
services on a port” (p. 8-26). If there are services currently carried over the card, it may
be best to wait for a maintenance window before reseating the card.
Cooling airflow is critically important for reliable transmission. Every slot in the subrack
requires a circuit pack (card) or circuit pack blank to ensure proper airflow. Do not
remove old cards until new cards are fully prepared for installation. New cards should be
installed within five minutes of old card removal in order to maintain proper airflow and
cooling for the other cards within the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the replacement card is unpacked and prepared for immediate installation
before starting any other work.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the fan to maximum speed.
CLI config fan maximum

WEBUI FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Maximum
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures Replacing system components
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that you have an unobstructed extraction path. Tie back any adjacent fibers that
may be impacted by the card extraction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting up and out. This will partially unseat
the card from the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Grasp the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot, being careful not to pull
on any connected fibers on the NE. You will encounter some resistance while the card is
seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling force to unseat the card from the backplane.
Slide the card out of the slot. When the card is almost removed, place a hand under the
card to avoid dropping it when it is fully removed from the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue
with Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Grasp replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the
card's PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Align the card's PCB with the card guides.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted,
grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Set the fan back to normal speed.
CLI config fan normal

WEBUI FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Normal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Check the card for alarms:
CLI alm
Note: If the card software version does not match the NE software version, the card
automatically upgrades to the correct software version. In this case, a software
upgrade alarm will be present.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Replacing an SFP module

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the SFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert SFP extraction tool into SFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently push in bottom wedge on SFP extraction tool to release SFP retention spring.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 8-1 Push in wedge
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Pull on body of SFP extraction tool to remove SFP.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 8-2 Pull out SFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove SFP from extraction tool by depressing blue locking clips on SFP extraction tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement SFP module (protocol, wavelength, and
reach) match the specifications of the removed SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push on the front of the SFP module
PRELIMINARY
until you hear a "click" sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP
slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the fibers.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check the interface for alarms:
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Replacing an XFP module

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the XFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Use the hook on the end of the XFP extractor/LC connector tool (or similar tool) to pull
down the bail on the XFP.
Figure 8-3 XFP bail
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use hook on end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool to pull the XFP straight back until
its bail can be grasped by fingers.
Figure 8-4 XFP bail pull
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Grasp the bail with fingers and completely extract XFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement XFP module (protocol, wavelength, and
reach) match the specifications of the removed SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Slide the replacement XFP module into the XFP slot. Push on the front of the SFP module
until you hear a "click" sound, indicating the XFP module is securely locked into the XFP
slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing an OSC SFP module
NOTICE
services on a port” (p. 8-26).
Note: You must complete this entire replacement procedure within 5 minutes, or a
insert a blank after pulling the LD (A2325A, or AHPHG pack) from the slot in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the LD are labeled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the LD pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the LD from the shelf, the OSC SFP is mounted inside the pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that all of the OSC fibers connected to the OSC SFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the OSC SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Release the latch on the OSC SFP module. The latch used to secure the module in the
OSC SFP port may use either a lever or push-button locking mechanism:
• To release a lever latch, lift the latch 90 degrees so that it is perpendicular to the card
faceplate.
• To release a push button latch, depress the push button located on the side of the OSC
SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 With the latch in the release position, grasp the OSC SFP module on both sides and
PRELIMINARY
remove it from the OSC SFP slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement OSC SFP module (protocol,
wavelength, and reach) match the specifications of the removed OSC SFP module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Insert the replacement OSC SFP module into the OSC SFP slot. Push on the front of the
OSC SFP module until you hear a “click” sound, indicating the OSC SFP module is
securely locked into the OSC SFP slot. Be sure that the OS1 and OS2 fibers are correctly
connected to the OS1 or OS2 SFP or XFP ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the OSC fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Reinsert the LD.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Uncap, clean, and reinsert the LD fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Replacing an Equipment Controller

Removal of the Equipment Controller does not affect service, but does affect EMS
connectivity, NE communications, and alarm notification.
You can also transfer a valid database onto a new Equipment Controller by restoring the
database.
To perform this procedure using the WebUI, go to “To replace an Equipment Controller
using the WebUI” (p. 8-10).
To perform this procedure using the CLI, go to “To replace an Equipment Controller
using CLI” (p. 8-14).
To replace an Equipment Controller using the WebUI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
1 Login to the WebUI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 information and back up the database (see “Backing Up a Database Using the WebUI”
(p. 8-23)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the Equipment Controller.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Alarms.
Result: The Alarm List is displayed. The Equipment Controller will have a
DBINVALID alarm active after the reboot has completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller is new from the continue with Step 6
factory,
the Equipment Controller has the current proceed to Step 24.
desired software,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the shelf and slot where the User Panel is located (slot 40). Click the plus sign and
select OAMP.
Result: The Port Interface Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter a valid IP address in the IP Address field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select System in the Equipment Tree.

Result: The System Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter values in the NE Name and Loopback IP Address fields.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select Administration > Networking > IP Routes.

Result: The IP Routes window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Leave the fields on this window at their default values. Select the Advertise field. Click
Create.
PRELIMINARY
Result: The Create Static IP Route window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Select Administration > Software > FTP Server.

Result: The FTP Server Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 8-1, “FTP Server
Parameters” (p. 8-12).
Table 8-1 FTP Server Parameters
Parameter Definition Input Default Value Allowed

Required Values
Server IP The IP address Yes 0 Valid dotted
Address where the quad
database is
stored.
Root Directory The path where Yes N/A
the database is
located on the
PC.
User ID Your user ID Yes N/A
New Password Your password Yes N/A
Confirm Your password Yes N/A
Password retyped for
verification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Select Administration > Software > Upgrade.

Result: The Software Upgrade window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 In the Action Type field, select Audit. Click Apply.

Result: When the window is re-displayed, the Status field changes to Completed.
Note: If the release on the Equipment Controller is a higher number that the
release number you are loading onto it, this is a downgrade; you must select the
Force Upgrade option with audit.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 In the Action Type field, select Download. Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Status field changes to In Progress. Wait a few minutes for the software to
download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Click Refresh.
Result: The Status field changes to Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 In the Action Type field, select Activate. Click Apply.

Result: A warning is displayed, saying that this action is service-affecting (see Figure
8-5, “Service-Affecting Warning Window” (p. 8-13)).
Figure 8-5 Service-Affecting Warning Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Click OK.
Result: The system will log you out of the NE. Wait a few minutes for the software to
activate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Login to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 In the Action Type field, select Commit. Click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
24 To clear the DBINVALID alarm, restore the database (see “Restoring the Database Using
the WebUI” (p. 8-24)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Click Alarms. The Alarms List is displayed. The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm should not be
present in the Alarm List.
If... Then...
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised, continue with Step 26.
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 In the Action field, select Commit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Click Alarms.
Result: The Alarms List is displayed. The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm should not be
present in the Alarm List.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To replace an Equipment Controller using CLI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that you are working with a valid database. Set up the database server information.
Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. Type database server config.
2. config database server ip IP Address, using the IP address where the
database is stored.
3. config database userid, then enter your user ID and password when prompted.
4. config database path directory with the path on the PC where the database is
PRELIMINARY
saved.
5. config database detail to verify your IP address, user ID, and path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Backup the database by typing:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
config database backup
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the Equipment Controller.

The Equipment Controller will have a DBINVALID alarm active after the reboot has
completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller is new from the continue with Step 5
factory or does not contain the desired
software release,
the Equipment Controller has the current proceed to Step 13.
desired software,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To configure or verify the OAMP port details, type

config interface ec shelf/slot/oamp ip IP address/subnet mask.
A warning is displayed:
WARNING: Changing the OAMP ethernet port IP address may result
in a loss of IP connectivity to this and other network elements.
Type yes to confirm the configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To configure or verify the TID, type config general name NE name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To configure or verify the loopback IP address, type

config interface loopback ip loopback IP address/subnet mask.
A warning is displayed:
WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result in a warm
reset of this network element.
Type yes to confirm the configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
8 To configure or verify static routes, type config cn routes default add gateway
default IP address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Set up the software server information. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. config software server ip IP address
2. config software server userid user ID
Enter your password when prompted.
3. config software server root /path
4. config software server detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Set up the database server information. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. Type database server config.
2. config database server ip IP Address, using the IP address where the
database is stored.
3. config database userid, then enter your user ID and password when prompted.
4. config database path directory with the path on the PC where the database is
saved.
5. config database detail to verify your IP address, user ID, and path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Upgrade the software. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. config software upgrade manual audit release directory on RFS
no backup enforced. (The release directory would be combined with the
Software server root parameter value to make the path on the Remote File Server
where the software release resides. See also the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
Installation and System Turn-up Guide.)
2. config software upgrade manual load
3. Type config software upgrade manual activate.
The system will reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Login to the NE.

Type config software upgrade commit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Telnet to the NE where the Equipment Controller is located.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
14 Replace the Equipment Controller in the shelf. Wait a few minutes for the Equipment
Controller to initialize.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 The database server information must be set up to point to the latest database backup for
this NE, which will be pulled down to the NE during a downgrade automatically. (See
Step 1.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Login to the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Type alm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 If... Then...
the DBINVALID alarm is raised, restore the database (see “Restoring the
Database Using the WebUI” (p. 8-24)).
DBINVALID alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Repeat Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Restore the database. Type config database restore and at the prompt, type yes to
confirm.
The system will reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Login to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Type alm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 If... Then...
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised, type config software upgrade commit
and wait a few minutes for the alarm to clear.
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing the air filter
Need PSS-4 specifics for this procedure??
It is recommended that you replace the air filter on the 1830 PSS-32 at approximately 3
month intervals, with a periodicity depending on the environmental conditions.
When a fan in the fan tray stops working, the other fans in the tray increase to maximum
speed.
Before you begin this procedure, be sure to wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Unscrew the filter retainer with slot labeling on the lower front of the shelf and slide it
forward (see Figure 8-6, “Unscrew Filter Retainer” (p. 8-18)).
Figure 8-6 Unscrew Filter Retainer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reach beneath the filter retainer and locate the air filter. Slide the air filter out of the shelf.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Discard the old air filter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Locate the arrows on the front of the new filter (see Figure 8-7, “New Filter” (p. 8-19)).
Figure 8-7 New Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 With the arrows pointing up, slide the new filter in and up into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Screw the filter retainer back into place (see Figure 8-8, “New Filter Installed” (p. 8-19)).
Figure 8-8 New Filter Installed
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing the fan
PSS-4 specifics needed for this procedure??
When a fan in the fan tray stops working, the other fans in the tray increase to maximum
speed. It is recommended that you either replace the fan within 60 seconds.
Before you begin this procedure, be sure to wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the space in front of the fan unit is completely clear of fibers, cables, and so
on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the new fan unit is completely unpacked and ready to install before removing
old fan unit.
Note: The 1830 PSS-32 circuit packs require constant airflow for cooling and will
overheat quickly with the fan removed. Do not remove the old fan until you are ready
to immediately install the new fan or customer traffic may be affected.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 8-9 Fan Unit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean or replace the air filter prior to replacing fan unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fully loosen the two Phillips head screws at the left and right ends on the front of the fan
unit. (The screws are captured and will not fall out of the fan unit.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Grasp fan unit handles and slide fan unit straight back until it is free of the sub rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert new fan unit immediately.

PRELIMINARY
Note: The 1830 PSS-32 system cannot operate for more than 60 seconds without a
fan unit installed .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Gently tighten fan unit screws.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures Database Backup and Restore
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database Backup and Restore

Backing Up a Database Using the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Administration > Database > Backup and Restore.

Result: The Backup and Restore window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 8-2, “Database
Backup and Restore Parameters” (p. 8-23).
Table 8-2 Database Backup and Restore Parameters
Parameter Definition Input Default Value Allowed

Required Values
Protocol File transfer No TFTP TFTP, SFTP
protocol used for
the
backup/restore
request.
Server IP The IP address Yes 0 Valid dotted
Address where the quad
database is
stored.
Directory The path where Yes N/A
the database is
located on the
PC.
Filename The filename of Yes N/A
the database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply > Backup.

Result: A window is displayed, confirming that the backup process has been initiated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures Database Backup and Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring the Database Using the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Administration > Database > Backup and Restore.

Result: The Backup and Restore window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 8-2, “Database
Backup and Restore Parameters” (p. 8-23).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply > Restore, or if you want to use your previous serial number, click Force
Restore.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures Determining the far end of a service
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determining the far end of a service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OCh Trail name for the near end of the service.
CLI show xc brief
Search for the <shelf/slot/port> corresponding to the card and port in question. This will
provide the information required to proceed to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a trace to determine the far end of the OChTrail.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the output of Step 2 to determine the far end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures Checking for services on a port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Checking for services on a port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Look at the activity of services on all ports of the card:
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity brief
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any services are marked as Active then this equipment is currently carrying active
services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It may be possible to switch all services onto an alternate path if all services are protected.
Examine the output from Step 1. If a service is protected it will have a protection member
listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If you wish to switch all protected services off this path:

1. Obtain the details of the service activity
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity detail
This will reveal the nodes that are the endpoints of the service as well as the APS
protection groups.
Repeat items 2 through 5 for each protected service:
2. Log into the one end of the service.
3. Issue a force switch away from the path about to be broken.
4. Log into the other end of the service.
5. Issue a force switch away from the path about to be broken.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To confirm if all services have been moved off of this equipment

1. Log back into the local node.
2. Look at the activity of services on all ports of the alarmed card.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/port>srvcActivity brief

PRELIMINARY
3. If any services are marked as Active then this equipment is still carrying active
services.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures Performing loopbacks
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing loopbacks
For information and illustrations of loopbacks refer to the Alcatel-Lucent Product
Information and Planning Guide.
The following table lists the loopbacks that can be performed:
Card Loopbacks
11DPE12 • client port facility loopback
11QPA4 • client port terminal loopback
4DPA4 • network port facility loopback
• network port terminal loopback
Note: To create a loopback on a card using the CLI, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent CLI
Command Guide.
Attention: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the
card.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures Path power trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Path power trace

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a power trace of any affected paths.
CLI alm
sh condition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the first point along the path at which power out of range or absent is observed, or
there is a significant difference between expected and observed power. This point is
referred to as the "First point of concern" in this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the alarms close to the first point of concern.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Troubleshoot the alarms, concentrating on the points adjacent to the first point of concern.
The problem is most likely located between the first point of concern and the detection
point immediately upstream from it.
Note: It may take several seconds after corrective actions have been applied for
channel missing, channel absent, and power out of range alarms to clear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the relevant connection exists and is administratively up at the first point of
concern and at the point immediately upstream from it.
CLI show xc brief
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Examine the output for the connection of the appropriate band and channel. If the
connection exists then check the admin states of the connection and associated ports.
CLI show xc <shelf/slot/port> <shelf/slot/port> <band>

<channel> trace
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the connection or ports are admin down then the entities must be brought admin up in
order to clear the alarm(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures Path power trace
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To bring a connection admin up:
CLI config xc <shelf/slot/port> <shelf/slot/port> <band>

<channel> state up
If this clears the problem, go to Step 12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If this connection terminates on a transponder then confirm that the associated client port
is administratively up.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the client port is admin down then it must be brought admin up in order to clear the
alarm(s).
CLI config interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort> state up
If this clears the problem, go to Step 12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check that the programmed topology matches the actual topology.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If there are multiple alarms at the same point of interest, attempt to resolve the amplifier
alarms first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Stop. You have completed this procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures High temperature troubleshooting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High temperature troubleshooting

High temperature threshold exceeded
A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,
fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed
sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature
(measured by temperature sensors on the card).
Note: It may take several minutes for corrective actions to lower the temperature.
Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it doesn't, then go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the fan tray is installed and that no fan tray alarms are present. Correct any
faults found.
CLI show fan * alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Visually inspect the shelf to confirm that filler cards are installed in all empty slots in the
shelf. This helps ensure proper airflow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for a dirty air filter. Clean or replace it as necessary. Contact your service
representative for replacement filters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use a thermometer to measure the ambient air temperature at the intake of the fans. Verify
that the ambient temperature is not abnormally high. If the ambient temperature is too
high, the NE may require additional cooling to bring it back to an acceptable operating
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their upper limit (within 10 °C).

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures High temperature troubleshooting
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product
Support guide to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures Reseating a card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reseating a card
NOTICE
services on a port” (p. 8-26).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting up and out. This will partially unseat
the card from the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Grasp the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot an additional 1 cm
(about 1/4 inch) being careful not to pull on any connected fibers on the NE. You will
encounter some resistance while the card is seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling
force to unseat the card from the backplane. All of the LEDs on the card will be off when
the card is fully unseated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Wait for 10 seconds.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
PRELIMINARY
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Supporting Procedures Reseating a card
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check the card for alarms:
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Supporting Procedures Reseating a card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A access identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added
to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is
through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,
DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See “access identifier ” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AIM
See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition.
alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)

A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received
a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
PRELIMINARY
alarm indication signal (AIS)

A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 GL-1
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.
alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) for related term.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ANSI
See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition.
APD
See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APS
See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APSD
See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition.
ASE
See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition.
asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is
designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,
image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time
in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth
PRELIMINARY
requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and
other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
ATM
See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power shutdown (APSD)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to
avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)

A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route
when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)

A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By
applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal
current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B back reflection
See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-12).
background block errors (BBE)

Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.
backward defect indication (BDI)

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)

A band-dependent optical card.
bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.
PRELIMINARY
BB
See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBA
See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBE
See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BDI
See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BER
See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition.
bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)

A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by
providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are
interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers
for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around
the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is
used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many
bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BOF
See “band optical filter” (p. GL-3) for definition.
broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at
lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)

Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C CAD
See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition.
central office (CO)

A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
distance subscribers.
PRELIMINARY
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
channel add/drop card (CAD)

Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.
channel optical filter (COF)

COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIDR
See “classless inter-domain routing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
CIT
See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition.
cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)

Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet
mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are
not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the
original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions.
CLEI
See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CN
See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CO
See “central office” (p. GL-4) for definition.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for
transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength
PRELIMINARY
division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
COF
See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition.
common language element identifier (CLEI)

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
control network (CN)

The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does
not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
coupling ratio/loss (CR)

The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CPE
See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CR
See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition.
craft interface terminal (CIT)

A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)

PRELIMINARY
Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The
equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.
CWDM
See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D data communication network (DCN)

DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management
system (NMS).
DCM
See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DCN
See “data communication network” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DHCP
See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications -
Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
DWDM
See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)

PRELIMINARY
A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.
dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)

DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack
software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E earth
The European term for electrical ground.
EC
See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition.
EDFA
See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition.
edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an
interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network
EIA
See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition.
electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)

Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides
optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)

EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)

EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or
system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.
electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.
Element Management System (EMS)

The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces
to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
PRELIMINARY
(SLA) management.
EMC
See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EMI
See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMS
See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm.”
Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)

EC is the equipment controller card˙, in a chassis with replaceable controllers, or it is the
integrated control hardware in a PSS-1.
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into
the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is
used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the
1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,
and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
ESD
See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
ETSI
See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-9) for definition.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to
PRELIMINARY
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
failure in time (FIT)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
FC
See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCC
See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCS
See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-12) for definition.
FDA
See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDDI
See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FDI
See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FEC
See “forward error correction” (p. GL-11) for definition.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are
token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
PRELIMINARY
fiber optic cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers.
fiber optic connector (FC)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)

General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are
mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.
file transfer protocol (FTP)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
FIT
See “failure in time” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
flash disk memory module (FMM)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA)

An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for
the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological
medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary
products, and cosmetics.
forward defect indicator (FDI)

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking
layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP
label.
forward error correction (FEC)

A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
PRELIMINARY
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA
See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-11) for definition.
frame check sequence (FCS)

Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and
other data link layer protocols.
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back
reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-11) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
gateway network element (GNE)

A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of
the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.
GbE
See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition.
generic framing protocol (GFP)

Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or
Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
stream.
GFP
See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition.
Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
PRELIMINARY
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition.
graphical user interface (GUI)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.
GUI
See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-12) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I ILA
See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition.
in-line amplifier (ILA)

A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-23) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.
insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)

An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a
worldwide basis.
Internet protocol (IP)

A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
PRELIMINARY
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)

A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and
for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)

A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related
services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
IP
See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition.
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)

See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISO
See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISP
See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-14) for definition.
ITU
See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L lambda (λ)
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term.
laser bias current (LBC)

Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
PRELIMINARY
LBC
See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition.
LBO
See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LC
See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LD
See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on
the NE itself.
line build out (LBO)

Attenuation used to simulate a load.
line driver (LD)

An amplifier used to improve the strength of a signal at its source by driving the input of the
transmission line with an amplified signal.
link state advertisement (LSA)

A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.
LOF
See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition.
long reach (LR)

An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
LOS
See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition.
loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
loss of frame (LOF)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)

A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition.
PRELIMINARY
LSA
See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition.
Lucent connector (LC)

Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power
requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single
mode).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M MAC
See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition.
management information base (MIB)

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
master controller (MC)

The system's master controller (MC) card.
MC
See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MD4H
A PSS-1 Multiservice Dual module unit with 4 client ports per module, which is temperature
Hardened.
mean time between failures (MTBF)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.
mean time to repair (MTTR)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
media access control (MAC)

The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the
media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as
many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and
two for the west.
MIB
See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition.
PRELIMINARY
mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)

An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external
dispersion compensation unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTBF
See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTTR
See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition.
multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition.
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NE
See “network element” (p. GL-17) for definition.
NEBS
See “Network Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)

Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching
and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,
PRELIMINARY
and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are ILA (in-line amplifier) and
ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)

The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)

Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.
NMS
See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-17) for definition.
node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more 1830 PSS-32 shelves that are viewed as a
single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the following:
• up to two single optical shelves
• a single electrical shelf
• a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)

Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition.
NTP
See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OA
See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
OC-n
PRELIMINARY
See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-19) for definition.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)

OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health
legislation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHAN or OCh
See “optical channel” (p. GL-19) for definition.
ODU
See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OOF
See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition.
Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
Operations Support System (OSS)

A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or
provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on
mainframes or minicomputers.
OPR
See “optical path restoration” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OPS
See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical
signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction
are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or
reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)

A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.
PRELIMINARY
optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
within the context of one cell.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)
An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.
optical demultiplexer (ODU)

Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.
optical path protection (OPP)

A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,
there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)

A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method
is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).
optical power meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)

An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.
optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise
signal.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and
operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and
orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)

An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.
OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is
not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,
reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring
(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)

A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network.
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical Network”
(p. GL-28) for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)

PRELIMINARY
The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical
data.
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSC
See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSHA
See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-18) for definition.
OSI
See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSP
See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition.
OSS
See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OT
See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OTN
See “optical transport network” (p. GL-20) for definition.
out of frame (OOF)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)

Refers to outside the central office/building premises.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P PCS
See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDL
See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDU
See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-22) for definition.
performance monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
PRELIMINARY
(before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)

A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
photonic protection switch (PPS)
By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are
automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)

PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.
PM
See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-21) for definition.
PMD
See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition.
point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
received optical signal.
PPS
See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-21) for definition.
protocol data unit (PDU)

A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-21) for definition.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q QoS
See “quality of service” (p. GL-22) for definition.
quality of service (QoS)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as
signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as 1830 PSS-32
shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also called bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)

Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
OSNR degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating
a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line
tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate
resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)

Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term.
PRELIMINARY
request for comment (RFC)

A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See “request for comment” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RIP
See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition.
RJ
See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RMON
See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-23) for definition.
ROADM
See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-23) for definition.
routing information protocol (RIP)

RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)
that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on
the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SA
See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SAN
See “storage area network” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SC
See “shelf controller” (p. GL-25) for definition.
scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SDH
PRELIMINARY
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition.
secure shell (SSH)

An encrypted method of transmitting data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage.
service affecting (SA)

Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.
Service Level Agreement (SLA)

A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
services
Within the 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end customers or be used
internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFD
See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFP
See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition.
shared risk group (SRG)

A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items
therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with cards. The shelf
provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The shelf is mounted
in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every node has one shelf
that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node. The node appears as
a single point in the network topology to the network management system. Connections between
nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)

The SC card in a 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
PRELIMINARY
signaling transfer point (STP)

A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the 1830 PSS-32 nodes and the NMS. The
SNMP traffic is carried over the 1830 PSS-32 control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition.
small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)

An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use
with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP
transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can
be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in
modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a
single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SMF
See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SNCP
See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SNMP
See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-25) for definition.
software control of transmission (SCOT)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
software generic (SW generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.
PRELIMINARY
SONET
See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET wavelength service
The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the 1830 PSS-32
network.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
SRG
See “shared risk group” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSH
See “secure shell” (p. GL-24) for definition.
SSMF
See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-27) for definition.
ST
See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-27) for definition.
standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)

This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
static filter, CWDM (SFC)

A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.
static filter, DWDM (SFD)

A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.
storage area network (SAN)

A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data
storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.
PRELIMINARY
STP
See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-25) for definition.
straight-tip connector (ST)

Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS, STS-n
See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-28) for definition.
Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)

An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.
SW generic
See “software generic” (p. GL-26) for definition.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40
Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the
international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET
technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical
long-distance networks.
SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the
physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 mB/s, called
OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on
an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T tap
The entry point into a system module.
target identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.
TCA
See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition.
PRELIMINARY
TCP
See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDM
See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition.
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive
information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See “target identifier” (p. GL-28) for definition.
time-division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium
by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire
bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to
send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)

An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See “Telecommunications Management Network” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TOADM
See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition.
topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.
PRELIMINARY
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a 1830 PSS-32
network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)

A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in
conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UDP
See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
UL
See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,
assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)

A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures
by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring
are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction
(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for
example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along
opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport
channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:
• is path-specific as opposed to line specific
• does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
• requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition.
user datagram protocol (UDP)

A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
PRELIMINARY
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UTC
Coordinated universal time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V variable optical attenuator (VOA)

A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the
receiving equipment.
VCAT
See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition.
very short reach (VSR)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)

1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.
VOA
See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VSR
See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VTS
See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-31) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W wave division multiplexing (WDM)

WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division
multiplexing (DWDM).
PRELIMINARY
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of 1830 PSS-32 which allows for
the tracking of wavelengths through the 1830 PSS-32 network, and for the measuring of the
wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-31) for definition.
WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
Web user interface (WebUI)

A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See “Web user interface” (p. GL-32) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)

PRELIMINARY
A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Glossary
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z ZIC (zero installation craft)

An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
September 2010
Index
PRELIMINARY
A alien wavelength access, 2-87 BDIODU, 6-23 Connect to Network Element
ALLCHANMISS, 6-7 Before you begin, 3-3 Web user interface (WebUI)/
CLI, 4-2
ALLCHANMISSOUT, 6-8 .............................................................
CONTCOM
AMPDISABLED, 6-9 C Card failure
Card Failure - Communication,
APRNODE, 6-10 communication, 6-26 7-33
APROSC, 6-11 Device, 6-27 .............................................................
APRTOPO, 6-12 Card identification event, 6-30
D danger, potential sources of, 1-4
APRUNAVAIL, 6-13 Card initializing, 6-24
Data error, 6-31
APRUNAVAILOSC, 6-14 Card missing, 6-144
Database invalid, 6-36
APSB, 6-15 Card over temperature, 6-73
Database restore, 6-38
APSCM, 6-16 Card provisioning
DATAFLT
APSMM, 6-17 failure, 6-32
Card Provisioning Failure,
AUTHFAIL, 6-18 Card under temperature, 6-74 7-43
AUTORESET, 7-26 Card-Failure DB backup, 6-33
............................................................. Boot, 6-44 DB Failure Local
B B1SD, 6-20, 7-27 Device, 6-43 copy creation of processing
failure, 6-34
barred-hand symbol, 1-12 CARDINIT
DB Failure Transport
BASELINE, 6-21, 7-28 Card Initializing, 7-31
file transport failure, 6-35
Battery off or power filter off, Cleaning optical connectors, 4-24
6-136 DBFL
Cleaning other optical
BDI, 6-22 components, 4-28 DB Failure Local - copy
creation of processing failure,
Backward Defect Indication, CLI access, 3-24
PRELIMINARY
7-45
7-29
Configuration failure, 6-25
DBFT
BDI-ODU
configure system properties, 3-37
DB Failure Transport - file
Backward Defect Indication
ODU, 7-30 transport failure, 7-46
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 IN-1
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBINVALID FELANRFI, 6-58 INTEMP
Database invalid, 7-47 FELOS, 6-59, 7-80 over, 7-96
DBMEMTRF, 6-37 FEPORTMISMATCH, 6-60, 7-81 under, 7-98
DEG FEPRLF, 6-61 Introduction, 2-3
Signal Degrade - ODU, 6-39, Fiber cleaning, 4-24 INTRUSION, 6-75
7-51
FPGAFAIL, 6-62 Invalid topology, 6-135
Design, 2-5
FPGAINIT, 6-63 .............................................................
Determining the far end of a
FPGATIMEOUT, 6-64 L LAN1 Ethernet, 3-34
service, 8-25
FRCDWKSWBK, 6-65, 7-86 LANLFI, 6-76
Discover pluggable module, 6-40
FRCDWKSWPR, 6-66, 7-87 LANLOS, 6-77, 7-102
.............................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE, 6-67 LANLSS, 6-78, 7-103
E Electrical Sub-Network
Connection Protection (ESCNP) FWUPGRADEPENDING, 6-68 LANRFI, 6-79
Provision, 4-6 FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT, lasers
electrostatic discharge, 1-4, 1-11 6-69
classes, 1-7
.............................................................
EQPT
eye damage, 1-7
Card Failure - Device, 7-56 G GCC network setup, 4-19
safety, 1-6
ESD, 1-11 Glossary, GL-1
warning labels, 1-9
ETR setting, 4-23 ground strap, ESD, 1-11
LC fiber removal, 3-19
example configuration of ftp .............................................................
LCK, 6-80
server, 3-39
H HIBER, 6-70 LFD, 6-81
Excess current, 6-49
HIGAIN, 6-71 LFIEGR, 6-82
Excessive BER, 6-42
High Input Voltage Defect, 6-168 Link Down, 6-83
.............................................................
............................................................. LINKDOWN, 7-109
F Facility loop active, 6-96
I ID module replacement, 4-29 LOCKOUTOFPR, 6-84, 7-112
FACTERM-DEV
in-line amplifier LOF, 6-85
SFP SEEP Failure, 7-70
ILA, 2-38 Loss Of Frame, 7-114
FANSPEEDHIGH, 6-51
initialize database, 3-21 LOFEGR, 6-86, 7-119
FANSPEEDLOW, 6-52
INSERTMOD, 6-72 LOGAIN, 6-88
FANSPEEDMAN, 6-53
Inspecting optical connectors, 4-27 LOM, 6-89
Feature, 2-11
Installation and Provisioning of Loss of Multiframe - OTU,
PRELIMINARY
FECDEG, 6-54 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, 3-4, 7-125

FELANLFI, 6-55 3-5
loopback IP address, 3-33
FELANLOS, 6-56, 7-77 installation and seat packs, 3-20
Loopbacks, 2-88
FELANLSS, 6-57, 7-78
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS NET, 6-110, 7-167 PC setup and provisioning, 4-4
Loss of signal, 7-127, 7-144 network configurations Performance monitoring, 2-90
OMD, 6-90 Ethernet, 2-52 Performing loopbacks, 8-27
OTU, 6-95 NOTALLOWED, 6-111 PLM, 6-134, 7-207
LOS-O, 6-93 ............................................................. Port degrade, 6-28, 6-29, 6-46,
6-47
LOS-OUT, 6-94, 7-141 O OCHCOLLISION, 6-114
Port Provisioning, 4-10
LOSDCM, 6-91, 7-134 OCHCOLLISION-OUT, 6-115
potential sources of danger, 1-4
Low Input Voltage Defect, 6-169 OCHFDI, 6-118
PRCDRERR-TOPO, 7-208
LPBKLINE OCHKEYDUP, 6-116
Protection
Line (Facility), 7-146 OCHKEYOVERLAP, 6-117
E-SNCP, 2-82
LPBKTERM OCHPDI, 6-119
PSS-4 OTs, 2-18
Diagnostic (Terminal), 7-147 OCHTRAILDUP, 6-120
PWR
LSSEGR, 6-98 OCHTRAILUNKNOWN, 6-121
Battery off or power filter off,
............................................................. OCHUNKNOWN, 6-122 7-212
M MAN OCHUNKNOWN-OUT, 6-123 PWRADJFAIL, 6-137, 7-214
card in maintenance, 6-99, OCI, 6-124 PWRADJREQ, 6-138, 7-217
7-149
Open Connection Indication - PWRMARGIN, 6-139, 7-219
port in maintenance, 6-99, ODU, 7-191
7-149 PWRMAXGAIN, 6-140, 7-221
OPR, 6-125
MANRESET, 6-101 PWRSUSP, 6-141
OPR-OUT, 6-130
MANWKSWBK, 6-102, 7-153 PWRTILTSUSP, 6-142
OPRLOSSHIGH, 6-128
MANWKSWPR, 6-103, 7-154 .............................................................
OPRLOSSLOW, 6-129
MISMATCH R Reliability program, 2-99
OPRPWRHIGH, 6-126
card, 6-104 REMOVEMOD, 6-143
OPRPWRLOW, 6-127
power filter, 6-104 REPLUNTMISS
OPRTX, 6-131
SFP Mismatch, 7-159 Card Missing, 7-226
OPRUNACHIEVE, 6-132
MISMATCHMOD SFP Missing, 7-228
optical transponder
SFP/XFP mismatch, 6-105 RFIEGR, 6-147
11DPE12, 2-22
MOD, 6-106 .............................................................
11QPA4, 2-18
MODOUTOOR, 6-107 S safety instructions
4DPA4 OT, 2-27
MTCESURV, 6-108 electrostatic discharge, 1-11
Ordering, 2-117
MTCESURVDGR, 6-109 general notes, 1-4
OSCSSF, 6-133, 7-206
............................................................. important, 1-13
.............................................................
N NE date and time, 3-35 laser, 1-6, 1-9
P path power trace, 8-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0 IN-3
September 2010
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
special, 1-4 Technical specifications, 2-133
safety precautions (enclosed Terminal
systems), 1-8
loop active, 6-97
SDBER, 6-148
TIM, 6-156, 7-247
SDEG-O, 6-149
TIMODU, 6-157, 7-250
SDH mode, 3-32
TRMTMOD, 6-158
SFP
.............................................................
SEEP failure, 6-50
U UNKNOWN
SFP module extraction, 3-17
Card, 7-254, 7-254, 7-255
SFP/XFP
UNKNOWNMOD, 6-159
missing, 6-146
update firmware, 3-36
software environment, 3-26
UPM, 6-161, 7-259
Software installation, 4-5
URU-OTS, 6-162
Software Upgrade
URU-OTU, 6-163
Failed, 6-154
URU-S, 6-164
in Progress, 6-152
USALS, 6-165, 7-262
SSF, 6-150
User inactive, 6-41
Server Signal Failure - OTU,
7-235 USLOS, 6-166
SSFODU, 6-151 USOCHCOLLISION, 6-167

.............................................................
Server Signal Failure - ODU,
7-237 V verify system provisioning, 3-38
Status Retrieval, 2-95
VOLTAGE
SWFTDWN
high input defect, 7-268
Software Upgrade in Progress, low input defect, 7-269
7-239
VTSFDI, 7-271
SWUPGCOMMIT, 6-153
VTSOCI, 7-272
SWUPGFAIL
.............................................................
Software Upgrade Failed,
7-241 W warning labels, laser, 1-9
Synchronization, 2-97 WKSWBK, 6-178

PRELIMINARY
SYSBOOT, 6-155 WKSWPR, 6-179, 7-276

System access, 2-96 .............................................................
............................................................. X XFP module extraction, 3-15
T TCA profiles, 4-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Release 1.0.0
September 2010

Manual PSS 4

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual PSS 4

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PRELIMINARY

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

Reason for revision ................................................................................................................................................................. xxxi

Intended audience .................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................ xxxi

Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxiii

Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxiii

Related information .............................................................................................................................................................. xxxiii

User interface to system ...................................................................................................................................................... xxxiv

Using procedures .................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

Information product support ............................................................................................................................................... xxxv

Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvi

How to order ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvi

Training ..................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvi

Packaging collection and recovery requirements ...................................................................................................... xxxvi

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ..................................................................................................................... xxxvi

How to comment .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvii

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

General notes on safety ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser safety ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6

Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3

Hardware design and layout .................................................................................................................................................. 2-5

Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-11

1830 PSS-4 OTs ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-18

1830 PSS-4 optical amplifiers ........................................................................................................................................... 2-38

DCM shelves ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-41

Automatic power reduction (APR) .................................................................................................................................. 2-42

Ethernet EPL and EVPL services ..................................................................................................................................... 2-52

Network Topologies .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-55

Configurations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-64

Protection .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-82

Alien Wavelength Access .................................................................................................................................................... 2-87

Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-88

Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-90

Status Retrieval ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-95

System access .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-96

Synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-97

Reliability program ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-99

Ordering ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-117

Technical specifications ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-133

3 Stand-alone node set-up

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Before you begin ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

Procedure 3-3: XFP module extraction .......................................................................................................................... 3-15

Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction ........................................................................................................................... 3-17

Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal ...................................................................................................................................... 3-19

Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs ....................................................................................................... 3-20

Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................... 3-21

Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................... 3-24

Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ............................................................................................... 3-32

Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address ............................................................................................................... 3-33

Procedure 3-12: Configure the OAMP Ethernet port ................................................................................................ 3-34

Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................. 3-36

Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties ........................................................................................ 3-37

Procedure 3-16: Verify system provisioning ................................................................................................................ 3-38

Procedure 3-17: Example configuration of ftp server ............................................................................................... 3-39

4 User Operations Procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning ........................................................................ 4-4

Procedure 4-3: Software installation .................................................................................................................................. 4-5